Porsche Cayenne S car Driver's Manual

Dear Customer,
You have chosen the new Cayenne.
Congratulations and thank you for your
trust in the Porsche name.
The Cayenne is a vehicle that does not
just fit into one particular category. Its
on-road performance is pure Porsche.
Its performance off-road is exceptional.
Exactly like its transport concept.
The high level of comfort and total
practicality must also not be forgotten.
In other words: a typical Porsche.
A vehicle steeped in more than 50 years
of sports car history. A vehicle that
benefits from the experience gained by
Porsche in many successful rallies.
The result:
a vehicle, the like of which has never
been seen before.
The 3rd Porsche.
In this Driver's Manual, you will find all
you need to know about your new
Cayenne.
The booklet entitled “Guarantee &
Maintenance” provides you, your
workshop and the next owner of your
Porsche with useful information on
servicing.
Our worldwide after-sales service organisation is glad to be at your service.
After the guarantee has expired, you
should still keep to the recommended
service intervals. This will pay off not
just in driving quality but also if you sell
your Cayenne or trade it in at your
Porsche partner.
With your Cayenne, we wish you what
every Porsche stands for:
Pure driving pleasure.
Mile after mile.
And year after year.
Yours sincerely,
Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG
Orientation guides in the Driver’s Manual
Equipment
Porsche, the Porsche Crest, Cayenne,
Tiptronic and Tequipment are registered
trademarks of Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG.
The orientation guides in the Driver’s Manual are
highlighted in yellow in each case.
Printed in Germany.
Overall table of contents
Because our vehicles undergo continuous development, equipment and specification may not be
as illustrated or described in this Driver’s Manual.
Reprinting, even of excerpts, or duplication
of any type is only permissible with the written
authorisation of Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG.
At the start of the Driver’s Manual you will find an
overview of the overall contents of the Driver’s
Manual.
© Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG
Porscheplatz 1
D-70435 Stuttgart
Section contents
WKD 948 020 08
#
10/06
48268
On-board literature
Please always keep this literature in the vehicle
and please hand it over to the new owner if you
sell your vehicle.
Suggestions
Do you have any questions, suggestions or ideas
for your vehicle or for the on-board literature?
Please write to us:
Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG
Sales Customer Relations
Porschestraße 15-19
71634 Ludwigsburg
2
There is a summary of topics with the corresponding page numbers at the beginning of each
main chapter.
Index
There is a detailed, alphabetical index at the end
of this Driver’s Manual.
Items of equipment are sometimes optional or
vary depending on legal requirements or on the
country in which the vehicle is sold. Your Porsche
partner will be pleased to advise you on retrofitting such equipment.
Should your Porsche be fitted with any equipment
not described in this Manual, your Porsche partner
will be glad to provide information concerning
correct operation and care of the items
concerned.
Because of different legal requirements in
individual countries, the equipment in your vehicle
may vary slightly from that described in this
Driver’s Manual.
Recycling
Only in European Union countries:
Returning end-of-life vehicles
Porsche AG will arrange for your old Porsche to be
recycled in an environmentally friendly manner,
free of charge.
f To return your vehicle and obtain the relevant
Certificate of Destruction, please consult your
Porsche partner, which will gladly assist you in
disposing of your old vehicle.
Technical modifications
f Modifications may be carried out on your
vehicle only if approved by Porsche.
This ensures that your Porsche will remain
reliable and safe to drive, and that it will not be
damaged as a result of the modifications.
Your Porsche partner will be pleased to advise
you.
Safety notes!
f Only use genuine Porsche spare parts for your
vehicle or spare parts of similar quality which
have been manufactured according to the
specifications and production requirements of
Porsche. These parts are available from your
Porsche partner or a qualified specialist
workshop. Accessories which are relevant to
safety should not be used unless they have
been obtained from the Porsche Tequipment
product range or have been tested and
approved by Porsche. Your Porsche partner
will be pleased to advise you and answer any
of your questions.
However, the use of other parts or accessories may adversely affect the safety of your
vehicle, and Porsche can take no responsibility
for any loss or damage caused by their use.
Even if the supplier of other accessories or
parts is a recognised supplier, the safety of
your vehicle may still be affected if such items
are installed. Due to the large variety of
products offered in the accessory market, it is
not possible for Porsche to inspect and
approve every one.
f In addition, please note that the use of replacement parts which not approved by Porsche
may also detrimentally affect the Warranties
relating to your vehicle.
f Regularly check your vehicle for signs of
damage. Damaged or missing aerodynamic
components such as spoilers or underside
panels affect the driving behaviour and therefore must be replaced immediately.
3
Table of contents
Overview Illustrations........................... 7
Driver’s cockpit .............................................. 8
Steering wheel and instrument cluster .............. 9
Centre console, front .................................... 10
Centre console, rear ..................................... 11
Seat, rear .................................................... 12
Roof console ................................................ 13
Opening and Locking ......................... 14
Brief overview –
opening and locking from outside................... 15
Unlocking and locking from outside ................ 16
Opening and locking from inside .................... 25
Opening and closing the engine
compartment lid ........................................... 27
Malfunctions when opening and closing ......... 28
Notes on the key and central locking system . 30
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel ..... 31
Front seats................................................... 32
Front seats with memory ............................... 33
Easy Entry function ....................................... 35
Headrests .................................................... 36
Seat heating at front and rear ........................ 37
Seat belts ................................................... 39
Child restraint system ................................... 42
Brief overview – door mirrors ...................... 48
Door mirrors ................................................ 49
Interior mirror ............................................... 51
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror ............... 51
4
Table of contents
Steering wheel..............................................52
Steering wheel heating ..................................52
Steering wheel adjustment.............................53
Multi-functional steering wheel........................54
Sun visors ....................................................57
Make-up mirror .............................................57
Sun blinds, rear side windows ........................57
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater
and Heated Rear Window ................... 58
Overview of air-conditioning systems ..............59
Opening the cover flap ..................................60
Brief overview –
Manual air conditioning..................................61
Manual air conditioning..................................62
Brief overview – Automatically controlled
2-zone air-conditioning system .......................66
Automatically controlled 2-zone
air-conditioning .............................................67
Brief overview – Automatically controlled
4-zone air-conditioning system,
front control panel ........................................72
Brief overview – Automatically controlled
4-zone air-conditioning system,
rear control panel .........................................73
Automatically controlled 4-zone
air conditioning .............................................74
Vents ...........................................................80
Heated rear window ......................................81
Parking heater ..............................................82
Windows and Sliding Roofs ................ 87
Power windows.............................................88
Brief overview – sliding/lifting roof ...............92
Sliding/lifting roof .........................................93
Brief overview –
Panorama roof system ..................................97
Panorama roof system ..................................98
Emergency operation of the Panorama
roof system .............................................. 102
Lights, Direction Indicators
and Windscreen Wipers ................... 104
Light switch ................................................105
Instrument illumination.................................107
Manual headlight beam adjustment...............107
Automatic headlight beam adjustment ..........107
Direction indicator/high beam/
headlight flasher stalk .................................108
Hazard warning lights ..................................108
Interior lighting............................................109
Comfort lighting ..........................................111
Coming Home function (off delay).................111
Door-surrounding lighting.............................112
Brief overview – windscreen wipers............113
Windscreen wiper/washer stalk....................114
Multi-Purpose Display
and Instruments .............................. 117
Instrument panel .........................................118
Oil temperature gauge ................................ 120
Tachometer................................................ 120
Clock ......................................................... 120
Cooling system........................................... 121
Fuel gauge ................................................. 122
Intelligent Maintenance Computer
for the Cayenne (V6) ................................... 122
Odometer .................................................. 123
Speedometer .............................................123
Voltmeter ................................................... 124
Emission control .........................................125
Operating the multi-purpose display
on the instrument panel ............................... 126
Displaying/resetting average speed ............. 128
Displaying range on remaining fuel ............... 128
Displaying tyre pressure.............................. 128
Displaying compass ................................... 128
Displaying navigation information ................. 128
Opening the main menu............................... 128
Operating the telephone via
the multi-purpose display ............................. 129
Setting speed limit
on the multi-purpose display ........................ 131
Displaying warning messages ...................... 132
Displaying status of level control .................. 133
Displaying status of locks/reduction............. 133
Displaying average consumption .................. 134
Setting Tyre Pressure Monitoring ................. 134
Switching off passenger compartment
monitoring and inclination sensor
on the multi-purpose display ....................... 143
Synchronous adjustment of door mirrors ......144
Changing settings for opening
and locking the vehicle ................................144
Setting lighting off delay ..............................146
Setting the clock.........................................147
Setting compass.........................................148
Changing language for displays....................149
Changing units for displays ..........................149
Resetting display to factory settings .............149
Overview of warning messages ....................150
Driving and Driving Safety ................ 159
Before driving off .......................................160
Tips for running in .......................................160
Ignition lock/steering lock............................161
Starting and stopping the engine................. 164
Parking brake .............................................166
Footbrake...................................................166
Brief overview – cruise control...................168
Cruise control .............................................169
Manual transmission, clutch .........................172
Tiptronic S .................................................173
Selector lever positions ...............................174
Driving programmes for on-road
and off-road driving .....................................181
Power-transmission
and running-gear control systems.................188
Air suspension with level control
and height adjustment .................................200
Porsche Active Suspension Management
(PASM) .......................................................204
Porsche Dynamic Chassis
Control (PDCC) ...........................................205
Off-road driving ...........................................206
Driving systems for off-road driving ............ 207
Uphill driving .............................................. 209
Airbag systems .......................................... 215
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace
and Storage .................................... 217
Folding rear seats forward
and returning to upright position.................. 218
Loadspace ................................................ 221
Cargo management system ........................ 222
Stowing load.............................................. 225
Luggage compartment cover ...................... 226
Luggage safety net .................................... 227
Ski bag...................................................... 229
Roof Transport System............................... 231
Storage..................................................... 232
Cupholder.................................................. 236
DVD player under the right front seat ........... 237
Ashtray, front ............................................ 238
Cigarette lighter ......................................... 239
Trailer Coupling............................... 240
Trailer coupling .......................................... 241
Trailer coupling with removable ball hitch ..... 243
Electrically folding trailer coupling................ 249
Parking ........................................... 251
ParkAssist ................................................. 252
Swivelling down mirror glass
as parking aid ............................................ 256
Garage door opener ................................... 257
Table of contents
5
Alarm System and Theft Protection...259
Alarm system ............................................. 260
Immobiliser ................................................ 262
Steering column lock .................................. 262
Theft protection.......................................... 262
Maintenance and Car Care ...............263
Notes on maintenance ................................ 264
Checking the engine oil level ....................... 265
Topping up engine oil ................................. 266
Checking the coolant level
and adding coolant ..................................... 268
Checking brake fluid level
and changing brake fluid ............................. 270
Adding washer fluid.................................... 271
Changing air cleaner ................................... 272
Changing particle filter ................................ 272
Power steering .......................................... 272
Wiper blades .............................................. 273
Emission control system ............................. 276
Fuel can ..................................................... 276
Filling with fuel ............................................ 277
Car care instructions................................... 279
Minor Repairs ..................................286
Notes on minor repairs ............................... 287
Tyres and wheels........................................ 288
Jack ......................................................... 294
Tool kit ...................................................... 294
Compressor ............................................... 295
Spacers ..................................................... 295
Wheel bolts ................................................ 296
Flat tyre ..................................................... 297
6
Table of contents
Inflating tyres on vehicles
without level control ...................................309
Inflating tyres on vehicles with level control ...311
Electrical system ........................................317
Battery.......................................................328
Replacing the remote control battery............331
External power supply, jump lead starting .....332
Replacing bulbs ..........................................335
Headlights ..................................................335
Tail light .....................................................345
Number plate lights ....................................348
Headlight adjustment...................................349
Changing headlights from left
to right-hand traffic......................................349
Bulb chart ..................................................351
Towing and tow-starting...............................352
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data.....356
Vehicle identification....................................357
Engine data ................................................359
Transmission ..............................................360
Fuel consumption........................................360
Tyres, rims, tracks......................................361
Tyre pressures, cold ...................................363
Weights......................................................365
Ground clearance .......................................366
Capacities ..................................................368
Dimensions ................................................369
Driving performance....................................370
Index...............................................371
Overview Illustrations
Driver’s cockpit.............................................. 8
Steering wheel and instrument cluster ............. 9
Centre console, front.................................... 10
Centre console, rear .................................... 11
Seat, rear .................................................... 12
Roof console ............................................... 13
Overview Illustrations
7
Driver’s cockpit
1.Power windows
See Page 88.
2.Inner door handle
See Page 26.
3.Door mirror adjustment
See Page 49.
4.Engine compartment lid release
See Page 27.
5.Parking brake
See Page 166.
6.Parking brake release
See Page 166.
7.Ignition lock/steering lock
See Page 161.
8.Steering wheel adjustment (manual)
See Page 53.
9.Seat adjustment
See Page 32.
10.Dimming of instrument illumination
See Page 107.
11.Light switch
See Page 105.
8
Overview Illustrations
Steering wheel and instrument
cluster
1.Tiptronic rocker switches
See Page 52.
2.Direction indicator
See Page 108.
3.Cruise control
See Page 168.
4.Function keys
See Page 54.
5.Horn
See Page 52.
6.Windscreen wipers
See Page 113.
7.Tachometer
See Page 120.
8.Clock
See Page 120.
9.Cooling system temperature gauge
See Page 121.
10.Multi-purpose display
See Page 126.
11.Fuel gauge
See Page 122.
12.Odometer
See Page 123.
Overview Illustrations
9
Centre console, front
1.Porsche Communication Management (PCM)
See separate operating instructions.
2.Air conditioner
See Page 59.
3.Ashtray/cigarette lighter
See Page 238.
4.Cupholder
See Page 236.
5.Reduction (Low Range), differential locks
See Page 181.
6.Sport mode
See Page 186.
7.Porsche Active Suspension Management
(PASM) - running-gear setup
See Page 204.
8.Height adjustment, air suspension
See Page 200.
9.Armrest, oddments trays
See Page 234.
10.ParkAssist warning indicator
See Page 254.
11.Vents
See Page 80.
12.Glove compartment
See Page 233.
10
Overview Illustrations
Centre console, rear
1. Cigarette lighter
See Page 238.
2. Cupholder
See Page 237.
3. Control panel for 4-zone air conditioning
See Page 75.
4. Vents
See Page 80.
Overview Illustrations
11
Seat, rear
1. Seat belt height adjustment
See Page 41.
2. Reading lights
See Page 110.
3. Sunblind
See Page 57.
4. Power windows
See Page 89.
5. Ashtray
See Page 238.
6. Inner door handle
See Page 26.
12
Overview Illustrations
Roof console
1. Sun visor
See Page 57.
2. Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror
See Page 51.
3. Light switch, interior lighting
See Page 109.
4. Glasses case
See Page 232.
5. ParkAssist
See Page 252.
6. Control switch for sliding/lifting roof
See Page 92.
or
Control switch for Panorama roof system
See Page 97.
7. Garage door opener
See Page 257.
Overview Illustrations
13
Opening and Locking
Brief overview –
opening and locking from outside................... 15
Unlocking and locking from outside ................ 16
Opening and locking from inside .................... 25
Opening and closing the engine
compartment lid ........................................... 27
Malfunctions when opening and closing ......... 28
Notes on the key and central locking system . 30
14
Opening and Locking
Brief overview – opening and
locking from outside
The Porsche Entry & Drive option can be recognised by the buttons A in the door handles.
This brief overview does not replace the information provided in the chapter “Opening and locking
from outside”. In particular, warnings are not
replaced by this brief overview.
Key
Porsche Entry & Drive
What do I want to do?
What do I have to do?
What happens?
Unlocking
Using the key:
Press button
Using the key: The hazard warning lights flash once.
The doors can be opened.
on the key.
With Porsche Entry & Drive:
Grip door handle fully.
Locking
Using the key:
Press button
on the key.
With Porsche Entry & Drive:
Press the button A in the handle.
Locking if persons/animals
are remaining in vehicle
(switching off passenger compartment
monitoring of the alarm system)
Switching off alarm
Using the key:
Press button on the key twice
(within 2 seconds).
With Porsche Entry & Drive:
Press the button A in the handle twice
(within 2 seconds).
Press button
With Porsche Entry & Drive:
The doors can be opened.
The hazard warning lights flash twice.
The doors are locked.
The hazard warning lights flash four times.
The doors are locked, but can be
opened from inside by pulling the inner door handle
twice.
on the key.
Opening and Locking
15
Note on operation
The factory settings of the vehicle are described
in this chapter.
You can change the settings and store them on
the respective key on the multi-purpose display of
the instrument panel.
For further information on the possible settings on
the multi-purpose display:
Please observe the chapter “CHANGING
SETTINGS FOR OPENING AND LOCKING THE
VEHICLE” on Page 144.
Unlocking and locking from
outside
Depending on your vehicle equipment, you can
either unlock and lock it with the vehicle key or
without a key by means of Porsche Entry & Drive.
With the key
Use the buttons on the key to unlock and lock the
vehicle.
16
Opening and Locking
With Porsche Entry & Drive
On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive, you can
unlock, lock and start the vehicle without using the
key.
You simply have carry the key with you, e.g. in
your trouser pocket.
Do not expose the vehicle key to a high level of
electromagnetic radiation. This could adversely
affect Porsche Entry & Drive.
Note on operation
The vehicle doors are locked automatically after
30 seconds if they are not opened.
If the passenger compartment monitoring system
and inclination sensor have been switched off
(restricted theft protection), this also remains the
case after automatic relocking.
As a result, the doors can be opened from inside
only by pulling the inner door handle twice.
Unlocking and opening doors
Unlocking with Porsche Entry & Drive
(keyless)
Unlocking with the key
The vehicle can be unlocked if you are in the area
of the driver's door with the key.
1. Briefly press button
on the key. The
hazard warning lights flash once. The doors
are now unlocked.
2. Pull the door handle.
f Grip door handle fully. The doors are now
unlocked.
f Pull the door handle.
Opening and Locking
17
Locking doors
Note on operation for locking the doors
Locking with the key
The vehicle cannot be locked if the driver’s door is
not completely closed.
f Close the door.
f Briefly press button
on the key once.
The hazard warning lights flash twice. The
doors cannot be opened, either from outside
or from inside.
OR
If persons or animals are remaining in the
vehicle, briefly press button
twice.
The hazard warning lights flash four times.
The doors can be opened from inside.
Locking with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless)
You must carry the key with you.
f Close the door.
f Briefly press the Porsche Entry & Drive locking
button A in the door handle.
The hazard warning lights flash twice.
The doors cannot be opened, either from
outside or from inside.
OR
If persons or animals are remaining in the
vehicle, briefly press the Porsche Entry & Drive
locking button A in the door handle twice.
The hazard warning lights flash four times.
The doors can be opened from inside.
18
Opening and Locking
Unlocking with the key
f Press button
on the key.
f Press the release handle (arrow) on the rear
lid and open the rear lid.
The rear lid is unlocked if you are in the rear area
of the vehicle with the key.
f Press the release handle (arrow) on the rear
lid and open the rear lid.
Unlocking with Porsche Entry & Drive
(keyless)
Warning!
Risk of being locked out of vehicles with
Porsche Entry & Drive.
f Do not leave the key in the vehicle if the vehicle
is locked and access is gained through the
rear lid. The vehicle is automatically locked
when the rear lid is closed.
Unlocking and opening rear lid
On vehicles with spare wheel bracket, this must be
swung to the side before opening the rear lid.
For further information on opening the spare
wheel bracket:
Please observe the chapter “OPENING SPARE
WHEEL BRACKET” on Page 314.
The vehicle doors remain locked after unlocking
the rear lid.
The rear lid is locked automatically after
30 seconds if it is not opened.
If the key has been left in the vehicle, the
hazard warning lights flash twice and a
warning signal sounds. The rear lid can be
opened again within approx. 30 seconds.
After 30 seconds have elapsed, the vehicle
can be unlocked again only with the second
key.
Risk of poisoning!
f Never drive with the rear window or rear lid
open.
Exhaust gases can enter the passenger
compartment.
Opening and Locking
19
Automatic rear lid
Opening and closing rear lid automatically
Warning!
Danger of injury and damage if the rear lid is
automatically opened or closed in an uncontrolled way!
f Open or close the rear lid only when the vehicle
is stationary.
f Never drive with the rear window or rear lid
open.
Exhaust gases can enter the passenger
compartment.
Locking the rear lid
1. Pull down the rear lid by means of the closing
handle (arrow), and press it gently into the
lock.
The rear lid is automatically pulled closed and
locked. (only if rear lid is unlocked)
2. Lock the vehicle.
20
Opening and Locking
f Open or close the rear lid only when there are
no persons, animals or objects within its
movement range.
f Always observe the opening and closing operation so that movement can be stopped at any
time in the event of danger.
f Make sure that there is sufficient clearance
behind or above the vehicle (e.g. roof transport systems, garage ceiling).
f Remove rear rack systems before opening the
rear lid automatically.
Risk of being locked out of vehicles with
Porsche Entry & Drive.
f Do not leave the key in the vehicle if the vehicle
is locked and access is gained through the
rear window. The vehicle is automatically
locked when the rear lid is closed.
If the key has been left in the vehicle, the
hazard warning lights flash twice and a
warning signal sounds. The rear lid can be
opened again within approx. 30 seconds.
After 30 seconds have elapsed, the vehicle
can be unlocked again only with the second
key.
Opening the rear lid automatically
The rear lid can be opened only with the release
button on the rear lid when the vehicle is operated
with a trailer.
There are three ways of opening the rear lid:
Option 2
f Press the button
on the key for approx.
1 second.
If the vehicle is locked, the vehicle doors
remain locked when the rear lid is opened.
Option 3
f Pull and hold the button in the driver’s door with
the ignition switched on until the rear lid has
opened fully.
Opening is interrupted if the button is released
prematurely.
Option 1
f Briefly press the release handle on the rear lid.
The vehicle must be unlocked for this.
The vehicle need not be unlocked on vehicles
with Porsche Entry & Drive. You simply have
carry the vehicle key with you, e.g. in your
trouser pocket.
Opening and Locking
21
Interrupting the opening or closing operation
in the event of danger
The opening or closing operation is interrupted
immediately if one of the following buttons is
pressed:
f Press the button
on the key
or
Release the button in the driver’s door
or
Briefly press the button in the rear lid trim
panel
or
Briefly press the release button on the rear lid.
Automatic operation can be continued again at
any time. To do this, press the corresponding
button.
Automatically closing the rear lid
Detection of obstacles during opening
Make sure that the load is not in the area of the
rear lid when the lid is closed, otherwise the
closing operation will be interrupted after contact
with the load, and the rear lid will open again by a
few centimetres.
The rear lid will stop moving if opening is blocked
by an obstacle. A warning signal then sounds.
When the obstacle has been removed, the rear lid
can be opened by pressing
f Briefly press the button in the rear lid trim
panel.
the button
on the key
or
the button in the driver’s door
or
the release button on the rear lid.
22
Opening and Locking
Detection of obstacles during closing
The closing operation is interrupted if closing of
the rear lid is blocked by an obstacle.
A warning signal sounds and the rear lid opens
again by a few centimetres.
When the obstacle has been removed, the rear lid
can be closed by pressing one of the corresponding buttons.
Adjusting the opening height of the rear lid
Malfunctions of the rear lid drive
The opening height of the rear lid can be individually adjusted so that the rear lid does not collide
with the garage ceiling, for example.
On vehicles with level control, the vehicle height
changes depending on the setting of the level
control system. For this reason, always adjust the
opening height with the vehicle at the highest level
setting so that the rear lid cannot accidentally
collide with the garage ceiling, for example.
The automatic function is not active if the battery
voltage is too low.
If a button is pressed, the rear lid lock is unlocked
and a warning signal sounds for 3 seconds. The
rear lid can now be opened by hand.
1. Stand behind the vehicle and open the rear lid.
2. Press the button
on the key to stop
the automatic opening operation at around
2/3 of the opening height.
f Charge the vehicle battery.
Emergency operation of the rear lid
A warning signal sounds for approx. 3 seconds if
the automatic opening or closing operation is
interrupted by a fault.
f Open or close the rear lid by hand.
3. Now move the rear lid up by hand until the
desired opening height is reached. Make sure
that there is a sufficient minimum clearance
from any obstacle.
4. Press and hold the button in the rear lid trim
panel for approx. 3 seconds.
An acknowledgement signal sounds, and the
direction indicators light up once.
The opening height of the rear lid has now
been programmed.
The rear lid can now be closed by briefly
pressing the button.
This setting cannot be deleted. If a different
setting is required, repeat steps 1 to 4.
Opening and Locking
23
Unlocking with the key
f Press button
on the key for approx.
2 seconds.
The rear window pops open.
OR:
f Press the release button A and open the
window.
Unlocking with Porsche Entry & Drive
(keyless)
Warning!
Risk of being locked out of vehicles with
Porsche Entry & Drive.
Unlocking and opening rear window
On vehicles with spare wheel bracket, this must be
swung to the side before opening the rear window.
For further information on opening the spare
wheel bracket:
Please observe the chapter “OPENING SPARE
WHEEL BRACKET” on Page 314.
The vehicle doors remain locked after unlocking
the rear lid.
The rear window is locked automatically after
30 seconds if it is not opened.
24
Opening and Locking
f Do not leave the key in the vehicle if the vehicle
is locked and access is gained through the
rear window. The vehicle is automatically
locked when the rear window is closed.
If the key has been left in the vehicle, the
hazard warning lights flash twice and a
warning signal sounds. The rear window can
be opened again within approx. 30 seconds.
After 30 seconds have elapsed, the vehicle
can be unlocked again only with the second
key.
Risk of poisoning!
f Never drive with the rear window or rear lid
open.
Exhaust gases can enter the passenger
compartment.
The rear window is unlocked if you are in the rear
area of the vehicle with the key.
f Press the release button A and open the
window.
Closing the rear window
f Close the rear window and press it into the lock
until it can be felt to engage.
Opening and locking from inside
Unlocking doors
The factory settings of the vehicle are described
in this chapter.
You can change the settings and store them on
the respective key on the multi-purpose display of
the instrument panel.
Button in the armrest
f Press the left half of the button in the door
panel.
If pressed on the rear doors, only the relevant
door will be unlocked.
For further information on the possible settings
(e.g.. Auto Lock and Auto Unlock) on the multipurpose display:
Automatic with Auto Unlock
The vehicle is automatically unlocked when the
ignition key is withdrawn or the ignition is switched
off.
Please observe the chapter “CHANGING
SETTINGS FOR OPENING AND LOCKING THE
VEHICLE” on Page 144.
Note on operation
Locking doors
If the vehicle was locked by remote control or with
the key, it cannot be unlocked with the central
locking button.
Button in the armrest
f Press the right half of the button in the door
panel.
All vehicle doors will be locked.
The doors can be opened by pulling the inner
door handle twice.
Automatic with Auto Lock
The vehicle is locked automatically when a speed
of 6 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded.
Opening and Locking
25
Opening doors
Securing rear doors
Opening unlocked doors
You can secure the rear doors to prevent
unintentional opening when driving.
f Pull inner door handle once.
Opening locked doors
(Not if the vehicle was locked by pressing the
button once. The doors cannot be opened in this
case.)
f Pull inner door handle twice.
Switching child lock on and off
The power windows, central locking buttons on
the rear doors and the rear control panel for the
air conditioning can be disabled by means of the
safety button in the armrest of the driver’s door.
The child locks are fitted in the lock area of the
rear doors.
The doors cannot be opened from inside when the
child locks are engaged.
f Press the safety button to switch child
protection on and off.
The symbol in the safety button lights up if
child protection is active.
f To engage: Turn child lock to position A.
f To disengage: Turn child lock to position B.
26
Opening and Locking
Switching child protection on/off
Closing
f Lower lid and let it fall into the lock. If necessary, push the lid closed with the palm of your
hand in the area of the lock.
f Check that the lid has correctly engaged in the
lock.
When the vehicle is in motion, a message will be
displayed on the multi-purpose display of the
instrument panel if the lid is not closed properly.
Opening and closing the engine
compartment lid
f Unlatch safety catch A.
f Open the lid completely.
Opening
f Pull the release lever (arrow).
The engine compartment lid is now unlocked.
Opening and Locking
27
Malfunctions when opening and
closing
The vehicle cannot be unlocked
The vehicle cannot be locked
The remote control of the key may
Only one door is unlocked
– not function correctly due to radio waves (also
radio contact between remote control and
vehicle in the case of Porsche Entry & Drive),
This is recognisable by the fact that the hazard
warning lights do not flash and there is no locking
noise.
The setting for locking and unlocking the doors
and rear lid has been changed on the multipurpose display of the instrument panel. You can
open all doors irrespective of the setting made.
f Press button
2 seconds.
28
on the key twice within
Opening and Locking
– fail due to a fault,
– fail due to an exhausted battery.
f Unlock the vehicle with the unfolded key in the
key lock.
f If you unlock the vehicle with the key at the
door lock, only the driver’s door can be
opened.
In order to prevent the alarm system from
being triggered, you must switch the ignition
on within 15 seconds of opening the door.
The remote control of the key may
– not function correctly due to radio waves (also
radio contact between remote control and
vehicle in the case of Porsche Entry & Drive),
– fail due to a fault,
– fail due to an exhausted battery.
f Lock the vehicle with the unfolded key in the
key lock.
Not all vehicle doors are locked.
3. Press red slide B with the key bit in the direction of the arrow.
The central locking system has failed. The doors
must be locked with the emergency locking
device.
5. Repeat procedure at the rear doors.
1. Open the passenger’s door.
6. Close all doors.
7. Lock the driver’s door with the key in the door
lock.
4. Fit cover A again.
2. Remove cover A.
Opening and Locking
29
Notes on the key and central
locking system
Key
Two fold-out vehicle keys are supplied with your
vehicle. These keys operate all the locks on your
vehicle.
f Be careful with your vehicle keys: do not part
with them except under exceptional circumstances.
f Remove the ignition key even if leaving the
vehicle only briefly.
f Inform your insurance company of any loss or
theft of car keys or if extra or if replacement
keys have been made.
f Third parties can still operate the mechanical
locks with a lost key.
Note on operation
The air conditioner settings are stored on the
respective key when switching off the ignition and
locking the vehicle.
30
Opening and Locking
Replacement keys
Central locking system
Vehicle keys can only be ordered at a Porsche
partner. Sometimes, this may take a long time.
You should therefore always have a replacement
key available. Keep it in a safe place, but under no
circumstances in or on the vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a central locking
system. The following are unlocked or locked
together:
The key codes of new keys have to be “taught” to
the vehicle control unit by your Porsche partner.
All keys belonging to the vehicle must also be
taught again for this purpose.
– Doors
– Rear lid/rear window
– Filler flap
The central locking system is always activated
when the vehicle is unlocked and locked.
On the multi-purpose display of the instrument
panel, you can set different variants for locking
and unlocking the doors and rear lid. You can open
all doors irrespective of the setting made.
f Press button
2 seconds.
on the key twice within
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
Front seats .................................................. 32
Front seats with memory .............................. 33
Easy Entry function....................................... 35
Headrests.................................................... 36
Seat heating at front and rear ....................... 37
Seat belts ................................................... 39
Child restraint system................................... 42
Brief overview – door mirrors ..................... 48
Door mirrors................................................ 49
Interior mirror .............................................. 51
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror............... 51
Steering wheel ............................................. 52
Steering wheel heating ................................. 52
Steering wheel adjustment ............................ 53
Multi-functional steering wheel ....................... 54
Sun visors ................................................... 57
Make-up mirror ............................................ 57
Sun blinds, rear side windows ....................... 57
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
31
Front seats
Seat position
A correct sitting position is important for safe and
fatigue-free driving. We recommend the following
procedure for adjusting the driver’s seat to suit
individual requirements:
1. Adjust the seat height to give yourself enough
headroom and a good overview of the vehicle.
2. Adjust the seat in fore-and-aft direction until,
with the accelerator pedal fully depressed,
your leg is straight but your entire foot still
rests on the accelerator pedal.
3. Grip the top half of the steering wheel. Set the
backrest angle and the steering wheel position
so that your arms are almost outstretched.
However, your shoulders must still rest on the
backrest.
4. If necessary, correct the seat fore-and-aft
adjustment.
5. Adjust the height of the headrest so that the
upper edge is at eye level or higher.
Adjusting the seat
Warning!
Risk of accident. The seat may move further
than desired if you attempt to adjust it whilst
driving. You can lose control of the vehicle.
f Do not adjust the seat whilst driving.
A Seat height adjustment at front.
B Seat height adjustment at rear.
32
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
C Fore and aft adjustment.
D Backrest angle adjustment.
E Lumbar support adjustment.
To permit a relaxed sitting posture, the
backrest curvature is continuously adjustable
in vertical and horizontal directions for
individual pelvis and spinal column support.
f Press the switch in the direction indicated by
the arrows until the desired setting is reached.
Warning!
Risk of crushing due to uncontrolled recall of
settings.
f Cancel automatic adjustment by pressing any
of the seat adjustment buttons.
f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended.
Recalling the settings using the
vehicle key or in vehicles that have
Porsche Entry & Drive
f Open the driver’s door.
The stored settings of the driver’s seat are
recalled automatically.
Cancelling setting
Memory options
– Seat adjustment
– Door mirror adjustment
Comfort memory options
Front seats with memory
Personal seat, door mirror, steering wheel and
seat belt height adjustments can be stored on the
person buttons A and vehicle keys and recalled
with these.
– Seat adjustment
– Door mirror adjustment
– Steering wheel and seat belt height adjustment
Automatic settings can be cancelled immediately
by pressing any driver’s seat adjustment button.
Recalling the settings with person buttons
1 - 3 (driver’s and passenger’s seat)
1. Unlock the vehicle.
2. Press the relevant person button until the
stored positions have been reached
or
Briefly press the person button if the ignition
key is inserted or if the ignition is switched on
(in vehicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive).
The stored positions for each seat are recalled
automatically.
Cancelling setting
Automatic settings can be cancelled immediately
by pressing any seat adjustment button.
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
33
Storing driver’s seat settings
5. Set the control switch A for the mirror setting
to the passenger’s side C.
The passenger mirror swivels downwards.
Storing settings on a person button and a
vehicle key
6. Adjust the passenger mirror to the required
setting.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Switch ignition on.
7. Briefly press the SET memory button and,
within 10 seconds, hold down the person
button on which the setting is to be stored until
an acknowledge tone is obtained.
3. Make the required adjustments to the seat,
mirror, steering wheel and seat belt.
4. Briefly press the SET memory button and,
within 10 seconds, hold down one of the
person buttons 1, 2 or 3 until an acknowledge
tone is obtained.
The settings are now stored on the desired
person button.
5. Withdraw vehicle key or switch ignition off in
vehicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive.
6. Press the SET memory button within
10 seconds and keep the button depressed
until an acknowledge tone is obtained.
The settings are now assigned to the vehicle
key.
Storing passenger’s seat settings
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Switch ignition on.
3. Adjust seat position and belt height.
A - Mirror adjustment
C - Passenger mirror adjustment
Storing passenger mirror setting as a
parking aid
If it is wished that the passenger mirror should
swivel downwards when reversing, this can also
be stored in addition to the driver’s seat setting.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Switch ignition on.
3. Press the relevant person button.
4. Engage reverse gear.
34
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
4. Briefly press the SET memory button and,
within 10 seconds, hold down one of the
person buttons 1, 2 or 3 until an acknowledge
tone is obtained.
Automatic storage of driver’s seat
settings
If settings were changed after the driver’s door
was opened, these new settings are temporarily
stored when the vehicle is locked.
This stored setting is deleted if the vehicle is
unlocked with a programmed key and the driver’s
door is opened. Then the settings of the key used
are recalled.
Warning!
Risk of crushing if persons are behind the
driver’s seat when settings are recalled.
Risk of damage if the rear seat bench is
folded forward when settings are recalled.
f Switch off the Easy Entry function if there are
persons behind the driver’s seat or if the rear
seat bench is folded forward.
Switching Easy Entry function on and off
f Press switch A.
Exiting the vehicle
The steering wheel moves into the frontmost, top
position:
– After the ignition key is removed or
– After the ignition is switched off and the
driver’s door is opened on vehicles equipped
with Porsche Entry & Drive or
– When the steering column is locked.
When the driver’s door is opened, the driver’s seat
moves to the rear.
Entering the vehicle
Easy Entry function
The Easy Entry function makes it easier for you to
get in and out of the vehicle.
When the driver’s door is opened, the driver’s seat
moves to the rear.
Once the driver’s door is closed and the ignition
key is inserted or, in the case of vehicles that have
Porsche Entry & Drive, the ignition is switched on,
the seat and steering wheel move into the stored
position.
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
35
Rear seats
f Press button B and push the headrest all the
way down.
f Press button A and, at the same time,
completely remove headrest.
Installing
Note
The middle headrest of the rear seat bench must
only be fitted to the middle seat of the rear seat
backrest.
1. Insert the headrests into the guides.
Example: front seat
Headrests
Removing
Front seats
f Press button A and, at the same time,
completely remove headrest.
36
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
2. Press button B and, at the same time, push the
headrest downwards until the desired position
is reached.
Install the middle headrest of the rear seat
bench only on the middle seat and push it down
fully.
Adjusting
The heights of the headrests for the front seats
and the outer headrests for the rear seats can be
adjusted.
Raising
f Push headrest upwards until the desired
position is reached.
Additionally press button B on the rear seat
headrests.
Lowering
f Press button B and, at the same time, push the
headrest downwards until the desired position
is reached.
A - Front seat, left
B - Front seat, right
C - Rear seat, left
D - Rear seat, right
Seat heating at front and rear
Switching on
The seat heating is ready for operation when the
ignition is on. The heating power can be steplessly
adjusted with the thumb wheel.
f Turn thumb wheel until the desired setting is
reached.
Switching off
f Turn thumb wheel to position 0.
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
37
ABCD-
Switches seat heating on
Switches seat heating off
Temperature control for left seat
Temperature control for right seat
Rear seat heating for vehicles with
4-zone air conditioning
Switching on
f Press button A.
After the seat heating is switched on, the air conditioning display switches to seat heating mode for
approx. 10 seconds.
38
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
Controlling the temperature
f Press button C or button D upwards or
downwards until the desired temperature is
reached.
Switching off
f Press button B.
Seat belts
The seat belts are not suitable for persons under
150 cm (5 ft.) tall. Suitable restraint devices
should therefore be used.
Safety notes!
f All occupants of the vehicle must wear seat
belts for their own safety on every journey.
Give your passengers all the information in this
chapter.
f Never use one belt for two persons at the
same time.
f Remove any loose, bulky items of clothing that
prevent the belt from fitting correctly and
restrict your freedom of movement.
f Do not lay the belt across hard or breakable
objects (spectacles, ball-point pens, pipes,
etc.).
Such articles may represent an additional
danger of injury.
f Belt straps must not be twisted or loose.
f Check all belts regularly for signs of damage in
the fabric, and check that the buckle and
attachment points function correctly.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
f Make sure the belts are fully retracted when
they are not being used. This protects them
from dirt and damage.
Warning light and warning
message
The following functions serve as a reminder to
fasten the seat belts; they remain active until the
tongue of the driver’s seat belt is inserted into the
buckle:
– The warning light on the instrument panel lights
up when the ignition is switched on.
– A warning appears on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel,
– A warning signal (gong) sounds for a maximum
of 90 seconds when the speed exceeds
24 km/h (15 mph).
Belt tensioner
Depending on the force of a collision, fastened
seat belts are tightened in an accident.
The belt tensioners are triggered in:
– Front and rear impacts
– Side impacts (front belt tensioners)
– Vehicle rollover
Maintenance notes
The belt tensioner system can only be triggered
once; the system must be replaced afterward.
Work may be carried out on the belt tensioner
system only by a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Smoke is released when the belt tensioners are
triggered. This does not indicate a fire in the
vehicle.
f Belts that are damaged or have been heavily
stressed in an accident must be replaced
immediately. The same applies to belt
tensioner systems which have been triggered.
In addition, the anchor points of the belts
should be checked.
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
39
Note on operation
The belt can be blocked if the vehicle is standing
at an angle or if the belt is pulled out using a
jerking movement.
f The belt cannot be pulled out while accelerating and slowing down, when cornering and
when driving uphill.
f Insert the belt tongue into the appropriate
buckle on the inboard side of the seat, until it
locks securely with an audible click.
f Make sure that belts are not trapped or
twisted, and that they are not rubbing on sharp
edges.
Fastening the seat belt
f Assume a comfortable sitting position.
Adjust the backrest of the front seat so that the
belt always rests on your upper body and runs
across the middle of your shoulder.
f Grasp the belt tongue and pull the belt in a
slow, continuous motion across your chest and
lap.
40
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
f The horizontal section of the belt should
always fit snugly across the pelvis. Therefore,
after fastening the belt, always pull the
diagonal part of the belt upwards.
Pregnant women should position the belt as
low as possible across the pelvis, and ensure
that it is not pressing against the abdomen.
f Pull on the diagonal section of the belt now and
again during the journey to ensure that the
horizontal section remains tight.
f Pay attention to ensuring the correct assignment of seat belts and buckles on the rear seat
bench.
Releasing the seat belt
f Hold the belt tongue.
f Press the red button (arrow).
f Guide belt tongue to the reel.
Seat belt height adjustment
Adjusting belt height electrically
The heights of the belt deflectors for the driver’s
seat, passenger’s seat and the outer rear seats
can be adjusted.
Adjust the height of the seat belt so that it runs
across the middle of the shoulder, not against the
neck.
On vehicles with comfort memory, seat belt height
adjustment can be stored on the person buttons
and vehicle keys and recalled with these.
Adjusting belt height manually
f Upward – push belt deflector up.
f Downward – press button A and move belt
deflector.
f Operate rocker switch B in the desired
direction until the optimal belt adjustment is
reached.
For further information on storing the belt height
setting on the vehicle key:
f Please observe the chapter “FRONT SEATS
WITH MEMORY” on Page 33.
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
41
Child restraint system
Danger!
Risk of serious or mortal injury from the
passenger airbag.
f The passenger airbag must always be
switched off if child restraint systems are
installed on the passenger’s seat.
Switching off will prevent the risk of serious or
mortal injury potentially caused by the airbag.
To switch off the passenger airbag:
f Please observe the chapter “SWITCHING
PASSENGER AIRBAG ON AND OFF” on
Page 44.
42
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
Children up to 9 months old
Children in ages from 3 to 6 years
Children of this age must be carried in a restraint
system which is fitted facing backwards.
Children of this age are carried in child restraint
systems facing forward.
Whenever possible, these child restraint systems
should be installed on the rear seats.
f The passenger airbag must be switched off
when these systems are used on the
passenger’s seat.
Children aged between 9 months up
to 3 years
Children of this age are carried in child restraint
systems facing forward.
Whenever possible, these child restraint systems
should be installed on the rear seats.
f The passenger airbag must be switched off
when these systems are used on the
passenger’s seat.
f The passenger airbag must be switched off
when these systems are used on the
passenger’s seat.
Children in ages from 6 to 12 years
Children of this age are carried in child restraint
systems facing forward.
Whenever possible, these child restraint systems
should be installed on the rear seats.
f The passenger airbag must be switched off
when these systems are used on the
passenger’s seat.
For children weighing 27 kg or more, the
passenger airbag should be switched on.
The vehicle seat must be adjusted so that it is
in its rear position in this case.
Recommended child restraint systems
Age group
Weight group
Seat type
Authorisation number
Permitted on passenger’s
seat, outer rear seat,
centre rear seat only with
seat belt
Up to approx. 9 months
Up to 13 kg
Porsche Baby Seat 0+ ISOFIX Universal
Porsche Baby Seat 0+ ISOFIX Special
Porsche part No.: 955.044.800.42
E1 3030011
E1 3030012
yes
From 9 months to 3 years
From 9 to 18 kg
JUNIOR SEAT ISOFIX Group I Universal
Junior Seat ISOFIX Group I Special
Porsche part No.: 955.044.800.44
E1 3030013
E1 3030014
yes
From 3 years to 6 years
From 16 to 25 kg
JUNIOR SEAT ISOFIX Group II Universal
Porsche part No.: 955.044.800.44
E1 3030015
yes
From 6 years to 12 years
From 15 to 36 kg
Porsche KID Plus
Porsche part No.: 955.044.801.02
E1 03301169
yes
Note
If children weighing up to 27 kg are to be transported in a child restraint system on the passenger’s seat, the passenger airbag must be switched off.
If the body weight is more than 27 kg, the passenger airbag should be switched on.
The vehicle seat must be adjusted so that it is in its rear position in this case.
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
43
A - Passenger airbag switched on (ON)
B - Passenger airbag switched off (OFF)
Switching passenger airbag on and off
1. Remove cover
2. Using the vehicle key, switch the passenger
airbag off (B) or on (A).
44
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
Danger!
Risk of serious or mortal injury for the
passenger if the passenger airbag remains
switched off after the child seat is removed.
f The passenger airbag must be switched on
again once the child seat has been removed.
Danger!
Risk of serious or mortal injury from the
passenger airbag.
If the “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” warning
light is not lit when the ignition is switched on
and the Airbag OFF switch is switched off,
this could indicate a fault in the system.
f Do not fit a child restraint system on the
passenger’s seat.
f Have the fault remedied immediately.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Warning light “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF”
If the airbag is switched off on the passenger’s
side, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF (A) warning
light is continuously lit when the ignition is
switched on.
Further important information concerning the
topic “AIRBAG” can be found in a separate
chapter:
f Please observe the chapter “AIRBAG
SYSTEMS” on Page 215.
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
45
ISOFIX child restraint system
Use only child restraint systems with the ISOFIX
system recommended by Porsche. These
systems have been tested and adjusted to the
interior of your Porsche and the appropriate child
age groups. Other systems have not been tested
and could entail an increased risk of injury.
You can obtain an ISOFIX child seat system at a
Porsche partner.
f Always observe the separate installation
instructions for your child seat.
Safety notes!
f Always observe the separate installation
instructions for your child seat.
f When using a child restraint system, it is vital
that you observe the legal regulations applicable in your country.
f Use only child restraint systems recommended
by Porsche.
These systems have been tested and adjusted
to the interior of your Porsche and the appropriate child age groups.
Other systems have not been tested and could
entail an increased risk of injury.
f As a rule, child restraint systems should be
installed on the rear seats.
f Seek appropriate advice from your Porsche
partner about the possible installation of a
Porsche child restraint system.
46
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
Installing a child seat with ISOFIX system
Markings for the Isofix child seat anchorage can
be found on the right and left on the backrest of
the passenger seat and on the backrests of the
outer rear seats.
Danger!
Risk of serious or mortal injury for the
passenger if the passenger airbag remains
switched off after the child seat is removed.
f The passenger airbag must always be
switched off if child restraint systems are
installed on the passenger’s seat for children
weighing up to 27 kg.
For children weighing 27 kg or more, the
passenger airbag should be switched on.
The vehicle seat must be adjusted so that it is
in its rear position in this case.
To switch on the passenger airbag:
The retaining lugs A for the Isofix child seat
anchorage can be found directly under the
markings between backrest and seat cushion.
f Please observe the chapter “SWITCHING
PASSENGER AIRBAG ON AND OFF” on
Page 44.
1. Secure the child seat to retaining lugs A as
outlined in the instruction manual for the child
seat.
2. Pull the child seat to check that both fastening
points are engaged correctly.
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
47
Brief overview – door mirrors
This brief overview does not replace the information provided in the chapter “Door mirrors”. In
particular, warnings are not replaced by this brief
overview.
Precondition
f Switch ignition on.
Switch for mirror adjustment
What do I want to do?
What do I have to do?
What do I see?
Adjusting the mirror on the driver’s side
Turn switch to position A and tilt switch in the
desired direction.
The mirror glass moves in the desired direction.
Adjusting the mirror on the passenger’s
side
Turn switch to position C and tilt switch in the
desired direction.
The mirror glass moves in the desired direction.
Folding in mirrors
Turn switch to position D.
Both door mirrors fold in.
Unfolding mirrors
Turn switch to position A or C.
Both door mirrors unfold.
Heating mirrors
Turn switch to position B.
48
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
Warning!
Risk of accident. Vehicles or objects appear
smaller in convex mirrors and further away
than they are in reality.
f Please observe the chapter “SYNCHRONOUS
ADJUSTMENT OF DOOR MIRRORS” on
Page 144.
f Also make use of the interior mirror for judging
distance.
Folding in door mirrors
f Fold in door mirrors before using the car wash.
Adjusting door mirrors
Door mirror adjustment – driver’s side
Door mirror heating
Door mirror adjustment – passenger’s side
Folding in door mirrors
Door mirrors
The convex mirror on the passenger’s side and the
aspherical mirror on the driver’s side provide a
larger field of view.
In the multi-purpose display of the instrument
panel, you have the option of activating synchronous adjustment of the door mirrors.
f Bear this distortion in mind when estimating
the distance of vehicles behind you and when
reversing into a parking space.
Risk of damage to the door mirrors when
washing the vehicle in a car wash.
ABCD-
Adjusting the door mirrors synchronously
1. Switch ignition on.
2. Select A for the driver’s side or C for the
passenger’s side by turning the control switch.
f Switch ignition on.
f Turn control switch to position D.
Both door mirrors fold in automatically.
If the electrical adjustment facility fails
f Fold in mirrors manually.
Unfolding door mirrors
f Switch ignition on.
3. Move the door mirror glasses in the appropriate direction by tilting the control switch.
f Turn control switch to position A or C.
Both door mirrors unfold automatically.
If the electrical adjustment facility fails
If the electrical adjustment facility fails
f Adjust the mirror by pressing on the mirror
face.
f Unfold mirrors manually.
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
49
Door mirror heating
Preconditions
– Vehicle must be equipped with seat memory.
The door mirror heating is ready for operation
when the ignition is switched on.
– Control switch A must be turned to position C
(passenger mirror adjustment).
Switching on
– Reverse gear must be engaged.
f Turn control switch to position B.
Both door mirrors are heated.
Moving mirror to its initial position
The mirror swivels back to its initial position when:
Switching off
f Change the control switch position.
– The vehicle is shifted out of reverse gear or
f The position of the control switch for door
mirror adjustment is changed.
Storing door mirror settings
On vehicles with seat memory, individual door
mirror settings can be stored on the person
buttons of the seat memory and on the vehicle
keys and recalled with these.
For further information on calling up and storing
the seat and door mirror settings on vehicles with
seat memory:
f Please observe the chapter “FRONT SEATS
WITH MEMORY” on Page 33.
ABCD-
Door mirror adjustment – driver’s side
Door mirror heating
Door mirror adjustment – passenger’s side
Folding in door mirrors
Swivelling down mirror glass as parking
aid
When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror on the
passenger's side swivels down slightly to show
the kerb area.
50
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
Switching off automatic anti-dazzle
operation
f Press button F.
Light-emitting diode E goes out.
Note on operation
The anti-dazzle function switches off
automatically if:
– Reverse gear is engaged or
– Interior lighting and/or
reading lights in the front are switched on.
Switching on automatic anti-dazzle function
f Press button F.
Light-emitting diode E lights up.
Interior mirror
Basic position – lever forward
Anti-dazzle setting – lever back
Note on operation
f When the interior mirror is being adjusted, the
anti-dazzle lever A must point forward.
E - Light-emitting diodes (LED)
F - Button for automatic anti-dazzle function
G - Light sensors
Automatic anti-dazzle interior
mirror
Sensors on the front and rear sides of the interior
mirror measure the incident light. The mirrors
automatically change to anti-dazzle position or
revert to their normal state, depending on the light
intensity.
Note on operation
The incident light in the area of light sensors G
must not be restricted (e.g. by stickers on the
windscreen).
Warning!
Risk of injury. Electrolyte fluid can emerge
from broken mirror glass. This fluid irritates
the skin and eyes.
f If the electrolyte fluid should come into contact
with the skin or eyes, immediately rinse it off
with clean water.
See a doctor if necessary.
Risk of damage to paintwork, leather, plastic
parts and clothing. Electrolyte fluid can be
removed only while it is still wet.
f Clean the affected parts with water.
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
51
You can change temporarily to manual mode or
shift gear in manual mode with the rocker
switches A on the steering wheel.
For further information on gearshifting with
Tiptronic S:
f Please observe the chapter “TIPTRONIC S” on
Page 173.
Horn
f Press button B to operate the horn.
Airbag unit
The airbag unit C is located behind the padded
steering wheel boss.
Steering wheel
Tiptronic rocker switches
The Porsche Tiptronic is a six-speed transmission
and features an “automatic” and a “manual”
gearshift mode.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the “airbag” is a
safety system designed to provide the driver with
maximum protection from injury in an accident.
For further information on the airbag system:
f Please observe the chapter “AIRBAG
SYSTEMS” on Page 215.
Steering wheel heating
The steering wheel heating is switched on and off
automatically when the ignition is switched on
depending on the interior temperature.
On vehicles with manual air conditioning
The steering wheel heating switches itself on, if
the following criteria are met at the same time:
1. Low outside temperature.
2. Low engine temperature.
3. The interior temperature setting on the display
of the air conditioning is 10 or more bars.
or at the highest level (all bars) of the interior
temperature setting on the display of the air conditioning.
The steering wheel heating switches itself off
again after a warming-up phase, or is switched off
if one of the criteria is no longer met.
For more information about setting the interior
temperature on vehicles with manual air conditioning:
f Please observe the chapter “SETTING
TEMPERATURE” on Page 63.
52
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
Steering wheel adjustment
Warning!
Risk of accident. The steering wheel may
move further than desired if you attempt to
adjust it whilst driving.
You can lose control of the vehicle.
f Do not adjust the steering wheel whilst driving.
Risk of crushing due to uncontrolled recall of
seat memory settings.
f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended.
Manual adjustment
1. Swivel locking lever A downwards.
2. Adapt the steering wheel setting to the
backrest angle and your seat position. Move
the steering wheel in the desired direction.
3. Swivel locking lever A back until you feel it
engage.
Electrical adjustment
f Press control switch B in the relevant direction
until the desired setting is reached.
The steering wheel setting can be stored in the
seat memory.
For further information on storing and calling up
the steering wheel setting on vehicles with
comfort memory:
f Please observe the chapter “FRONT SEATS
WITH MEMORY” on Page 33.
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
53
Multi-functional steering wheel
Warning!
There is a danger of accident if you set or
operate the multi-purpose display, radio,
navigation system, telephone or other
equipment while driving.
This could distract you from the traffic and
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
f Operate these components while driving only if
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting
procedures only with the vehicle stationary.
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, you
can use the function keys of the multi-functional
steering wheel to operate the following Porsche
communication systems:
– Telephone,
– Radio with CD drive,
– CD changer,
– TV tuner.
54
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
Readiness for operation of
multi-functional steering wheel
– With ignition switched on and
– With Porsche communication systems
switched on.
f Please observe the operating instructions
supplied for the Porsche communication
systems before operating the function keys.
Note on operation
The Porsche communication systems cannot be
switched on and off using the multi-functional
steering wheel.
Operating the function keys
The function keys on the steering wheel (arrows)
can be operated by pressing and by pulling.
Various functions may require you to press or pull
the buttons several times in order to achieve the
desired setting.
Answer the telephone
– Take calls.
Hang up the telephone
– End or reject the call.
Increase the volume of the relevant
communication system
Decrease the volume of the relevant
communication system
Switch off the sound
Next radio station/title
– Select the next radio station or title.
Last radio station/title
Illumination of steering wheel keys
When the light switch is operated, the key
illumination switches on automatically.
The illumination for the function keys and the
rocker switches can be switched on and off by the
buttons on the back of the steering wheel (arrow).
Switching illumination off
f Press button.
Multi-functional steering wheel with
telephone function
– Select the previous radio station or
title.
f Please observe the operating instructions
supplied for the Porsche communication
systems before operating the function keys.
Source selection
– Select available audio source.
Depending on the equipment in your
vehicle, the following sources are
available:
radio, CDS (single CD player),
CDC (CD changer).
Switching illumination on
f Press button again.
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
55
Manual tuning
– Set radio station manually.
Scan titles, radio stations
– Scan titles and radio stations briefly.
Increase the volume of the relevant
communication system
Decrease the volume of the relevant
communication system
Next radio station/title
– Select the next radio station or title.
Last radio station/title
Multi-functional steering wheel without
telephone function
f Please observe the operating instructions
supplied for the Porsche communication
systems before operating the function keys.
56
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
– Select the previous radio station or
title.
Switch off the sound
Source selection
– Select available audio source.
Depending on the equipment in your
vehicle, the following sources are
available:
radio, CDS (single CD player),
CDC (CD changer).
Sun visors
Make-up mirror
Sun blinds, rear side windows
f Swing the sun visor A down to prevent dazzle
from the front.
The make-up mirror on the rear of the sun visor is
closed with a sliding cover.
The sun blinds in the rear door trim panels can be
pulled out and secured in the holders A.
f If you are dazzled from the side, unclip the sun
visor A from the inner bracket and swivel it
round so that it is in front of the door window.
You can also swivel sun visor B downwards.
Caution!
Risk of injury.
f Keep the sliding cover closed while driving.
f The make-up mirror illumination is switched on
automatically when the sliding cover is opened
(arrow).
Caution!
Risk of damage.
f Pull out sun blinds only when door windows are
closed while vehicle is moving.
Retracting sun blinds
f Disengage the sun blind from holders A and
carefully guide it back into the retractor roller.
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
57
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Rear Window Heating
Overview of air-conditioning systems .............. 59
Opening the cover flap .................................. 60
Brief overview –
Manual air conditioning.................................. 61
Manual air conditioning.................................. 62
Brief overview – Automatically controlled
2-zone air-conditioning system ....................... 66
Automatically controlled 2-zone
air-conditioning ............................................. 67
Brief overview – Automatically controlled
4-zone air-conditioning system,
front control panel ........................................ 72
Brief overview – Automatically controlled
4-zone air-conditioning system,
rear control panel ......................................... 73
Automatically controlled 4-zone
air conditioning ............................................. 74
Vents ........................................................... 80
Heated rear window ...................................... 81
Parking heater .............................................. 82
58
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
Overview of air-conditioning
systems
The following air-conditioning system types may
be installed, depending on your vehicle equipment:
A – Automatically controlled 4-zone airconditioning system
The air-conditioning system controls the set
interior temperature completely automatically.
Temperature, air quantity and air distribution can
be set individually for the front left, front right, rear
left and rear right air-conditioned areas.
B – Automatically controlled 2-zone airconditioning system
The air-conditioning system controls the preselected interior temperature completely automatically. Temperature and air quantity can be set
individually for the left and right air-conditioned
areas.
C – Manual air-conditioning system
Air quantity, air distribution and temperature can
be set on the control panel of the manual air-conditioning system.
How do I recognise which is “my” air-conditioning system?
A - Button for rear control panel is present
B - AUTO button and REST button present
C - Wide rocker switch and no AUTO button
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
59
Opening the cover flap
f Swivel cover flap down by means of handle
(arrow).
60
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
Brief overview –
Manual air conditioning
This brief overview does not replace the information provided in the chapter “Manual air conditioning”.
In particular, warnings are not replaced by this
brief overview.
What do I want to do?
What do I have to do?
Setting temperature
Press button K upwards or downwards respectively.
Setting air quantity
Press button E upwards or downwards respectively.
Setting air distribution
Air to windscreen: Press button F.
Air to central and side vents: Press button H.
Air to footwell: Press button G.
Defrosting windscreen
Press button A.
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
61
ABCDEFGHI JK-
Manual air conditioning
Air quantity, air distribution and temperature can
be set on the control panel of the manual air conditioning system.
The individual adjustment is shown on the airconditioning display.
62
Note on operation
The air conditioner settings are stored on the
respective remote control when switching off the
ignition and locking the vehicle. The “Air flow OFF”
setting is stored for approx. 60 minutes and the
“Recirculated air” setting is stored for approx.
20 minutes.
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
Windscreen defrost
Heated rear window
Recirculated air
Air-conditioning display
Air quantity button
Air to windscreen
Air to footwell
Air to central and side vents
ECON button (air-conditioning compressor off/on)
REST button (engine residual heat)
Temperature button
Setting temperature
Setting air quantity
Setting air distribution
Air to windscreen
f Press temperature button K up (warmer) or
down (colder).
The selected temperature is shown in a bar
display on the display above the button. The
more bars that are displayed, the higher the
temperature of the air flowing into the interior.
f Press air quantity button E up (more) or down
(less) respectively.
The selected air quantity is shown in a bar
display on the display above the button. The
more bars that are displayed, the more air
flows into the interior.
f Press button
.
The air flows to the windscreen.
Note
If the air quantity was reduced so much that “OFF”
appears on the display, the supply of air from the
outside is interrupted.
f Press button
.
The air flows from the central and side vents.
Vents must be open.
f For maximum cooling, activate recirculated air
button
.
Air to central and side vents
Air to footwell
Warning!
Risk of accident due to impaired vision.
The windows may mist up in the air quantity
setting “OFF”.
f Press button
.
The air flows to the footwell.
f Press button up (increase air quantity).
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
63
Switching on circulating-air mode
Warning!
Risk of accident due to impaired vision. In
circulating-air mode, the windows may mist
up.
f Only select circulating-air mode for short
periods.
f If the windows mist up, switch circulating-air
mode off immediately by pressing the circulating-air button again and select the “Defrost
windscreen” function.
Defrosting windscreen
f Press button
.
The indicator light in the button lights up.
The air flows to the windscreen and the front
side windows.
The windscreen is demisted or defrosted as
quickly as possible.
ECON mode
Warning!
Risk of accident due to impaired vision.
The outside air that is flowing in is not dried
in Econ mode. The windows may mist up.
f Do not switch on ECON mode in damp
weather.
Ending the function
f Press button
f Press button
.
The indicator light in the button lights up.
The outside-air supply is interrupted and only
the inside air is circulated.
again.
In ECON mode, the air-conditioning compressor is
switched off and this deactivates the cooling
function (e.g. to save fuel).
The air-conditioning compressor is always
switched off at temperatures below 3 °C.
Switching on ECON mode
f Press button
.
The text ECON appears on the air-conditioning
display.
Switching off ECON mode
f If the interior temperature is too high,
Press button
.
The text ECON disappears from the air-conditioning display.
64
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
REST mode
Using engine residual heat
The residual heat of the engine can be used to
heat the interior for up to 20 minutes after the
ignition has been switched off.
f Press button
.
The air-conditioning settings cannot be
changed in REST mode.
Ending the function
f Press button
.
Note on operation
If the battery voltage is too low, REST mode is
automatically ended.
Information on air-conditioning
compressor
The air-conditioning compressor:
– May switch off briefly to ensure sufficient
engine cooling if the engine is operating under
extreme load.
– Switches off automatically at temperatures
below approx. 3 °C and cannot be switched
on, even manually.
– Operates most effectively with the windows
closed.
If the vehicle has been in the sun for a long
time, it is a good idea to ventilate the interior
briefly with the windows open.
– Depending on the outside temperature and
humidity, condensation can drip from the
evaporator and form a pool under the car.
This is normal and not a sign of leakage.
– If uncooled air flows out when the lowest
temperature has been set (“LO”), switch off the
air-conditioning compressor and have the fault
remedied.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
65
Brief overview – Automatically
controlled 2-zone air-conditioning
system
This brief overview does not replace the information provided in the chapter “Automatically
controlled 2-zone air conditioning”. In particular,
warnings are not replaced by this brief overview.
What do I want to do?
What do I have to do?
Switching on automatic air-conditioning
system
Press button C.
Setting temperature
Left vehicle side: Press button H up (warmer) or down (colder).
Right vehicle side: Press button N up (warmer) or down (colder).
Setting air quantity
Left vehicle side: Press button G down (less) or up (more).
Right vehicle side: Press button O down (less) or up (more).
Setting air distribution
Air to windscreen: Press button I.
Air to central and side vents: Press button K.
Air to footwell: Press button J.
Defrosting windscreen
Press button A.
66
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
ABCDEFGHI JKLMNO-
Automatically controlled 2-zone
air-conditioning
Depending on various factors (e.g. sunlight, air
quality), the air-conditioning system controls the
preset interior temperature fully automatically.
Temperature and air quantity can be set
individually/separately for the two left and right
air-conditioned areas.
Windscreen defrost
Heated rear window
AUTO button (automatic mode)
Recirculated air, automatic recirculated air
Air-conditioning display
Temperature sensor
Air quantity button for left side
Temperature button, left side
Air to windscreen
Air to footwell
Air to central and side vents
ECON button (air-conditioning compressor off/on)
REST button (engine residual heat)
Air quantity button for right side
Temperature button, right side
Note on operation
The air conditioner settings are stored on the
respective remote control when switching off the
ignition and locking the vehicle. The “Air flow OFF”
setting is stored for approx. 60 minutes and the
“Recirculated air” setting is stored for approx.
20 minutes.
You can manually influence the automatic system.
The individual adjustment is shown on the airconditioning display.
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
67
Automatic mode
f Press button
.
The indicator light in the button lights up.
Air quantity and air distribution are automatically controlled and variations are compensated.
Note on operation
If necessary, the automatic system can be
manually influenced.
This manual setting is retained until the appropriate function button is pressed again or the
AUTO button is pressed.
Setting temperature
To suit personal comfort, the interior temperature
can be adjusted between 16 °C and 29.5 °C.
Recommendation: 22 °C
f Press temperature button up (warmer) or down
(colder).
Button H: left side of vehicle
Button O: Right side of vehicle
The selected temperature is shown on the
display above the button.
If “LO” or “HI” appears on the display, the system
is operating at maximum cooling or heating
power. Automatic mode is switched off.
If the preselected temperature is changed, the air
quantity blowing out can adjust automatically in
automatic mode.
The desired temperature is reached more quickly
this way.
68
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
Setting air quantity
f Press desired air quantity button G up (more)
or down (less) respectively.
The selected air quantity is shown in a bar
display on the display above the button. The
more bars that are displayed, the more air
flows into the interior.
Press
to return to automatic mode.
If the air quantity was reduced so much that “OFF”
appears on the display, the supply of air from the
outside is interrupted.
Warning!
Risk of accident due to impaired vision.
The windows may mist up in the air quantity
setting “OFF”.
f Press button G up (increase air quantity).
Setting air distribution
Air to windscreen
f Press button
.
The air flows to the windscreen.
Air to central and side vents
f Press button
.
The air flows from the central and side vents.
Vents must be open.
Air to footwell
f Press button
.
The air flows to the footwell.
Ending air distribution functions
f Press the relevant button again or
f Press button
Accepting settings for driver’s side for the
entire vehicle
The Mono function allows the temperature and air
quantity settings for the driver’s side to be
accepted for the entire vehicle.
Switching on MONO function
The temperature settings for the driver’s side can
be accepted for the entire vehicle.
f Press button
for 2 seconds.
The text MONO appears on the air-conditioning
display.
Switching on automatic
circulating-air mode
f Press button
once.
The indicator light in the button lights up.
Control of the outside-air supply depends on
the air quality.
Note
The recommended operating mode is automatic
circulating-air mode.
Ending MONO function
f Press button
for 2 seconds or
– Change the settings in the air-conditioned
areas.
.
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
69
Switching on circulating-air mode
Warning!
Risk of accident due to impaired vision.
In circulating-air mode, the windows may
mist up.
f Only select circulating-air mode for short
periods.
f If the windows mist up, switch circulating-air
mode off immediately by pressing the circulating-air button again and select the “Defrost
windscreen” function.
Defrosting windscreen
f Press button
.
The indicator light in the button lights up.
The air flows to the windscreen and the front
side windows.
The windscreen is demisted or defrosted as
quickly as possible.
Warning!
Risk of accident due to impaired vision.
The outside air that is flowing in is not dried
in Econ mode. The windows may mist up.
f Do not switch on ECON mode in damp
weather.
Ending the function
f Press button
Press button
f Press button
twice.
The indicator light in the button lights up.
The outside-air supply is interrupted and only
the inside air is circulated.
Note on operation
If the air-conditioning compressor is switched off
manually or automatically, circulating-air mode
ends after approx. 3 minutes.
70
ECON mode
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
again or
.
In ECON mode, the air-conditioning compressor is
switched off and this deactivates the cooling
function (e.g. to save fuel).
The air-conditioning compressor is always
switched off at temperatures below 3 °C.
Switching on ECON mode
f Press button
.
The text ECON appears on the air-conditioning
display.
Switching off ECON mode
f If the interior temperature is too high,
Press button
.
The text ECON disappears from the air-conditioning display.
REST mode
Using engine residual heat
The residual heat of the engine can be used to
heat the interior for up to 20 minutes after the
ignition has been switched off.
f Press button
.
The air-conditioning settings cannot be
changed in REST mode.
Ending the function
f Press button
.
Note on operation
If the battery voltage is too low, REST mode is
automatically ended.
Information on air-conditioning
compressor
Sensors
The air-conditioning compressor:
To avoid affecting the performance of the airconditioning system:
– May switch off briefly to ensure sufficient
engine cooling if the engine is operating under
extreme load.
– Do not cover the sun sensor on the dashboard
and the temperature sensor F in the front
control panel of the air-conditioning system.
– Switches off automatically at temperatures
below approx. 3 °C and cannot be switched
on, even manually.
– Operates most effectively with the windows
closed.
If the vehicle has been in the sun for a long
time, it is a good idea to ventilate the interior
briefly with the windows open.
– Depending on the outside temperature and
humidity, condensation can drip from the
evaporator and form a pool under the car.
This is normal and not a sign of leakage.
– If uncooled air flows out when the lowest
temperature has been set (“LO”), switch off the
air-conditioning compressor and have the fault
remedied.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
71
Brief overview – Automatically
controlled 4-zone air-conditioning
system, front control panel
This brief overview does not replace the information provided in the chapter “Automatically
controlled four-zone air conditioning”. In particular,
warnings are not replaced by this brief overview.
What do I want to do?
What do I have to do?
Switching on automatic air-conditioning
system at front
Press button C.
Setting temperature at front
for left side: Press button H up (warmer) or down (colder).
for right side: Press button Q up (warmer) or down (colder).
Setting air quantity at front
for left side: Press button G down (less) or up (more).
for right side: Press button R down (less) or up (more).
Setting air distribution at front
Air to windscreen for left or right side: Press button I or P.
Air to central and side vents for left or right side: Press button K or N.
Air to footwell for left or right side: Press button J or O.
Defrosting windscreen
Press button A.
72
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
Brief overview – Automatically
controlled 4-zone air-conditioning
system, rear control panel
This brief overview does not replace the information provided in the chapter “Automatically
controlled four-zone air conditioning”. In particular,
warnings are not replaced by this brief overview.
What do I want to do?
What do I have to do?
Switching on automatic air-conditioning
system at rear
Press button C.
Setting temperature at rear
for left side: Press button H up (warmer) or down (colder).
for right side: Press button S up (warmer) or down (colder).
Setting air quantity at rear
for left side: Press button G down (less) or up (more).
for right side: Press button T down (less) or up (more).
Setting air distribution at rear
Air to side window for left or right side: Press button I or P.
Air to central vent for left or right side: Press button K or R.
Air to footwell for left or right side: Press button J or Q.
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
73
Control panel, front
A - Windscreen defrost
B - Heated rear window
C - AUTO button (automatic mode),
REST button (engine residual heat)
D - Recirculated air, automatic recirculated air
E - Air-conditioning display
F - Temperature sensor
G - Air quantity button, left
H - Temperature button, left
I - Air to windscreen, left
J - Air to footwell, left
K - Air to left central and side vents
L - Setting for rear air-conditioned areas
M- ECON button (air-conditioning compressor off/on)
N - Air to right central and side vents
O - Air to footwell, right
P - Air to windscreen, right
Q - Temperature button, right
R - Air quantity button, right
Automatically controlled 4-zone
air conditioning
Depending on various factors (e.g. ambient
temperature, sunlight, air quality), the air-conditioning system controls the preset interior temperature fully automatically.
Note on operation
The air conditioner settings are stored on the
respective remote control when switching off the
ignition and locking the vehicle. The “Air flow OFF”
setting is stored for approx. 60 minutes and the
“Recirculated air” setting is stored for approx.
20 minutes.
Temperature, air quantity and air distribution can
be set individually/separately for the four airconditioned areas front left, front right, rear left
and rear right.
You can manually influence the automatic system.
74
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
Control panel, rear
C - AUTO button (automatic mode)
F - Air-conditioning/seat heating display
G - Air quantity button, left
H - Temperature button, left; seat heating, left
I - Air to vent, left door pillar
J - Air to footwell, left
K - Air to left central vent (centre console)
O - Seat heating off/on
P - Air to vent, right door pillar
Q - Air to footwell, right
R - Air to right central vent
(centre console right)
S - Temperature button, right; seat heating, right
T - Air quantity button, right
Switching automatic mode on/off
You can switch the front and rear air-conditioned
areas to automatic mode independently of each
other.
f Press AUTO button C on the front or rear
control panel.
The indicator light in button C of the front
control panel and the AUTO indicator in the
rear display panel light up.
Air quantity and distribution are automatically
controlled and variations are compensated.
Note on operation
If necessary, the automatic system can be
manually influenced.
This setting is retained until the appropriate
function button is pressed again or the AUTO
button C is pressed.
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
75
Setting temperature
To suit personal comfort, the interior temperature
can be adjusted individually between 16 °C and
29.5 °C for each of the four air-conditioned areas.
Recommendation: 22 °C.
f Press temperature button up (warmer) or down
(colder).
Left air-conditioned area at front: button H
Right air-conditioned area at front: button Q
or
Left air-conditioned area at rear: button H
Right air-conditioned area at rear: button S
The selected temperature is shown on the
display above the button.
If “LO” or “HI” appears on the display, the system
is operating at maximum cooling or heating
power.
If the preselected temperature is changed, the air
quantity blowing out can adjust automatically in
automatic mode.
The desired temperature is reached more quickly
this way.
Setting air quantity
The air quantity can be selected individually for
each of the four air-conditioned areas.
f Press air quantity button up (more) or down
(less) respectively.
Left air-conditioned area at front: button G
Right air-conditioned area at front: button R
or
Left air-conditioned area at rear: button G
Right air-conditioned area at rear: button T
The selected air quantity is shown in a bar
display on the display above the button. The
more bars that are displayed, the more air
flows into the interior.
Press AUTO button C to return to automatic
mode.
If the air quantity was reduced at the front control
panel so much that “OFF” appears on the display,
the supply of air from the outside is interrupted.
Warning!
Risk of accident due to impaired vision
caused by misted windows. The windows may
mist up in the air quantity setting “OFF”.
f Press button G up (increase air quantity).
76
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
Setting air distribution
Air to the windscreen and side
windows
The air quantity can be selected individually for
each of the four air-conditioned areas.
– Front control panel:
The air flows to the windscreen.
– Rear control panel:
The air flows to the corresponding side
window.
f Press button
.
Air to central and side vents
f Press button
.
– Front control panel:
The air flows from the front central and side
vents.
– Rear control panel:
The air flows to the central vents.
f Vents must be open.
Defrosting windscreen
Air to footwell
f Push button
forward or back.
The air flows to the footwell.
Ending air distribution functions
f Press corresponding button again or press
AUTO button.
Accepting settings for driver’s side for the
entire vehicle
f Press button
on the front control panel.
The indicator light in the button lights up.
The air flows to the windscreen and the front
side windows.
The windscreen is demisted or defrosted as
quickly as possible.
Ending the function
f Press button
Press button
The Mono function allows the temperature and air
quantity settings for the driver’s side to be
accepted for the entire vehicle.
Ending MONO function
f Press button
on the front control panel
for 2 seconds.
The text MONO appears on the air-conditioning
display.
Ending MONO function
f Press button
for 2 seconds or
on the front control panel
f Change the settings in the air-conditioned
areas.
Switching on circulating-air mode
again or
.
Switching on automatic circulating-air mode
Warning!
Risk of accident due to impaired vision.
In circulating-air mode, the windows may
mist up.
f Only select circulating-air mode for short
periods.
f If the windows mist up, switch circulating-air
mode off immediately by pressing the circulating-air button again and select the “Defrost
windscreen” function.
f Press button
on the front control
panel once.
The indicator light in the button lights up.
Control of the outside-air supply depends on
the air quality.
f Press button
on the front control panel
twice.
The indicator light in the button lights up.
The outside-air supply is interrupted and only
the inside air is circulated.
Note
Note on operation
The recommended operating mode is automatic
circulating-air mode.
If the air-conditioning compressor is switched off
manually or automatically, circulating-air mode
ends after approx. 3 minutes.
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
77
ECON mode
Information on air-conditioning
compressor
REST mode
Warning!
Risk of accident due to impaired vision.
The outside air that is flowing in is not dried
in Econ mode. The windows may mist up.
f Do not switch on ECON mode in damp
weather.
In ECON mode, the air-conditioning compressor is
switched off and this deactivates the cooling
function (e.g. to save fuel).
The air-conditioning compressor is always
switched off at temperatures below 3 °C.
Switching on ECON mode
f Press button
.
The text ECON appears on the air-conditioning
display.
Switching off ECON mode
– If the interior temperature is too high,
Press button
.
The text ECON disappears from the air-conditioning display.
78
Using engine residual heat
The air-conditioning compressor:
The residual heat of the engine can be used to
heat the interior for up to 20 minutes after the
ignition has been switched off.
– May switch off briefly to ensure sufficient
engine cooling if the engine is operating under
extreme load.
f Press button
on the front control
panel.
The air-conditioning settings cannot be
changed in REST mode.
– Switches off automatically at temperatures
below approx. 3 °C and cannot be switched
on, even manually.
Ending the function
f Press button
.
Note on operation
If the battery voltage is too low, REST mode is
automatically ended.
Sensors
To avoid affecting the performance of the airconditioning system:
Do not cover the sun sensor on the dashboard and
the temperature sensor F in the front control panel
of the air-conditioning system.
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
– Operates most effectively with the windows
closed.
If the vehicle has been in the sun for a long
time, it is a good idea to ventilate the interior
briefly with the windows open.
– Depending on the outside temperature and
humidity, condensation can drip from the
evaporator and form a pool under the car.
This is normal and not a sign of leakage.
– If uncooled air flows out when the lowest
temperature has been set (“LO”), switch off the
air-conditioning compressor and have the fault
remedied.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Controlling rear air-conditioned
areas with the front control panel
f Press button
.
The symbol appears on the display.
The rear air-conditioned areas can be
controlled from the front control panel.
Ending the function
f Press button
Note on operation
Seat heating, rear
The rear seats can also be heated in vehicles with
four-zone air conditioning.
f Please observe the chapter “REAR SEAT
HEATING FOR VEHICLES WITH 4-ZONE AIR
CONDITIONING” on Page 38.
Sensors
again.
f The function is ended automatically
10 seconds after the last settings are made.
To avoid affecting the performance of the airconditioning system:
f Do not cover the sun sensor on the dashboard
and the temperature sensor F in the front
control panel of the air-conditioning system.
Disabling control panel for rear
air-conditioned areas
The power windows, central locking buttons on
the rear doors and the rear control panel for the
air conditioning can be disabled by means of the
safety button in the armrest of the driver’s door.
Switching child protection on/off
f Press the safety button to switch child
protection on and off.
The symbol in the safety button lights up if
child protection is active.
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
79
Changing air flow direction
f Swivel the vent fins B in the desired direction.
Note on operation
Fresh air or conditioned fresh air can be delivered
from all vents depending on the air-distribution
setting.
Fresh-air intake
In order to ensure unhindered air intake:
Keep the fresh-air intake between the windscreen
and the engine compartment lid free from snow,
ice and leaves.
A - Continuous opening and closing
B - Setting vent direction
Vents
Opening vents
f Rotate thumb wheel A upward.
Closing vents
f Rotate thumb wheel A downward.
80
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
Heated rear window
The heated rear window is ready for operation
when the ignition is on.
Switching on
f Press button B.
The indicator light in the button lights up.
Depending on the outside temperature, the
heating switches off automatically after approx.
5 to 20 minutes.
The heating can be switched back on again by
pressing the switch again.
Switching off
f Press button B.
The indicator light in the button goes out.
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
81
The parking heater is operated using the following
buttons on the front air-conditioning control panel:
Switch parking heater on/off,
activate programme
Start programming,
call up memory locations
Set ON times,
activate heating function
Set ON times,
activate ventilation function
Notes on operation
ABCD-
“–” button
TIMER button
ON/OFF button
“–” button
Parking heater
The parking heater features two functions: parking
heating and parking ventilation.
The parking heater runs on fuel, and it therefore
cannot be switched on after the fuel reserve
warning lights up.
Danger!
Risk of poisoning! The parking heater
consumes fuel.
f Switch off the parking heater before refuelling.
f Do not operate the parking heater in enclosed
spaces (e.g. a garage).
The parking heater is ready for use regardless of
the ignition key position.
The parking heater is also used as an auxiliary
heater. Operation of the parking heater is therefore clearly audible when outside temperatures
are low, even if the parking heater has been
manually switched off.
82
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
For further information on the fuel reserve
warning:
Please observe the chapter “FUEL RESERVE
WARNING” on Page 122.
The parking heater must be operated at least
once per month with the engine cold.
Ignition off: When the parking heater is running,
the remaining running time is shown on the display
panel.
Operation of the parking heater is clearly audible
when outside temperatures are low and the engine
is cold.
Switching parking heater on and
off on the control panel of the air
conditioning
Switching on
f Keep button A of the remote control pressed
for approx. 2 seconds. The light-emitting diode
on the remote control lights up green.
Switching on
Switching off
f Press ON/OFF button
.
The most recently activated function (parking
heating or parking ventilation) is switched on.
f Keep button B of the remote control pressed
for approx. 2 seconds. The light-emitting diode
on the remote control lights up red.
Switching off
f Press ON/OFF button
Note on operation
again.
Note on operation
f After switching off the parking heater with the
ON/OFF button
, wait for at least
2 minutes before you press the button again.
The combustion chamber is being cleaned
during this time.
Switching parking heater on and off by
radio remote control
The parking heater radio remote control has a
range of up to 500 m. The range may be reduced
depending on structural and spatial conditions.
Illumination of the light-emitting diode on the
remote control indicates only that a transmitted
signal is being received. You can make sure that
the command has been executed successfully
only at the vehicle.
If the light-emitting diode of the remote control is
flashing, the parking heater could not be switched
on or off.
Check the range of the remote control and the
operational readiness of the parking heater in the
vehicle.
f Have the parking heater faults remedied.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
83
Programming function
1. Switch ignition off.
2. Press TIMER button on the front air-conditioning
control panel.
The symbols for the parking heating I or
parking ventilation E functions flash on the
display.
3. Select function.
Press the “+” button for parking heating or the
“–” button for parking ventilation.
If no other entry is made within 10 seconds, the
display returns to its initial status.
However, the selected function is retained and is
activated when the system is next turned on.
E - Parking ventilation symbol
F - ON time symbol
G - Memory location symbol
H - ON time
I - Parking heating symbol
Programming the parking heater
Complete programming of the parking heater
requires definition of the
– Function and
– ON time.
The parking heater has three independent
memory locations for programming the ON times.
The ON time together with the associated parking
heating or parking ventilation function can be
programmed in each memory location.
84
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
Programming ON times
Activating a memory location
Example
1. Switch ignition off.
The parking heater runs for 30 minutes. It then
switches itself off automatically.
The programme must be reactivated for each
subsequent operating cycle.
To do this:
The parking heater is to activate the parking
heating function at 9:48 a.m.
To do this:
2. Press TIMER button.
3. Select function (parking heating or parking
ventilation).
4. Select memory location with the TIMER button.
The desired memory location can be selected
by pressing the TIMER button several times.
5. Set ON time using the “+” and “–” buttons.
The time is adjusted in minute steps each time
the buttons are pressed briefly. If the button is
kept depressed, the time is adjusted faster.
ON times are valid only for 24 hours.
1. Switch ignition off.
2. Press TIMER button.
3. Select function (parking heating or parking
ventilation).
4. Select memory location with the TIMER button.
The ON time which was last saved is displayed.
6. Press ON/OFF button.
Displays F and G flash for approx. 10 seconds.
Flashing of the displays can be ended before
this time has elapsed by pressing the ON/OFF
button again.
After operation of the ON/OFF button, the ON
time H, clock symbol F and memory location
G are displayed for 2 minutes.
The display then goes out.
The parking heater has now been programmed
and the selected memory location is active
(the symbol G is lit).
5. Press ON/OFF button.
The programme is reactivated.
Displays F and G flash for approx. 10 seconds.
Flashing of the displays can be ended before
this time has elapsed by pressing the ON/OFF
button again.
After operation of the ON/OFF button, the ON
time H, clock symbol F and memory location
G are displayed for 2 minutes.
The display then goes out.
The parking heater has now been programmed
and the selected memory location is active
(the symbol G is lit).
Note on operation
Note on operation
Only one memory location can be active at any
one time.
Only one memory location can be active at any
one time.
1. Switch ignition off.
2. Press TIMER button on the front air-conditioning control panel.
The symbols for the parking heating or parking
ventilation functions flash on the display.
3. Press “+” button.
This selects the parking heating function.
4. Select memory location with the TIMER button.
5. Set ON time to 9:48 a.m. using the “+”
and “–” buttons.
6. Press ON/OFF button.
The parking heater has now been programmed
and the selected memory location is active.
Note on operation
If the parking heater is switched on “manually”
prior to the programme start of an active memory,
this will delete the programming.
The memory location must be reactivated in this
case if this setting is desired.
The parking heater will not switch itself on if the
memory location is not reactivated.
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
85
Parking heater faults
Initial start-up following period of
non-utilisation
If you have not used the parking heater for several
weeks, the system may require the heater to be
switched on several times before it actually
“starts up”.
f Please wait between the individual
switch-on attempts for
approx. 5 minutes in each case.
Requirement for initial start-up of the
parking heater:
– Cold engine.
In the following instances, have the parking heater
inspected by a qualified specialist workshop:
– If the parking heater fails to “start up” after the
3rd switch-on attempt.
– If the parking heater has a fault, no function
symbol appears on the display, only the
remaining running time is displayed. The
display flashes on and off briefly and then goes
completely dark.
– In the event of a severe accident, the parking
heater is automatically switched off as a safety
precaution.
The parking heater is not ready for operation.
– If the temperature is too high, the overheating
protection automatically switches the parking
heater off. The parking heater is not ready for
operation.
– If the voltage level is too low, the parking
heater is automatically switched off. The
parking heater is temporarily unavailable.
We recommend that you use a Porsche partner
for this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
86
Air Conditioning, Parking Heater and Heated Rear Window
Windows and Sliding Roofs
Power windows ............................................ 88
Brief overview – sliding/lifting roof .............. 92
Sliding/lifting roof......................................... 93
Brief overview –
Panorama roof system ................................. 97
Panorama roof system ................................. 98
Emergency operation of the Panorama
roof system ............................................. 102
Windows and Sliding Roofs
87
Power windows
Warning!
Danger of injury when closing the windows,
especially when windows close automatically.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the windows close.
f Always withdraw ignition key when leaving the
vehicle or switch ignition off on vehicles that
have Porsche Entry & Drive. Always take the
ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle.
Uninformed persons could injure themselves
by operating the power windows.
f In case of danger, immediately release the
vehicle key or the button in the door handle in
vehicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive.
f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended.
Tip on driving
f Always keep the side windows closed while
driving off-road.
Readiness for operation of power windows
– With ignition switched on or
– A maximum of 10 minutes with door closed
and ignition key withdrawn, but only until
driver’s or passenger’s door is first opened.
One-touch operation for closing the door
windows is available only when the ignition is
switched on.
Opening/closing windows
Opening window with the rocker switch
– Press rocker switch until the window has
reached the desired position.
ABCD-
Power window in driver’s door
Power window in passenger’s door
Left rear power window
Right rear power window
Note on operation
Rocker switches A and B in the driver’s door have
a two-stage function:
– If the switch in question is pressed or pulled to
the first level, the front window is opened or
closed manually.
– If the switch is completely pressed or pulled to
the second level, the front window is opened or
closed automatically (one-touch operation).
88
Windows and Sliding Roofs
One-touch operation for front windows
Pull or press rocker switch in the driver’s door to
its final position.
Window moves to its final position.
Press or pull again to stop the window in the
desired position.
Power windows in passenger’s door and rear doors
Closing window with the rocker switch
f Pull rocker switch until the window has reached
the desired position.
Disabling power windows in the rear
doors
The power windows, central locking buttons on
the rear doors and the rear control panel for the
air conditioning can be disabled by means of the
safety button in the armrest of the driver’s door.
Switching child protection on/off
f Press the safety button to switch child protection on and off.
The symbol in the safety button lights up if
child protection is active.
Windows and Sliding Roofs
89
Note on operation
If a door window is blocked during closing, it will
stop and open again by several centimetres.
However, this is not the case:
– If the rocker switch is pressed again within
10 seconds of the window being blocked and
– The windows are closed using the vehicle key
in the door lock (comfort function).
The windows close with their full closing force.
Warning!
Risk of injury. If the rocker switch is pulled
again within 10 seconds of the window being
blocked, the window will close with its full
closing force.
On vehicles without Porsche Entry & Drive
On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive
Opening/closing windows with vehicle key
Closing windows with button in door
handle
f Hold the car key in the door lock in the
unlocking or locking position until the windows
have reached the desired position.
If you unlock the vehicle with the key at the door
lock, only the driver’s door is unlocked. In order to
prevent the alarm system from being triggered,
you must switch the ignition on within 15 seconds
of opening the door.
90
Windows and Sliding Roofs
f Hold the button in the door handle when
locking the vehicle until the windows and the
Panorama roof system have reached the
desired position.
Note on operation
The comfort function remains available for approx.
30 seconds after the vehicle has been locked.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the windows close.
One-touch operation is disabled for 10 seconds
after the door window is obstructed.
Storing final position of the door windows
after connecting the vehicle battery
The end positions of the door windows are lost
when the battery is disconnected and reconnected. One-touch operation of the windows is
disabled.
Perform these procedures for all windows:
1. Close window completely once by pulling
rocker switch.
2. Open window completely once by pressing
rocker switch.
Close window completely once again by pulling
rocker switch.
Windows and Sliding Roofs
91
Brief overview – sliding/lifting roof
This brief overview does not replace the information provided in the chapter “Sliding/lifting roof”.
In particular, warnings are not replaced by this
brief overview.
Switch in the roof console
What do I want to do?
What do I have to do?
What do I see?
Opening roof
Turn switch to position C.
Roof opens.
Or:
Turn switch to position B
(noise-optimised position).
Lifting roof
Turn switch to position D.
Roof is lifted.
Close roof
Turn switch to position A.
Roof closes.
92
Windows and Sliding Roofs
Sliding/lifting roof
The electric sliding/lifting roof is made of tinted
single-sheet safety glass. It is equipped with a
sliding roof cover that can be steplessly adjusted
manually to protect against the sun.
The sliding/lifting roof is operated by means of a
rotary switch in the roof console.
Warning!
Risk of injury when operating or automatically closing the sliding/lifting roof.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the sliding/lifting roof is operated.
f Always withdraw ignition key when leaving the
vehicle or switch ignition off on vehicles that
have Porsche Entry & Drive. Always take the
ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle.
Uninformed persons (e.g. children) could injure
themselves by operating the sliding/lifting
roof.
f In case of danger, operate the rotary switch in
the opposite direction or release the vehicle
key immediately.
Readiness for operation of the sliding/
lifting roof
– With ignition switched on.
– With ignition key withdrawn until door is first
opened, but only for a maximum of
10 minutes.
Readiness function of sliding/lifting roof
switches off after 10 minutes
If the vehicle is unlocked, the sliding/lifting roof
can no longer be operated after 10 minutes
(to save the vehicle battery). The power supply is
switched back on when the ignition is switched on
or the engine is started.
ABCD-
Close roof
Open roof (noise-optimised position)
Open roof
Lift roof
Note on operation
Using the automated presetting system, every
usable sliding/lifting roof position can be
controlled directly with the rotary switch.
f Always keep the sliding/lifting roof and the side
windows closed while driving off-road.
Windows and Sliding Roofs
93
A - Closing the sliding/lifting roof
C - Opening sliding/lifting roof completely
f Turn rotary switch to position A.
f Turn rotary switch beyond stop position B to
switch position C.
This requires a somewhat greater force.
When released, the rotary switch returns on its
own to position B.
Note on operation
The sliding/lifting roof is equipped with a force
limiter. If the sliding/lifting roof is obstructed
during the closing process, the sliding/lifting roof
opens again immediately.
Closing the sliding/lifting roof after
operation of the force limiter
f Remove the obstruction.
f Turn rotary switch to position A again.
B - Opening sliding/lifting roof
(noise-optimised position)
f Turn rotary switch to position B.
The sliding/lifting roof opens in switch position B
until it reaches the best position from the point of
view of noise. It can be opened fully, however, if
you continue to turn the switch beyond the limit to
position C.
94
Windows and Sliding Roofs
D - Lifting sliding/lifting roof
f Turn rotary switch between switch positions A
and D until it reaches the required position. The
roof is lifted completely in switch position D.
Comfort function on vehicles without
Porsche Entry & Drive
Closing the sliding/lifting roof
f Hold the car key in the door lock in the locking
position until the windows and the sliding/
lifting roof have reached the desired position.
Comfort function on vehicles with
Porsche Entry & Drive
Closing the sliding/lifting roof
f Hold the car key in the door lock in the locking
position until the windows and the sliding/
lifting roof have reached the desired position
or
f Hold the button in the door handle when
locking the vehicle until the windows and the
sliding/lifting roof have reached the desired
position.
Emergency operation of sliding/
lifting roof
If the sliding/lifting roof is defective, this can be
closed or opened manually.
f Before performing emergency operation,
please check whether the fuse is defective.
Warning!
Risk of injury when closing the roof.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the roof elements are operated.
1. Open the glasses case in the roof console
(arrow).
2. Unclip cover A.
3. Fold up armrest.
4. Remove key B from the lower oddments tray
(underneath the rubber mat) in the centre
console.
Windows and Sliding Roofs
95
6. Hold the key in this position and turn.
To close the roof – turn to the right
To open the roof – turn to the left
7. Remove the key and return it to the oddments
tray.
8. Clip in cover.
f Have the fault remedied. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop. We recommend that you
use a Porsche partner for this work since
these are staffed with trained personnel and
have the necessary parts and tools.
5. Insert the key in opening C until it can be felt
and heard to engage.
This requires a somewhat greater force.
96
Windows and Sliding Roofs
Brief overview –
Panorama roof system
This brief overview does not replace the information provided in the chapter “Panorama roof
system”.
In particular, warnings are not replaced by this
brief overview.
Elements of the Panorama roof system
Switch in the roof console
What do I want to do?
What do I have to do?
What do I see?
Open roof completely
Turn switch to position C.
Roof elements 2 and 3 open.
Open roof element 2
Turn switch to position B.
Only roof element 2 opens.
Open roof element 3
Turn switch to position E.
Only roof element 3 opens.
Lift roof element 3
Turn switch to position D.
Only roof element 3 is lifted.
Close roof
Turn switch to position A.
All opened roof elements are closed.
(roof elements 2 and 3)
Windows and Sliding Roofs
97
Panorama roof system
Caution!
Risk of damage when activating the
Panorama roof system due to improperly
fitted roof superstructures.
The Panorama roof system of your Porsche
consists of a total of four roof elements.
Roof element 1 is the draught deflector. This
adjusts itself according to the speed, and helps
protect from the disturbing effects of the wind
when the Panorama roof system is open,
especially at high speeds or in the case of
turbulent air flow.
f Check that the roof superstructures are
properly fitted before starting to drive.
f Make sure that there is sufficient clearance
between the Panorama roof system and the
fitted roof superstructures.
Both roof elements 2 and 3 can be moved in the
vehicle’s longitudinal direction by operating the
rotary switch. Roof element 3 can also be raised.
This allows the interior to be better ventilated.
Readiness for operation of the Panorama
roof system
– With ignition switched on.
Roof element 4 is a fixed glass element and
completes the Panorama roof system.
1234-
Draught deflector
Sliding roof element
Sliding/lifting roof element
Fixed glass element
– With ignition key withdrawn until door is first
opened, but only for a maximum of
10 minutes.
Readiness function of Panorama roof
system switches off after 10 minutes
If the vehicle is unlocked, the Panorama roof
system can no longer be operated after
10 minutes (to save the vehicle battery). The
power supply is switched back on when the
ignition is switched on or the engine is started.
98
Windows and Sliding Roofs
Warning!
Risk of injury when operating or automatically closing the Panorama roof system.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the Panorama roof system is operated.
f Always withdraw ignition key when leaving the
vehicle or switch ignition off on vehicles that
have Porsche Entry & Drive. Always take the
ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle.
Uninformed persons (e.g. children) could injure
themselves by operating the Panorama roof
system.
f In case of danger, operate the rotary switch in
the opposite direction or release the vehicle
key immediately.
ABCDE-
Close the Panorama roof system completely
Open sliding roof element
Completely open Panorama roof system
Lift sliding/lifting roof element
Open sliding/lifting roof element
Note on operation
Using the automated presetting system, every
usable roof position can be controlled directly with
the rotary switch.
f Always keep the Panorama roof system and
the side windows closed while driving off-road.
A - Close Panorama roof system
completely
f Turn rotary switch to position A.
C - Completely open Panorama roof
system
f Turn rotary switch beyond stop position B to
switch position C.
Roof elements 2 and 3 are opened
completely.
The roller blind opens automatically to the
selected opening width.
D - Lift sliding/lifting roof element
f Turn rotary switch to position D.
Roof element 3 is lifted completely. The roller
blind does not change its position here.
E - Completely open sliding/lifting roof
element
f Turn rotary switch to position E.
f Roof element 3 is opened completely. The
roller blind opens automatically to the selected
opening width.
B - Open sliding roof element completely
f Turn rotary switch to position B.
Roof element 2 is opened completely. The
roller blind opens automatically to the selected
opening width.
Windows and Sliding Roofs
99
Comfort function on vehicles without
Porsche Entry & Drive
Force limiter for the Panorama roof
system
Storing final position of the Panorama
roof system
Opening and closing the Panorama roof
system
All roof elements are equipped with a force limiter.
If the sliding roof element or the sliding roof/lifting
roof element is obstructed during the closing or
opening process, the respective roof element
opens or closes again immediately.
The final positions of the Panorama roof system
are lost after disconnecting/reconnecting the
vehicle battery or if the battery is exhausted as
well as after jump lead starting.
f Hold the car key in the door lock in the
unlocking or locking position until the windows
and the Panorama roof system have reached
the desired position.
Comfort function on vehicles with
Porsche Entry & Drive
Opening and closing the Panorama roof
system
f Hold the car key in the door lock in the
unlocking or locking position until the windows
and the Panorama roof system have reached
the desired position.
Closing the Panorama roof system
f Hold the button in the door handle when
locking the vehicle until the windows and the
Panorama roof system have reached the
desired position.
Closing a roof element after activation of the
force limiter
1. Remove the obstruction.
2. Turn rotary switch to position A again.
Electric emergency closing function
Warning!
Risk of injury from the emergency closing
function for the Panorama roof system. The
force limiter is not available and the roof
elements will close with full force.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the Panorama roof system is closed.
If the roof cannot be closed due to dirt, ice or a
similar reason:
1. Turn rotary switch to position A.
2. Hold the rotary switch in position A until all roof
elements are completely closed.
100
Windows and Sliding Roofs
Warning!
Risk of injury when closing the Panorama
roof system. The force limiter is not available
and the roof elements will close with full
force.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the Panorama roof system is closed.
1. Switch ignition off.
2. Turn rotary switch to position A.
3. Switch ignition on.
4. Press rotary switch up at its front edge in
position A and keep pressed.
The teaching process begins after around
5 seconds. Keep the rotary switch pressed in
position until the roller blind and all roof
elements have completely stopped moving.
The process lasts a maximum of 20 seconds.
5. Release the rotary switch.
The raised sliding/lifting roof element 3 closes
automatically. The teaching process is then
completed.
Opening/closing roller blind
Note on operation
If the procedure is interrupted, saving the final
positions must be started from the beginning
again.
The rocker switch has a two-stage function:
– If the rocker switch is pressed to the first
stage, the roller blind is opened or closed as
long as the rocker switch is being pressed.
– If the rocker switch is pressed completely, the
roller blind opens or closes to the final
position.
Opening the roller blind
f Press rocker switch to the rear F.
Closing the roller blind
f Press rocker switch to the front G.
Roller blind
A roller blind is integrated into the Panorama roof
system and can be adjusted by operating the
rocker switch in the roof console.
Note
If the rocker switch is pressed completely while
the roof elements are moving, the roller blind
opens or closes to the final position after the roof
elements have reached the selected position.
Windows and Sliding Roofs
101
Roller blind cleaning position
1. Close Panorama roof system and roller blind
completely.
2. Turn rotary switch to position C.
The Panorama roof system opens completely.
3. When the Panorama roof system has reached
the final position, keep the rocker switch G
pressed at the front for longer than 3 seconds
until the roller blind is completely closed.
4. Remove dirt (e.g. leaves).
5. Keep the rocker switch F pressed at the rear
until the roller blind is completely closed.
6. Close sliding roof element.
Caution!
Risk of damage if the Panorama roof system
and roller blind are in the roller blind
cleaning position while driving.
f Close the Panorama roof system completely
once before driving off.
102
Windows and Sliding Roofs
Emergency operation of the
Panorama roof system
Perform emergency operation only under exceptional circumstances if the electric emergency
closing function cannot be performed and the end
position cannot be stored.
f Before performing emergency operation,
please check whether the fuse is defective.
After the fuse has been changed, the end
positions of the Panorama roof system must
be stored again.
Warning!
Danger of injury and risk of damage when
closing the roof.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the roof elements are operated.
f Do not operate the Panorama roof system with
the rotary switch during and after emergency
operation.
1. Fold up armrest.
2. Remove key B from the lower oddments tray
(underneath the rubber mat) in the centre
console.
5. Hold the key in this position and turn.
To close the roof – turn clockwise
To open the roof – turn counter-clockwise
Note on operation
When performing emergency closing for the
sliding/lifting roof element, make sure that the
roof element is completely closed (centre position
between sliding and lifting roof position).
6. Remove the key and return it to the oddments
tray.
7. Clip in cover.
To rule out malfunctions in the system, the end
positions of the Panorama roof system must be
saved again after emergency operation.
3. Unclip cover.
4. Insert the key in opening H or I until it can be
felt and heard to engage.
This requires a somewhat greater force.
H – Emergency operation for the sliding roof
element and the draught deflector
I – Emergency operation for the sliding/lifting
roof element
f Have the fault remedied. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop. We recommend that you
use a Porsche partner for this work since
these are staffed with trained personnel and
have the necessary parts and tools.
Windows and Sliding Roofs
103
Lights, Direction Indicators and Windscreen Wipers
Light switch................................................ 105
Instrument illumination................................. 107
Manual headlight beam adjustment............... 107
Automatic headlight beam adjustment .......... 107
Direction indicator/high beam/
headlight flasher stalk ................................. 108
Hazard warning lights.................................. 108
Interior lighting ........................................... 109
Comfort lighting.......................................... 111
Coming Home function (off delay)................. 111
Door-surrounding lighting............................. 112
Brief overview – windscreen wipers ........... 113
Windscreen wiper/washer stalk....................114
104
Lights, Direction Indicators and Windscreen Wipers
Note on operation
If the ignition key is withdrawn and the door is
opened while the lights (not the parking light) are
on, an audible signal (gong) warns of possible
battery discharge.
In some countries, differences are possible due to
provisions of law.
Light switch with driving light assistant
Light switch
Light is switched off.
Driving light assistant
Light switch without driving light assistant
Fog lights
Only when side lights or dipped beam are
switched on:
Pull switch to first click.
Indicator light lights up.
Side lights
Number plate light,
instrument illumination
Dipped beam, high beam
Rear fog light
Pull switch to second click.
Indicator light lights up.
Only with ignition on
Lights, Direction Indicators and Windscreen Wipers
105
Automatic driving light assistant
The driving light assistant is a comfort function.
Your Porsche's driving light (dipped beam) is
switched on and off automatically dependent on
the ambient brightness.
Despite possible support by the driving light
assistant, it is the responsibility of the driver to
switch on the driving light using the conventional
light switch in accordance with the relevant
national regulations.
Activating the headlights using the driving light
assistant therefore does not absolve the driver of
responsibility for correct operation of the driving
light.
The dipped beam is switched on automatically in
the following situations:
– Dusk
– Darkness
Warning!
Risk of accident due to driving without lights.
f Always carefully monitor the automatic driving
light control.
Off delay and door-surrounding lighting
Off delay and door-surrounding lighting are active
when the automatic driving light assistant is
switched on.
For information on the off delay:
f Please observe the chapter “COMING HOME
FUNCTION (OFF DELAY)” on Page 111.
For information on door-surrounding lighting:
f Please observe the chapter “DOORSURROUNDING LIGHTING” on Page 112.
Motorway function
– Motorway driving
The light is switched on at speeds of over
140 km/h (90 mph). If you are travelling slower
than 65 km/h (40 mph), the driving light is
switched off after a delay of approx. 2 minutes if
the external lighting conditions permit.
Note on operation
Rain function
Fog is not recognised.
The driving light is switched on automatically after
five seconds of continuous wiper operation.
– Driving through tunnels
– Rain (in conjunction with rain sensor)
f In the event of fog, the driving light must be
switched on manually.
106
The driving light is switched off approx. 4 minutes
after the wipers have stopped.
Lights, Direction Indicators and Windscreen Wipers
Manual headlight beam
adjustment
The headlights can be steplessly adjusted to the
vehicle loading condition using the manual
headlight beam adjustment control B. Adjusting
the headlights ensures that on-coming traffic is
not dazzled.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the
dipped beam is switched on.
f Rotate thumb wheel downwards to lower the
light beam.
Rotate thumb wheel upwards to raise the light
beam.
Settings
A - Instrument illumination
B - Manual headlight beam adjustment
Instrument illumination
When the light is switched on, the brightness of
the instrument illumination can be adjusted by
turning thumb wheel A.
The positions correspond to the following vehicle
loading conditions:
0
Vehicle occupied at the front,
luggage compartment empty
1
Vehicle fully occupied,
luggage compartment empty
2
Vehicle fully occupied,
luggage compartment loaded
3
Driver’s seat occupied,
luggage compartment loaded
Automatic headlight beam
adjustment
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights feature
automatic headlight beam adjustment.
When the ignition and dipped beam are switched
on, the level of the headlight beam automatically
changes in accordance with the vehicle load. The
level of the headlight beam is automatically kept
constant during acceleration and braking.
Checking operation
1. Switch the dipped beam on.
2. Switch ignition on.
The light beam first dips all the way down and
is then adapted to the vehicle load.
If this test point not satisfied, the headlight beam
adjustment system must be checked.
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Lights, Direction Indicators and Windscreen Wipers
107
Note on operation
When the high beam is switched on or the
headlight flasher is operated, the blue indicator
light on the speedometer is lit.
Parking light
The parking light can be switched on only when
the ignition is switched off.
f Move the stalk up or down to switch on the
right or left parking light.
Direction indicator/high beam/
headlight flasher stalk
Direction indicators, dipped beam and high beam
are ready for operation when the ignition is on.
1 – Direction indicator light, left
2 – Direction indicator light, right
Push the stalk to the upper or lower pressure
point – direction indicators flash three times
3 – High beam
4 – Headlight flasher
Stalk in centre position – dipped beam
(when the light is switched on)
108
Lights, Direction Indicators and Windscreen Wipers
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning light is ready for use regardless of the ignition lock position.
Switching on and off
f Press button A.
All direction indicator lights and the indicator light
in the button flash when the button is operated.
Interior light, front
Switching on
f Move switch B to left.
Switching on/off automatically
f Move switch B to right.The lights are
switched on when a door is unlocked or
opened or when the ignition key is withdrawn
from the ignition lock.
The lights are switched off with a delay of
approx. 30 seconds after the door is closed.
The light goes out immediately as soon as the
ignition key is inserted in the ignition lock or
the vehicle is locked.
Switching off
A, C - Switches for reading lights
B - Switch for interior light
f Move switch B to centre position.
Interior lighting
Reading lights, front
Switching on
f Press button A or C.
Switching off
f Press button A or C.
Lights, Direction Indicators and Windscreen Wipers
109
Switching on/off automatically
f Move toggle switch to centre position.The
lights are
switched on when a door is unlocked or
opened or when the ignition key is withdrawn
from the ignition lock.
The lights are switched off with a delay of
approx. 30 seconds after the door is closed.
The light goes out immediately as soon as the
ignition is switched on or the vehicle is locked.
Switching off
f Press toggle switch on right.
Reading light, rear right
Rear reading lights
Switching on
f Press toggle switch on left.
110
Lights, Direction Indicators and Windscreen Wipers
Coming Home function (off delay)
Dimming the comfort lighting
(brightness adjustment)
Once the last door is closed, the footwell and door
panel lights are dimmed to the set value.
The comfort lighting is dimmed using button A in
the front roof console.
f Hold down button A until the desired level of
brightness is reached.
The following lights remain switched on for a
certain period to allow you to get out of the vehicle
safely and with improved visibility at dusk or in
darkness:
– Dipped beam,
– Lights in the door mirrors,
– Side marker lights,
– Number plate lights.
Note on operation
f Set light switch to auto.
A - Button for dimming the comfort lighting
Comfort lighting
The footwell and door panel lighting improves your
orientation inside the vehicle when it is dark.
These lights are switched on when the vehicle is
unlocked and switched off again automatically
when the vehicle is locked.
For information on the light switch:
Please observe the chapter “LIGHT SWITCH” on
Page 105.
The lights are switched off when the vehicle is
locked or, at the latest, after the off delay set on
the multi-purpose display has elapsed.
For information on setting the off delay on the
multi-purpose display:
f Please observe the chapter “SETTING
LIGHTING OFF DELAY” on Page 146.
Lights, Direction Indicators and Windscreen Wipers
111
Door-surrounding lighting
The door surrounding lighting enables passengers
to enter the vehicle safely. Obstacles on the
ground (e.g. puddles) can be identified more
easily.
The near field of the vehicle is illuminated with the
following lights when the vehicle is unlocked by
remote control or Porsche Entry & Drive:
– Lights in the door mirrors,
– Side marker lights,
– Number plate lights.
Note on operation
f Set light switch to auto.
For information on the light switch:
Please observe the chapter “LIGHT SWITCH” on
Page 105.
The door-surrounding lighting switches itself off
after expiry of the off delay set on the multipurpose display or when the ignition is switched
on.
For information on setting the off delay on the
multi-purpose display:
Please observe the chapter “SETTING LIGHTING
OFF DELAY” on Page 146.
112
Lights, Direction Indicators and Windscreen Wipers
Brief overview – windscreen wipers
This brief overview does not replace the information provided in the chapter “Windscreen wiper/
washer stalk”.
In particular, warnings are not replaced by this
brief overview.
Windscreen wiper stalk
Rain sensor stalk
What do I want to do?
What do I have to do?
Automatic wiping at front
(rain sensor)
Press the stalk to detent position 1.
Rain sensor adjustment
Adjust rotary switch A in the stalk upwards (wipe more often) or downwards (wipe less often).
Wiping at front
Slow: Move the stalk to detent position 2.
Fast: Move the stalk to detent position 3.
Once: Briefly press stalk to position 4.
Spraying and wiping at front
Pull stalk to position 5 and hold.
Wiping at rear
Normal: Press stalk to position 6.
Once: Briefly move stalk to position 7.
Spraying and wiping at rear
Keep stalk pressed in position 7.
Lights, Direction Indicators and Windscreen Wipers
113
Windscreen wiper/washer stalk
Caution!
Danger of injury when the windscreen wipers
operate unintentionally.
Risk of damage to the engine compartment
lid, windscreen and wiper system.
f Only wipe the windscreen when sufficiently
wet, otherwise it could be scratched.
f Always switch off windscreen wipers before
opening the engine compartment lid
(position 0). If the wiper arms are not in their
final position, they will automatically move to
this position when the engine compartment lid
is opened, even if the ignition is switched off.
The wiper arms remain in this position until the
lid is closed and the wiper system is switched
off and then on again.
f Loosen frozen wiper blades before driving off.
f Do not operate headlight washer when it is
frozen.
f Always switch off windscreen wipers in car
washes to prevent them wiping unintentionally
(rain sensor operation).
f Do not operate headlight washer in car
washes.
f Always switch off windscreen wipers before
cleaning the windscreen to avoid unintentional
operation (rain sensor operation).
f Always hold the wiper arm securely when
replacing the wiper blade.
114
Lights, Direction Indicators and Windscreen Wipers
0 – Windscreen wipers off
1 – Rain sensor operation, front windscreen
wipers
f Move wiper stalk upwards to the first click.
Notes on operation
The amount of precipitation on the windscreen is
measured. The wiper speed is automatically
adjusted accordingly.
2 – Front windscreen wiper – slow
f Move wiper stalk upwards to the second click.
3 – Front windscreen wiper – fast
f Move wiper stalk upwards to the third click.
Rain sensor operation is automatically activated at
speeds of less than approx. 4 km/h (2.5 mph) if
the windscreen wiper is switched on. If you exceed
a speed of approx. 8 km/h (5 mph), the system
switches to the preselected wiper speed.
4 – Front windscreen wipers – one-touch
operation
f Press the wiper stalk downwards. The front
windscreen wipers carry out one wiping cycle.
The rain sensor remains switched off if the wiper
stalk is already in position 1 when the ignition is
switched on.
To switch the rain sensor on again:
f Move wiper stalk to position 0 and then to
position 1 – switching on is confirmed by one
wipe of the windscreen – or
f Operate windscreen washer system 5 –
switching on is confirmed by three wipes of the
windscreen – or
Changing the sensitivity of the rain sensor
Sensitivity can be set with switch A in 4 stages:
f Move rotary switch A upwards –
high sensitivity.
The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the
windscreen.
f Move rotary switch A downwards –
low sensitivity.
f Change the sensitivity of the rain sensor with
four-stage switch A.
Lights, Direction Indicators and Windscreen Wipers
115
5 – Front windscreen wiper and washer
system
f Pull wiper stalk towards the steering wheel.
The washer system sprays and wipes while the
stalk is pulled towards the steering wheel.
When the wiper stalk is released, a few
additional wipes are performed.
Headlight washer (on vehicles with BiXenon headlights):
The washer sprays only when dipped beam or
high beam is switched on.
To activate the headlight washer system, the
wiper stalk must be pulled for longer.
However, the headlight washer can be
activated again at the earliest after five
windscreen washing cycles.
The spray duration is limited.
Maintenance notes
6 – Rear window wiper – intermittent
operation
f Move wiper lever forward to the first click.
The rear window wiper wipes at preset intervals.
7 – One-touch operation of rear window
wiper
f Briefly press wiper stalk forward. The washer
system sprays and the rear window wiper
performs three wiping cycles.
Rear window wiper and washer system
f Press wiper stalk forwards as far as it will go.
The washer system sprays and wipes as long
as the stalk is pressed away from the steering
wheel. When the wiper stalk is released, a few
drying wipes are performed.
f If heavily soiled, repeat wash.
f Persistent dirt (e.g. insect remains) should be
removed regularly.
f For further information on vehicle care: Please
observe the chapter “CAR CARE INSTRUCTIONS” on Page 279.
The front windscreen washer nozzles are
heated when the ignition is on as a precaution
against freezing. However, this does not replace
the use of antifreeze.
116
Lights, Direction Indicators and Windscreen Wipers
Maintenance note
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this may be as
a result of the following:
– If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
wash, wax residues may adhere to the
windscreen. These wax residues can be
removed only using a special cleaning solution.
Please contact your Porsche partner for
further information.
– The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
f Replace wiper blades as soon as possible.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
Instrument panel .........................................118
Oil temperature gauge.................................120
Tachometer................................................120
Clock .........................................................120
Cooling system...........................................121
Fuel gauge .................................................122
Intelligent Maintenance Computer
for the Cayenne (V6)....................................122
Odometer...................................................123
Speedometer..............................................123
Voltmeter ...................................................124
Emission control .........................................125
Operating the multi-purpose display
on the instrument panel ...............................126
Displaying/resetting average speed .............128
Displaying range on remaining fuel ...............128
Displaying tyre pressure ..............................128
Displaying compass ................................... 128
Displaying navigation information..................128
Opening the main menu ...............................128
Operating the telephone via
the multi-purpose display .............................129
Setting speed limit
on the multi-purpose display.........................131
Displaying warning messages ......................132
Displaying status of level control ..................133
Displaying status of locks/reduction .............133
Displaying average consumption ..................134
Setting Tyre Pressure Monitoring .................134
Switching off passenger compartment
monitoring and inclination sensor
on the multi-purpose display ........................143
Synchronous adjustment of door mirrors ..... 144
Changing settings for opening
and locking the vehicle ............................... 144
Setting lighting off delay ............................. 146
Setting the clock ........................................ 147
Setting compass ........................................ 148
Changing language for displays ................... 149
Changing units for displays ......................... 149
Resetting display to factory settings ............ 149
Overview of warning messages ................... 150
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
117
Instrument panel
Warning and indicator lights on the
tachometer
A Oil temperature gauge
B Tachometer
Trailer direction indicator
Indicator light
C Clock
Emission control warning light
(Check Engine)
Rear fog light indicator light
E Cooling system temperature gauge
Airbag warning light
Tyre pressure warning light
G Fuel gauge
Seat belt warning light
Differential lock indicator light
H Reset button for trip counter display
PSM warning light
Brake warning light
ABS warning light
Cruise control readiness
Indicator lights in central instrument
panel
Direction indicator, left
Indicator light
Direction indicator, right
Indicator light
118
Warning and indicator lights on the
speedometer
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
D Clock setting button
F Multi-purpose display
I
Speedometer
J
Mileage displays
K Voltmeter
Fog light indicator light
General warning
Observe warning message on the multipurpose display
High beam indicator light
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
119
Tachometer
Clock
A warning message will appear on the multipurpose display of the instrument panel if the
engine oil temperature is too high.
The start of the red zone on the tachometer scale
is a visual warning of the maximum permissible
engine speed.
The clock A is adjusted on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel:
f Reduce engine speed and engine load
immediately if the red zone is reached.
If the red zone is reached during acceleration, fuel
feed is interrupted in order to protect the engine.
Oil temperature gauge
120
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
f Press button B.
The menu SETTINGS > CLOCK is automatically
opened on the multi-purpose display.
f For information on setting the clock:
Please observe the chapter “SETTING THE
CLOCK” on Page 147.
Pointer in the middle – normal operating
temperature
Pointer may move up to the red area when engine
is heavily loaded and outside temperature is high.
Coolant temperature warning
A warning message will appear on the multipurpose display of the instrument panel if the
engine coolant temperature is too high.
f Switch engine off and let it cool.
f Check radiators and air passages in front end
of vehicle for obstructions.
f Check coolant level.
Add coolant if necessary.
Cooling system
f If the cooling system is in any way faulty,
consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Temperature gauge
Pointer to the left – engine cold
f Have the fault remedied.
f For further information on coolant, checking
the coolant level and topping up coolant:
Please observe the chapter “CHECKING THE
COOLANT LEVEL AND ADDING COOLANT” on
Page 268.
Note on operation
To prevent excessive temperatures, the cooling
air ducts must not be obstructed by covering with
films or “stone guards” etc.
Coolant level warning
A warning message will appear on the multipurpose display of the instrument panel if the
engine coolant level is too low.
f Switch engine off and let it cool.
f Add coolant.
Have the cause for the fault remedied. Consult
a qualified specialist workshop. We recommend that you use a Porsche partner for this
work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
f For further information on coolant, checking
the coolant level and topping up coolant:
Please observe the chapter “CHECKING THE
COOLANT LEVEL AND ADDING COOLANT” on
Page 268.
Caution!
Risk of engine damage.
f Do not continue driving if the warning persists
even when the engine coolant level is correct.
f Have the fault remedied.
f Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine
loading.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
121
Intelligent Maintenance Computer
for the Cayenne (V6)
The maintenance intervals (service indicator)
shown on the multi-purpose display depend on the
mileage, the time since the last service and the
operating conditions of the vehicle.
Fuel reserve warning
Fuel gauge
When the ignition is on, the fuel level is displayed.
When the ignition is switched on or the engine is
running, the warning light on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel lights up if less
than approx. 12 litres of fuel remains in the tank or
the range on remaining fuel falls below approx.
50 km (30 miles).
f Fill up at the next opportunity.
Caution!
f For information on fuel quality and filling
quantities:
Please observe the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Page 368.
A shortage of fuel may cause damage to the
emission control system.
f For information on fuel and refuelling:
Please observe the chapter “FILLING WITH
FUEL” on Page 277.
f If the warning lights have come on, do not take
bends at high speed.
If the vehicle’s inclination changes (e.g. going
uphill/downhill), minor deviations in the indication
may occur.
122
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
f Never drive the tank dry.
f For further information on the emission control
system: Please observe the chapter
“EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM” on Page 276.
If the vehicle is operated under heavy load, the
interval between two services is shorter than
under normal operating conditions.
f For information on messages on the multipurpose display:
Please observe the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 150.
Odometer
Speedometer
The upper display counts the total mileage, the
lower display individual trips.
The digital speedometer is integrated in the multipurpose display in the instrument panel.
After exceeding 9,999 kilometres or 6,213 miles,
the trip counter returns to 0.
An analogue display is also located on the right
next to the multi-purpose display in the instrument
panel.
Resetting trip counter to “0”
f Press button A for approx. 1 second.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
123
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Battery/generator
A warning message will appear on the multipurpose display of the instrument panel if the
vehicle electrical system voltage drops significantly.
f Stop at a safe place and switch the engine off.
Possible causes
– Defect in the battery charging system
– Torn drive belt
Voltmeter
The voltmeter indicates the vehicle electrical
system voltage.
Normal range: 12 to 16 V.
The voltage may drop considerably when the
vehicle is being started.
If the indicator is constantly below 12 V when
the engine is running:
f Have the battery charging system checked.
124
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
Warning!
Risk of accident and risk of engine damage.
A torn drive belt means there is no power
assistance to the steering (more effort is
required to steer) and engine cooling fails.
f Do not continue driving.
f Have the fault remedied.
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Danger of steering assistance failing during
a long journey in water if the drive belt slips.
f If the steering assistance fails, more effort will
be required to steer.
Emission control
Warning light
The emission control system detects malfunctions
early that could, for example, cause increased
pollutant emissions or consequential damage.
Faults are indicated by the warning light on the
instrument panel which then either lights up continuously or flashes.
The faults are recorded in the control unit’s fault
memory.
The warning light on the instrument panel lights up
when the ignition is switched on as a lamp check
and goes out approx. 4 seconds after the engine
starts.
The warning light on the instrument panel flashes
to indicate operating states (e.g. engine misfiring)
which might cause damage to certain parts of the
emission control system.
f In this case, immediately reduce the engine
load by easing off the accelerator.
The warning light in the instrument panel is lit
continuously after the critical range is left.
In order to avoid consequential damage to the
engine or the exhaust-gas cleaning system (e.g.
catalytic converter):
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Caution!
Risk of damage. If the warning light on the
instrument panel continues flashing even
when you have eased off the accelerator
pedal, the emission control system may
overheat.
f Stop as soon as possible in a safe place.
Make sure that combustible materials, such as
dry grass or leaves, cannot come into contact
with the hot exhaust system.
f Switch off the engine.
f Have the fault remedied.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
125
Operating the multi-purpose
display on the instrument panel
Operating example: Displaying average
consumption
Select items with rocker switch on the wiper stalk
in each case and confirm by pressing the ENTER
button.
On-board computer information can be displayed
on the multi-purpose display. Additional functions
are also available in the main menu which allow
you to change the settings for your vehicle.
1. MAIN MENU
> VEHICLE INFO
Select and confirm
Warning!
There is a danger of accident if you set or
operate the multi-purpose display, radio,
navigation system, telephone or other equipment while driving. Operating these devices
while driving could distract you from traffic
and cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
f Operate these components while driving only if
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting
procedures only with the vehicle stationary.
Note
The multi-purpose display is ready for operation
only when the ignition is on.
Note on operation
By selecting the menu items
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > FACTORY SET, you
can reset all individual settings to the basic works
settings.
126
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
2. Select Ø CONSUM.
3. Confirm selection.
The average consumption is now
displayed.
Returning to starting menu
Operating principle
The multi-purpose display is operated by means of
the rocker switch A and the ENTER button B on
the windscreen wiper stalk.
Selection or setting
Using the rocker switch A, you can move the bar
up and down to select menu items, change
between display screens and make settings.
Confirmation
Press the ENTER button B to confirm the selected
entry. The selected item is then activated.
4. Select BACK.
5. Confirm selection.
VEHICLE INFO menu appears.
6. Select BACK.
7. Confirm selection.
MAIN MENU menu appears.
8. Select BACK.
9. Confirm selection.
Basic display appears.
Menu overview of the multi-purpose display
Basic display
Main menu
Sub-menus
Displays and
settings in
the sub-menus
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
127
Displaying/resetting average
speed
Displaying average speed
1. Switch ignition on.
2. Select Ø MPH.
The average speed is displayed.
The displayed values are based on
the distance travelled since the last
reset to “zero”.
Resetting average speed
3. Select Ø MPH.
The average speed is displayed.
4. Press the ENTER button for longer
than 1 second.
The value is cleared.
Displaying range on remaining fuel
1. Switch ignition on.
2. Select remaining range.
The range on remaining fuel is
displayed.
The range on remaining fuel is continuously
recomputed while driving based on fuel level,
current consumption and average consumption.
128
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
Displaying tyre pressure
Displaying compass
This display is available only in conjunction with the
Tyre Pressure Monitoring option.
This display is available only in conjunction with the
Compass or PCM option.
1. Switch ignition on.
1. Switch ignition on.
2. Select TYRE PRESS.
The tyre pressures are displayed.
2. Select COMPASS.
The compass is displayed.
The current tyre pressures at the actually present
levels are displayed in the “Tyre pressure” screen
of the on-board computer. These values would be
identical to those of a pressure gauge connected
to the four valves. These pressures change while
the vehicle is being driven.
– The tyre pressures increase as the temperature in the tyres rises, e.g. during high-speed
motorway driving.
– The tyre pressures decrease as the temperatures drop, e.g. during journeys in cold regions
(such as mountains).
The values displayed therefore do not allow
conclusions to be drawn about possible pressure
deviations.
f In order to display pressure deviations from
the prescribed pressure, select the menu item
TYRE PRESS. in the MAIN MENU.
Displaying navigation information
Navigation information can also be displayed on
the multi-purpose display.
This display is available only in conjunction with the
Navigation (PCM) option.
1. Switch ignition on.
2. Select NAVIGATION.
The navigation arrows are
displayed.
Opening the main menu
1. Switch ignition on.
2. Select MAIN MENU.
3. Confirm selection.
The main menu is displayed.
The main menu contains the following functions:
f PHONE
MPH-LIMIT
VEHICLE INFO
TYRE PRESS.
SETTINGS
Operating the telephone via the
multi-purpose display
Note
The telephone function of the multi-purpose
display is linked to both the PCM and the multifunctional buttons on the steering wheel as well as
the control stalk.
A SIM card must be inserted in the drawer of
the PCM as a prerequisite for telephone
operation.
If the link to the network is lost, no PIN is entered,
no SIM card is inserted or the telephone is
switched off, a corresponding indication will
appear.
1. Press the ENTER button.
The display reverts to the last menu.
Note
The phone number of an incoming call is shown on
the multi-purpose display. The name of the caller
is shown only if the caller is stored in the telephone
book.
Accepting, refusing, ending a call
Incoming calls are shown on the multi-purpose
display (PHONE INFO must be activated).
1.
Display on display screen
1. Select ACCEPT or
REFUSE.
2. Confirm selection.
After the call is accepted, END
appears in the menu.
Ending a call
3. Select END.
4. Confirm selection.
The call is ended.
Displaying telephone calls on the
multi-purpose display
Automatic indication of an incoming call on the
multi-purpose display can be switched on or off
with the PHONE INFO menu.
– ON – Incoming calls are automatically
indicated on the multi-purpose display.
– OFF – Incoming calls are not indicated on the
multi-purpose display.
5.
1. MAIN MENU
> PHONE
> PHONE INFO
Select and confirm.
2. Select ON or OFF.
3. Confirm selection.
The selected item is then accepted.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
129
Displaying last numbers and last-number
redial
The LAST NUMBERS menu shows the most recent
entries dialled via the respective SIM card.
4.
1. MAIN MENU
> PHONE
> LAST NUMBERS
Select and confirm.
2. Select entry from the list.
3. Confirm selection.
The connection with the selected
party is established.
Displaying important numbers and calling
The IMPORTANT NOS. menu shows the entries
stored as important numbers on the SIM card.
4.
1. MAIN MENU
> PHONE
> IMPORTANT NOS.
Select and confirm.
2. Select entry from the list.
3. Confirm selection.
The connection with the selected
party is established.
Note on operation:
If the rocker switch is pressed for longer than one
second, the initial letters for which entries exist
are shown.
This allows the desired entry to be found more
quickly.
130
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
Displaying telephone book, selecting
party and calling
The PHONE BOOK menu shows the entries of the
telephone book that are stored on the SIM card.
4.
1. MAIN MENU
> PHONE
> PHONE BOOK
Select and confirm.
2. Select entry from the list.
3. Confirm selection.
The connection with the selected
party is established.
Note on operation:
If the rocker switch is pressed for longer than one
second, the initial letters for which entries exist
are shown.
This allows the desired entry to be found more
quickly.
Displaying missed calls, calling back
party
The telephone numbers of the rejected calls are
shown in the MISSED CALLS menu. The numbers
are stored on the SIM card.
4.
1. MAIN MENU
> PHONE
> MISSED CALLS
Select and confirm.
2. Select entry from the list.
3. Confirm selection.
The connection with the selected
party is established.
Note on operation:
If the rocker switch is pressed for longer than one
second, the initial letters for which entries exist
are shown.
This allows the desired entry to be found more
quickly.
Setting speed limit on the multipurpose display
A speed limit can be entered to monitor the driving
speed. When it is exceeded, a signal sounds and
the multi-purpose display displays the message
LIMIT EXCEEDED.
Presetting speed
You can define a speed limit in the menu MPHLIMIT.
4.
1. MAIN MENU
> MPH-LIMIT
Select and confirm
Accepting current speed
2. Select MPH SET.
You can define the current speed as the speed
limit in the menu MPH-LIMIT.
3. Set desired limit:
– Press briefly: Limit is set in
increments of 1mph.
– Press for longer than 2 seconds:
Limit is set in increments of 10 mph.
4.
1. MAIN MENU
> MPH-LIMIT
Select and confirm
2. Select CURRENT MPH.
3. Confirm selection.
LIMIT ACTIVE is activated automatically and the selected speed limit is
shown.
4. Confirm selection.
LIMIT ACTIVE is activated automatically.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
131
6.
1. MAIN MENU
> VEHICLE INFO
Select and confirm.
2. Select WARNINGS.
Activating or deactivating the limit
5.
1. MAIN MENU
> MPH-LIMIT
Select and confirm.
2. Select LIMIT ACTIVE.
3. Confirm selection.
LIMIT ACTIVE is activated
LIMIT ACTIVE is deactivated
4. Select BACK.
5. Confirm selection.
Sub-menu MPH-LIMIT is displayed.
132
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
Example: Check side lights warning message
Displaying warning messages
All current warnings and information relating to the
traffic safety of the vehicle can be displayed in the
menu WARNINGS.
Caution!
Warning messages indicate possible faults.
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
3. Confirm selection.
NO WARNING is displayed if the
vehicle is in perfect condition. Any
warning messages which are
present are displayed.
4. Press repeatedly to display the
warnings one after the other.
5. Confirm selection.
VEHICLE INFO menu is displayed.
Note on operation
The level control is adjusted by means of the
rocker switch behind the gearshift lever in the
centre console.
For information on level control and
height adjustment:
Please observe the chapter “AIR SUSPENSION
WITH LEVEL CONTROL AND HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT” on Page 200.
Displaying status of level control
The ground clearance of vehicles equipped with
level control is shown in the LEVEL menu.
6.
1. MAIN MENU
> VEHICLE INFO
Select and confirm.
2. Select LEVEL.
3. Confirm selection.
The current level settings are
displayed.
4. Confirm selection.
VEHICLE INFO menu is displayed.
Displaying status of locks/
reduction
The selected driving programmes for Low Range/
High Range as well as the engaged locks can be
displayed.
5.
1. MAIN MENU
> VEHICLE INFO
Select and confirm.
2. Select LOCKS/REDUCT.
Note on operation
The driving programmes are set by means of the
rocker switch behind the gearshift lever in the
centre console.
f For information on the programmes for Off
Road and On Road driving and engaging locks/
reduction:
Please observe the chapter “DRIVING
PROGRAMMES FOR ON-ROAD AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING” on Page 181.
3. Confirm selection.
The current settings for
– Longitudinal lock on/off
– Reduction on/off
– Transverse axle differential lock
on/off
are displayed.
4. Confirm selection.
VEHICLE INFO menu is displayed.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
133
f Defective tyres must be immediately replaced
by a specialist workshop.
Tyre repairs are not permissible under
any circumstances.
f Do not drive with tyres whose tyre pressure
drops again in a short period of time. Have
tyres checked by a specialist workshop.
Displaying average consumption
5.
1. MAIN MENU
> VEHICLE INFO
Select and confirm.
2. Select Ø CONSUM.
3. Confirm selection.
The average consumption is
displayed.
The displayed value is based on the
distance travelled since the last
reset to “zero”.
Resetting average consumption
4. Select RESET.
5. Press the ENTER button for longer
than 1 second.
The value is set to “- -.-”.
134
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
Setting Tyre Pressure Monitoring
Safety notes!
Despite the advantages offered by Tyre
Pressure Monitoring, it is still the driver’s
responsibility to update the settings in the
multi-purpose
display and maintain the pressures in the
tyres. Low tyre pressure reduces the road
safety of the vehicle and destroys the tyre
and wheel.
f When a flat tyre has been displayed, stop in a
suitable place and check the tyres for damage.
If necessary, remedy the damage with tyre
sealant or fit the spare wheel.
f Do not by any means continue to drive with
leaking tyres.
f Sealing the tyre with the tyre sealant is only an
emergency repair so you can drive to the next
workshop.
The maximum permitted speed is 80 km/h
(50 mph).
f If Tyre Pressure Monitoring is defective
(e.g. defective wheel transmitters), contact a
specialist workshop immediately and have the
damage repaired.
The tyre pressure will not be monitored by
defective Tyre Pressure Monitoring.
For information on warning messages on the
multi-purpose display: Please observe the
chapter “OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES”
on Page 150.
f Tyre Pressure Monitoring gives a warning
about tyre damage due to insufficient tyre
pressure as well as about a gradual loss of
pressure due to foreign objects. Tyre Pressure
Monitoring cannot warn you about tyre
damage that occurs suddenly (e.g. flat tyre
due to acute external effects).
f If a tyre pressure message is displayed,
correct the tyre pressure at the next opportunity.
f Incomplete entries or selection of the wrong
tyres on the multi-purpose display affect
correct indication of warnings and messages.
The settings in the TYRE PRESSURE menu
must be updated after wheel changes, use of
a spare wheel or changes in vehicle loading.
f Use only the pressure differences shown in the
TYRE PRESSURE menu or from tyre pressure
messages or warnings when correcting the
tyre pressure.
f Tyres lose air over time without a tyre defect
being present. A tyre pressure warning will
then appear on the multi-purpose display.
Correct tyre pressure.
Functional description of Tyre Pressure
Monitoring
Tyre Pressure Monitoring continuously monitors
tyre pressure and tyre temperature on all four
wheels and warns the driver when the tyre
pressure is too low.
Note on operation
Settings can be made only when the vehicle is
stationary.
For information on tyres and wheels:
Please observe the chapter “TYRES AND
WHEELS” on Page 288.
The display as well as the settings for Tyre
Pressure Monitoring take place on the multipurpose display in the sub-menu TYRE
PRESSURE.
However, the tyre pressure must still be set
manually on the wheel.
The deviations in the tyre pressures from the
required pressures are shown in the sub-menu
TYRE PRESSURE.
Example:
If the tyre pressure display shows “–0.3 bar
(4 psi)”, you must increase the tyre pressure by
0.3 bar (4 psi).
The tyre pressures to be monitored are fixed in the
Tyre Pressure Monitoring system and cannot be
changed.
The following settings must be made to permit
correct monitoring.
– Tyres
Select the type and size of the tyres fitted on
the vehicle.
– Load
Select the type of loading.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
135
After driving off, the system starts to teach the
wheels and wheel positions on the vehicle. The
tyre pressure warning light on the speedometer
lights up during this time, and no current tyre
pressure information is available on the displays.
Note
Setting the tyre type and size
The settings of the multi-purpose display must be
updated after changing wheels or tyres on the
vehicle.
The tyre type and tyre size must be selected even
if the settings for the new set of wheels are the
same as for the old wheels.
6.
1. MAIN MENU
> TYRE PRESS.
> SETTINGS
Select and confirm.
2. Select TYRES.
3. Confirm selection.
The TYRE TYPE list is displayed.
4. Select tyre type (e.g. SUMMER).
The list with the possible tyre
sizes (e.g. for the selection
SUMMER) is displayed.
5. Select tyre size (e.g. 18 inch).
6. Confirm selection.
The current settings are displayed.
136
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
Information on the tyre size and type can be found
on the tyre sidewall. For further information on the
details on the tyre sidewall:
Please observe the chapter “INSCRIPTION ON
RADIAL TYRE” on Page 293.
Note on operation
Before fitting tyres approved by Porsche with a
size which is not already stored in the multipurpose display, the missing information should
be supplemented in the multi-purpose display.
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Warning!
7.
1. MAIN MENU
> TYRE PRESS.
> SETTINGS
Select and confirm.
Risk of accident due to excessive speed.
f Always observe the permissible maximum
speed of the respective tyre.
f A sticker showing the maximum permissible
speed must be placed in the driver’s field of
vision if the maximum permissible speed of the
tyres is lower than the maximum permissible
speed of the vehicle.
Observe the country-specific laws.
The speed code letter indicates the maximum
permissible speed for the tyre.
f For further information on the details on the
tyre sidewall and the speed code letter:
Please observe the chapter “INSCRIPTION ON
RADIAL TYRE” on Page 293.
2. Select LOAD.
3. Confirm selection.
The LOAD menu is displayed.
Setting vehicle loading and adjusting tyre
pressure
The tyre pressure must be adjusted according to
the vehicle load.
A distinction is made between two types of
loading:
– Partial load
up to 3 people and 21 kg of luggage
Select corresponding load type
(e.g. FULL LOAD).
4. Confirm selection.
The set load status is shown.
Deviations from the required pressure are shown
in the sub-menu MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE
> SETTINGS (filling information).
f Correct the tyre pressure according to this
information.
– Full load
more than 3 people and 22 kg of luggage
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
137
– Changing wheel with spare wheel or
collapsible spare wheel
For information on jacking up the vehicle:
Please observe the chapter “RAISING VEHICLE
WITH THE JACK” on Page 301.
For information on changing a wheel:
Please observe the chapter “CHANGING A
WHEEL” on Page 304.
“Flat tyre” warning
The display shows: SELECTION AFTER WARNING
The warning threshold for output of this warning
message is speed-dependent.
At a speed of below 160 km/h (100 mph), this
warning indicates a pressure loss of at least
0.5 bar (7 psi); at a speed of above 160 km/h
(100 mph), the warning indicates a pressure loss
of at least 0.4 bar (6 psi).
The message indicates the wheel in which the
pressure loss has been detected.
The deviation from the required pressure is
displayed for the corresponding wheel.
The tyre pressure warning light on the speedometer lights up in addition to the warning message.
1. Stop the vehicle in a suitable place.
f The warning message can be acknowledged
while driving.
To do this, press the ENTER button on the
wiper stalk. The tyre pressure warning light on
the speedometer remains lit.
The measure display SELECTION AFTER
WARNING appears only after the ignition is
switched back on again.
138
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
2. Check the indicated wheel for damage.
3. Fill the tyre or change the wheel, as appropriate.
– Adding air
(Example: If the tyre pressure display shows
“–0.4 bar (6 psi)”, you must increase the tyre
pressure by 0.4 bar (6 psi)).
On vehicles without air suspension:
Please observe the chapter “INFLATING TYRES
ON VEHICLES WITHOUT LEVEL CONTROL” on
Page 309.
On vehicles with air suspension:
Please observe the chapter “INFLATING TYRES
ON VEHICLES WITH LEVEL CONTROL” on
Page 311.
or
or
– Sealing with tyre sealant.
For information on handling and filling the
sealant: Please observe the chapter “TYRE
SEALANT” on Page 299.
4. Switch ignition on again.
The “Flat tyre” warning first appears again on
the multi-purpose display. The display changes
to SELECTION AFTER WARNING after a few
seconds.
5. Select the action which has been carried out
on the vehicle on the display with the rocker
switch.
– ADD AIR or
– WHEEL CHANGE > SPARE WHEEL > Spare
wheel type or
– SEALING SET
6. Press the ENTER button.
Notes
The spare wheel and collapsible spare wheel are
not equipped with wheel transmitters and are not
monitored by Tyre Pressure Monitoring.
The spare wheel and collapsible spare wheel are
not equipped with wheel transmitters and are not
monitored by Tyre Pressure Monitoring.
Wheel change (without warning)
If a collapsible spare wheel or tyre sealant is used,
a warning reminder appears on the multi-purpose
display if the speed limit of 80 km/h (50 mph) is
exceeded.
Note on operation
If you do not confirm a selection or confirm a
selection without carrying out the task described
for this selection, this will affect correct indication
of warnings and messages.
Depending on the selection made, a corresponding message will appear when the ignition is
switched on, when driving off or while driving.
For further information on warning messages on
the multi-purpose display:
Please observe the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 150.
“Tyre pressure too low” message
This message indicates pressure loss of at least
0.3 bar (4 psi).
The message indicates the wheel in which the
pressure loss has been detected. The deviation
from the required pressure is displayed for the
corresponding wheel.
The message appears only when the vehicle is
stationary. It appears for the first time when the
ignition is switched off and then each time the
ignition is switched on until the tyre pressure has
been corrected to the required value.
The settings of the multi-purpose display must be
updated after changing wheels or tyres on the
vehicle.
Please observe the chapter “SETTING THE TYRE
TYPE AND SIZE” on Page 136.
Setting spare wheel/sealant
(without warning)
If you have fitted a spare wheel or collapsible
spare wheel or used tyre sealant without being
requested to do so by a “Flat tyre” warning on the
multi-purpose display, you must subsequently
update the settings in the TYRE PRESSURE submenu.
The message is shown for 10 seconds on the
multi-purpose display. It can be suppressed
immediately by pressing the ENTER button.
f Check the tyre pressure at the next opportunity and fill the tyres.
Example: If the tyre pressure display shows
“–0.3 bar (4 psi)”, you must increase the tyre
pressure by 0.3 bar (4 psi).
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
139
Setting spare wheel.
Setting collapsible spare wheel.
1. MAIN MENU
> TYRE PRESS.
> SETTINGS
> TYRES
> SPARE WHEEL
Select and confirm.
1. MAIN MENU
> TYRE PRESS.
> SETTINGS
> TYRES
> SPARE WHEEL
Select and confirm.
2. Select SPARE WHEEL.
2. Select COLLAP. WHEEL.
3. Confirm selection.
The display automatically returns to
the TYRE PRESSURE sub-menu
(filling information).
The required tyre pressures
are displayed here.
Select BACK.
4. Confirm selection.
The basic display appears.
The spare wheel is not equipped with a wheel
transmitter and is not monitored by Tyre Pressure
Monitoring. The tyre pressure warning light lights
up on the speedometer when the ENTER button is
pressed. The value “_._” is displayed in the submenu TYRE PRESSURE (filling information) at the
position of the spare wheel.
The reminder SPARE WHEEL/SEALING SET
OPERATION? appears each time the ignition is
switched on. For information on spare wheel/
sealing set operation: Please observe the chapter
“NOTE ON SPARE WHEEL/SEALING SET OPERATION” on Page 141.
Note
f The spare wheel must be used only over short
distances.
For information on handling and fitting/
removing the spare wheel: Please observe the
chapter “SPARE WHEEL” on Page 313.
140
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
3. Confirm selection.
The required pressure and speed
limit for the collapsible spare wheel
are displayed.
The collapsible spare wheel is not equipped with a
wheel transmitter and is not monitored by Tyre
Pressure Monitoring. The tyre pressure warning
light lights up on the speedometer when the
ENTER button is pressed. The value “_._” is
displayed in the sub-menu TYRE PRESSURE (filling
information) at the position of the collapsible
spare wheel.
A warning appears on the multi-purpose display if
the speed limit of 80 km/h (50 mph) is exceeded.
The reminder SPARE WHEEL/SEALING SET
OPERATION? appears each time the ignition is
switched on.
For information on spare wheel/sealing set operation: Please observe the chapter “NOTE ON
SPARE WHEEL/SEALING SET OPERATION” on
Page 141.
Note
Note
The collapsible spare wheel must be used only
over short distances.
For information on handling the collapsible spare
wheel: Please observe the chapter “COLLAPSIBLE
SPARE WHEEL” on Page 307.
Use tyres repaired with sealant only over short
distances.
For information on handling and filling the sealant:
Please observe the chapter “TYRE SEALANT” on
Page 299.
Setting tyre sealant/sealing set
Note on spare wheel/sealing set operation
1. MAIN MENU
> TYRE PRESS.
> SETTINGS
> TYRES
> SPARE WHEEL
Select and confirm.
2. Select SEALING SET.
3. Confirm selection.
The display automatically returns to
the TYRE PRESSURE sub-menu
(filling information).
f Inflate tyres according to the displayed
pressure differences.
A warning appears on the multi-purpose display if
the speed limit of 80 km/h (50 mph) is exceeded.
The reminder SPARE WHEEL/SEALING SET
OPERATION? appears each time the ignition is
switched on.
For information on spare wheel/sealing set operation: Please observe the chapter “NOTE ON
SPARE WHEEL/SEALING SET OPERATION” on
Page 141.
Each time the ignition is switched on,
the reminder SPARE WHEEL/SEALING SET
OPERATION? appears for approx. 10 seconds if a
spare wheel type (spare wheel, collapsible spare
wheel or sealing set) has been set.
f Set the fitted wheel set with tyre type and tyre
size.
Please observe the chapter “SETTING THE
TYRE TYPE AND SIZE” on Page 136.
1. Select YES or NO:
– YES if a spare wheel, collapsible
spare wheel or tyre sealant is still
being used.
– NO if the spare wheel, collapsible
spare wheel or tyre sealant has
been removed.
The reminder SPARE WHEEL/SEALING SET
OPERATION? goes out automatically after approx.
10 seconds if no selection is made during this
time. The original selection “YES” is then
maintained.
Note on operation
2. Confirm selection.
The selected item is then accepted.
The current settings are displayed if
NO is selected.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
141
Faults in Tyre Pressure Monitoring
In the event of faults, Tyre Pressure Monitoring
cannot monitor the tyre pressure. A distinction is
made between partial monitoring and inactive
system.
In the case of partial monitoring, the warning light
lights up on the instrument panel. No message is
output on the multi-purpose display.
If Tyre Pressure Monitoring is not active, the
warning light lights up on the instrument panel and
a corresponding message is output on the multifunction display.
The warning light goes out as soon as all faults
have been remedied.
Tyre Pressure Monitoring switches to partial
monitoring if:
– there are up to two wheel transmitters not
present or faulty (e.g. a spare wheel or collapsible spare wheel is fitted that does not have a
wheel transmitter).
In the event of partial monitoring, the value “_._” is
displayed in the sub-menu TYRE PRESSURE (filling
information) at the position of the faulty or missing
wheel transmitter.
– temporarily after changing a wheel,
– in the front left door aperture for each wheel,
– too many wheel transmitters have been
detected,
– in the Technical Data chapter in this Driver’s
Manual: Please observe the chapter “TYRE
PRESSURES, COLD” on Page 363.
– there is external interference by other radio
sources, e.g. wireless headphones,
– tyre temperatures are too high.
For information on messages on the multi-purpose
display:
Please observe the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 150.
Notes on tyre pressure
Pressure increase as the result of
temperature increase
In accordance with physical principles,
the tyre pressure changes as the temperature
changes. The tyre pressure increases or
decreases by around 0.1 bar (1.5 psi) for every
10 °C change in temperature.
Tyre pressure specifications
The tyre pressure must match the prescribed
value (required pressure).
Tyre Pressure Monitoring is not active in the
following cases:
You can find information on the tyre pressure for
cold tyres (20 °C):
– Tyre Pressure Monitoring is faulty,
– in the sub-menu TYRE PRESSURE (filling information):
as a required pressure for each axle if Tyre
Pressure Monitoring has not yet been taught
the corresponding values,
– at least three wheel transmitters for Tyre
Pressure Monitoring are faulty or not present,
142
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
If Tyre Pressure Monitoring has been taught the
corresponding values, the deviations from the
required pressure are shown in the sub-menu
TYRE PRESSURE (filling information) independently of the tyre temperature. The correct tyre
pressure adjustment can be made for a wheel on
the basis of this display information even if the
tyres are warm.
Insufficient tyre filling pressure can cause tyres to
overheat when driving and thus be damaged –
even invisibly.
Hidden tyre damage is not eliminated by subsequently correcting the tyre pressure.
f For this reason, always make sure that the tyre
pressure is correct.
For further information on maintenance and care
of tyres and wheels:
Please observe the chapter “TYRES AND
WHEELS” on Page 288.
Switching off passenger compartment monitoring and inclination
sensor on the multi-purpose
display
The passenger compartment monitoring system
and the inclination sensor (protection against
towing) can be temporarily deactivated in the
ALARM sub-menu.
When the doors are locked again, the passenger
compartment monitoring system and inclination
sensor are activated once more.
Further important information concerning this
topic can be found in a separate chapter:
Please observe the chapter “SWITCHING OFF
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT MONITORING
SYSTEM AND INCLINATION SENSOR” on
Page 260.
Note on operation
f Comfort settings can be made only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Switching inclination sensor on/off
The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is raised
markedly at one end with the doors locked
(e.g. theft with a breakdown truck).
Switching passenger compartment
monitoring on/off
The alarm is triggered if motion is detected in the
interior with the doors closed (e.g. if a window is
broken in a theft).
1. MAIN MENU
> SETTINGS
> COMFORT
> ALARM
Select and confirm.
2. Select ANGLE.
3. Confirm selection.
Inclination sensor is activated
Inclination sensor is deactivated
1. MAIN MENU
> SETTINGS
> COMFORT
> ALARM
Select and confirm.
2. Select INTERIOR.
3. Confirm selection.
Monitoring is activated
Monitoring is deactivated
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
143
Changing settings for opening and
locking the vehicle
Note on operation
Comfort settings can be made only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Synchronous adjustment of door
mirrors
Note on operation
Comfort settings can be made only when the
vehicle is stationary.
When this function is active, the mirrors move
simultaneously and in the same direction.
1. MAIN MENU
> SETTINGS
> COMFORT
> MIRRORS
Select and confirm.
2. Select SYNCH.
3. Confirm selection.
SYNCHRONOUS ADJUSTMENT
is activated
SYNCHRONOUS ADJUSTMENT
is deactivated
144
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
You can set different variants of locking and
unlocking the doors and the rear lid as well as the
check-back signal when locking and unlocking the
vehicle and save them on the respective remote
control.
1. Using the rocker switch and the
ENTER button on the wiper stalk, select
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > COMFORT >
DOOR OPENING
2. Set the desired function.
3. Switch ignition off.
4. Close the driver’s door.
5. Press button
on the vehicle key.
The settings are now stored on this vehicle
key.
Setting door unlocking
Door unlocking can be set on an individual basis.
1. MAIN MENU
> SETTINGS
> COMFORT
> DOOR OPENING
> DOORS
Select and confirm.
2. Select one of the three options:
– SINGLE DOOR
Only the driver’s door is unlocked.
The door on the access side is
unlocked on vehicles equipped with
Porsche Entry & Drive.
– VEH. SIDE
Both doors on the driver’s side are
unlocked.
The doors on the access side are
unlocked on vehicles equipped with
Porsche Entry & Drive.
– ALL
All doors are unlocked.
3. Confirm selection.
Note on operation
If the unlocking button
on the remote control
is pressed a second time within 2 seconds, all
vehicle doors are unlocked independently of the
setting.
Setting rear lid locking
When the TAILGATE function is active, rear access
(rear lid, rear window and spare wheel bracket) is
included in the central locking system.
Access is possible when the vehicle is stationary
and unlocked.
Setting door opening signal
At speeds higher than 6 km/h (4 mph), release is
blocked until a door is opened with the vehicle
stationary.
If the signal function is active, door unlocking and
locking are confirmed by the hazard warning lights
flashing.
When the TAILGATE function is deactivated,
access is only possible using button
on the
remote control.
1. MAIN MENU
> SETTINGS
> COMFORT
> DOOR OPENING
> SIGNAL
Select and confirm.
1. MAIN MENU
> SETTINGS
> COMFORT
> DOOR OPENING
Select and confirm.
2. Select TURN SIGNALS.
3. Confirm selection.
Signal is activated.
2. Select TAILGATE.
3. Confirm selection.
Locking is activated.
Locking is deactivated.
Signal is deactivated.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
145
Setting AUTO LOCK and AUTO UNLOCK
1. MAIN MENU
> SETTINGS
> COMFORT
> DOOR OPENING
Select and confirm.
2. Select AUTO LOCK or
AUTO UNLOCK.
3. Confirm selection.
Selection is activated.
Selection is deactivated.
AUTO LOCK and AUTO UNLOCK variants
You can set 4 different variants of automatic door
locking (AUTO LOCK) and automatic door
unlocking (AUTO UNLOCK).
Doors locked using AUTO LOCK can always be
opened by pulling the inner door handle twice
regardless of the setting for door unlocking.
Option 1:
AUTO LOCK off and AUTO UNLOCK off
The doors do not lock and unlock automatically.
Option 2:
AUTO LOCK on and AUTO UNLOCK off
Doors lock automatically when a speed of approx.
6 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded.
146
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
Option 3:
AUTO LOCK on and AUTO UNLOCK on
Doors lock automatically when a speed of approx.
6 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded.
On vehicles without Porsche Entry & Drive, the
doors are unlocked automatically when the
ignition key is withdrawn.
On vehicles equipped with Porsche Entry & Drive,
the doors are unlocked when the ignition is
switched off twice.
Option 4:
AUTO LOCK off and AUTO UNLOCK on
The doors do not lock automatically.
If the doors are locked with the central locking
system button:
On vehicles without Porsche Entry & Drive, the
doors are unlocked automatically when the
ignition key is withdrawn.
On vehicles equipped with Porsche Entry & Drive,
the doors are unlocked when the ignition is
switched off twice.
Setting lighting off delay
1. MAIN MENU
> SETTINGS
> LIGHTS
Select and confirm.
2. Select OFF DELAY.
3. Confirm selection.
The set off delay time is now
active.
4. Select the time input field.
5. Confirm selection.
6. Set the off delay time
(Coming Home function):
The time is adjusted by pressing the
rocker switch.
Delay times of 15, 30 or 60 seconds
can be set.
7. Confirm selection.
9. Confirm selection.
12 h mode is activated
12 h mode is deactivated
Note on operation
Setting the clock
There is also a button on the instrument panel to
call the CLOCK menu:
Please observe the chapter “CLOCK” on
Page 120.
1. MAIN MENU
> SETTINGS
> CLOCK
Select and confirm.
2. Select xx:xx SET.
3. Confirm selection.
4. Select hours or minutes display.
5. Confirm selection.
The desired time can now be set.
6. Set the desired time:
The time is adjusted in hour or minute
increments by pressing the rocker
switch.
7. Confirm selection.
Selecting 12 h mode
8. Select 12 h-MODE.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
147
Calibrating compass
In rare cases, external disturbances may necessitate calibration of the compass. The warning
message “CAL.” then appears on the multipurpose display.
f To calibrate the compass, follow the displayed
instruction DRIVE IN A FULL CIRCLE.
The display returns to the main menu after
successful calibration.
Setting compass
If you drive your vehicle across the magnetic field
zone set on the multi-purpose display, you must
enter your current zone in the COMPASS menu
(see illustration).
1. MAIN MENU
> SETTINGS
> COMPASS
Select and confirm.
2. Select SET ZONE xx.
3. Confirm selection.
148
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
4. Select zone.
The setting is changed in increments
of 1 by pressing the rocker switch.
5. Confirm selection.
Changing units for displays
1. MAIN MENU
> SETTINGS
> UNITS
Select and confirm.
2. Select the desired category
(e.g. SPEEDOMETER).
Changing language for displays
1. MAIN MENU
> SETTINGS
> LANGUAGE
Select and confirm.
2. Select the desired language.
3. Confirm selection.
Note
Changing the language will affect the entire multipurpose display.
3. Confirm selection.
4. Select the desired unit (e.g. MPH).
5. Confirm selection.
Resetting display to factory
settings
All settings made (Clock, Comfort, Lights, Units,
Language) can be reset to the factory settings.
Available categories and units
Note
– Speedometer:
km/h - km, mph - mls
All personal settings made up to this point will be
deleted by resetting to the factory settings.
– Consumption:
l/100 km, km/l, MPG (UK),
MPG (US)
– Temperature:
°C - CELSIUS, °F - FAHRENHEIT
– Tyre pressure:
bar, psi
1. MAIN MENU
> SETTINGS
> FACTORY SET
Select and confirm.
2. Select RESET.
3. Confirm selection.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
149
Overview of warning messages
If a warning message appears, always refer to the corresponding chapters in this Driver’s Manual.
Warning messages are issued only if all measurement preconditions are met.
Therefore, check all fluid levels regularly – in particular, always check the engine oil level after refuelling.
Light on
instrument
panel
150
Warning message
on the multi-purpose display
Meaning/measures
Steering faulty
Steering lock engaged.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.*
Ignition lock faulty
Do not continue driving.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.*
System fault
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.*
Key not recognised in vehicle
Make sure that you have the remote control with you.
Turn ignition key to the left
for 2 seconds
To lock the steering, turn the ignition key to the left and hold for
2 seconds.
Key: replace battery
Replace the remote-control battery.
Move steering wheel
Turn the steering wheel so that the steering wheel lock can
engage/disengage.
Key not found
Make sure that you have the remote control with you.
Move selector lever
to position P
Tiptronic S: the vehicle could roll away.
The ignition key can be withdrawn only in Tiptronic selector lever
position P.
Press brake pedal
Apply the brake when starting.
Move selector lever
to position P or N
Tiptronic S: the vehicle can be started only in position P or N.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
Light on
instrument
panel
Warning message
on the multi-purpose display
Meaning/measures
Depress clutch
Manual transmission: depress clutch pedal when starting.
Immobilizer active
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.*
Check hitch
Ball head is not in its final position.
Press rocker switch until the final position is reached.
Warning Hitch
Stop at a suitable place. Do not continue driving.
Ball head is not in its final position.
Press rocker switch until the final position is reached.
Check left static cornering
light
Check bulb.
Check right static cornering
light
Check bulb.
Check dynamic cornering light
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.*
If the warning message appears, the high beam indicator light
on the speedometer flashes additionally.
Check dipped beam
Check bulb.
Check trailer lights
Check bulb.
Check direction indicators
Check bulb.
Check high beam
Check bulb.
Check licence plate light
Check bulb.
Check fog lights
Check bulb.
Check reversing lights
Check bulb.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
151
Light on
instrument
panel
Warning message
on the multi-purpose display
Meaning/measures
Check front side lights
Check bulb.
Check headlight beam adjustment
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.*
Daytime driving lights off
Daytime driving lights switch off when the engine is shut off.
Switch on lights if necessary.
System fault headlamp
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.*
Airbag faulty.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.*
152
Seat belt
Fasten seat belt.
Caution Flat tyre
Check tyres
Tyre Pressure Monitoring detects a pressure loss of at least
0.4 bar (6 psi) or a larger leak.
Stop in a suitable place and check tyres.
Change wheel if necessary.
Check spare wheel
Req. pressure:
3.4 bar / 50 psi
Appears about every 6 months.
Check if the pressure of the fitted spare wheel matches the
required pressure manually, as it is not monitored electronically.
Tyre pressure too low Add air
Tyre Pressure Monitoring detects a pressure loss of at least
0.3 bar (4 psi).
Correct tyre pressure at the next opportunity.
Collap. wheel/sealing set
max. 80 km/h / 50 mph
Observe maximum permitted speed.
Collap. wheel
Req. pressure: 3.5 bar/51 psi
Max. 80 km/h / 50 mph
Information on driving with a collapsible spare wheel
after selection in
spare wheel menu.
Observe maximum speed of max. 80 km/h or 50 mph and
required pressure of 3.5 bar or 51 psi.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
Light on
instrument
panel
Warning message
on the multi-purpose display
Meaning/measures
System not active
Tyre Pressure Monitoring faulty.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.*
Select new set of wheels in the Tyre pressure menu after
changing the wheels.
System not active
Brief disturbance
External interference (e.g. wireless headphones) or excessive
temperature (over 120 °C) at the wheel transmitters. Tyre
Pressure Monitoring will reactivate itself automatically.
System not active Too many
wh. transmitters
Tyre Pressure Monitoring detects more than 4 wheel
transmitters (e.g. winter wheels in the luggage compartment).
Tyre Pressure Monitoring will reactivate itself after the additional
wheel transmitters have been removed.
No monitoring System learning
After the tyre type and size are selected in the Tyre pressure
menu, Tyre Pressure Monitoring re-teaches the tyres.
Wheel change?
Make new selection
The tyre type and size of the changed tyres have not been
updated for Tyre Pressure Monitoring.
The display changes when the vehicle is stationary:
Select corresponding tyre type and tyre size.
When vehicle stops: hit selection
The message appears after driving off if the warning “Flat tyre”
has been cleared but the selection on the display SELECTION
AFTER WARNING has not been made properly.
Make selection on the multi-purpose display when the vehicle is
stationary.
Engine temperature too high
Coolant or engine oil temperature is too high.
Switch engine off and let it cool.
Check coolant or engine oil level. Add more coolant or engine
oil if necessary.
Check coolant level
Switch engine off and let it cool.
Check coolant level. Add coolant if necessary.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
153
Light on
instrument
panel
Warning message
on the multi-purpose display
Meaning/measures
Warning Battery/generator
Stop in a suitable place and switch engine off.
Do not continue driving.
Have the fault remedied at a qualified specialist
workshop.*
Start engine
The battery discharges if the engine is not running and loads are
switched on.
Start the vehicle or switch the loads off.
Electric load switch-off
Vehicle electrical system is overloaded. Certain loads
(e.g. heated rear window, seat heating) will be switched off.
Please refuel
Add washer fluid
154
Oil level monitoring Failure
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.*
Check oil level
Check the oil level using the oil dipstick as soon as possible and
add engine oil if necessary.
Oil pressure too low
Immediately stop in a suitable place and switch engine off.
Do not continue driving.
Check engine oil level. Add oil if necessary.
Do not continue driving if the warning light comes on even when
the oil level is correct. Have the fault remedied at a qualified
specialist workshop.*
Oil pressure monitoring Failure
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.*
Service in 3000 km/mls
Service indicator
Bring the vehicle in for service no later than after the distance
shown has been covered. However, it is the intervals in the
“Guarantee and Maintenance” booklet that are decisive.
Service now
Service indicator
Have your vehicle serviced at a qualified specialist workshop.*
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
Light on
instrument
panel
Warning message
on the multi-purpose display
Meaning/measures
Brake pads
Have the brake pads changed immediately.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.*
Warning Brake proportioning
Stop immediately in a suitable place. Do not continue driving.
Have the fault remedied at a qualified specialist
workshop.*
ABS failure
Drive carefully. Have the fault remedied at a qualified specialist
workshop.*
PSM failure
Drive carefully. Have the fault remedied at a qualified specialist
workshop.*
Warning Brake fluid level
Stop immediately in a suitable place. Do not continue driving.
Have the fault remedied at a qualified specialist
workshop.*
Parking brake
Parking brake not released.
PSM on
Porsche Stability Management was switched on.
PSM off
Porsche Stability Management was switched off.
PHC unavailable
The Porsche Drive-off Assistant (manual transmission) is not
available.
Brake booster faulty
Greater brake pedal force necessary.
Drive carefully to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.*
Chassis Sport
Current setting of Porsche Active Suspension Management
Chassis Normal
Current setting of Porsche Active Suspension Management
Chassis Comfort
Current setting of Porsche Active Suspension Management
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
155
Light on
instrument
panel
156
Warning message
on the multi-purpose display
Meaning/measures
Chassis system faulty
Handling may be affected. Adapt your speed to the changed
conditions. Have the fault remedied at a qualified specialist
workshop.*
Warning Chassis system
The side tilt of the vehicle is significantly greater when
cornering. Drive carefully at an appropriate speed to the nearest
qualified specialist workshop.*
Warning Chassis system
Stop at a suitable place. Do not continue driving.
Have the fault remedied at a qualified specialist
workshop.*
Chassis system faulty
Drive carefully to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.*
Spare wheel filling
Collapsible spare wheel is being filled by level-control
compressor.
Do not drive off!
Regulation switched off
Level control has been switched off (to jack up the vehicle).
Not permissible
The prerequisites for setting the desired level have not been
met.
Pressure accumulator charging
Level control temporarily unavailable.
Four-wheel dr. system faulty
Have the fault remedied at a qualified specialist
workshop.*
Shift not possible;
speed too high
Tiptronic S: When changing between Low Range and High
Range, the limit speed (off-road programme) must not be
exceeded.
Shift possible only in Neutral
Tiptronic S: The Tiptronic selector lever must be in position N
when changing between Low Range and High Range.
Possible only when stopped in
neutral with brake
Manual transmission: The vehicle must be stationary, the brakes
must be applied and the gearshift lever must be in the Neutral
position when changing between Low Range and High Range.
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
Light on
instrument
panel
Warning message
on the multi-purpose display
Meaning/measures
Warning Parking lock! Apply
parking brake!
Do not continue driving. Apply the parking brake.
Have the fault remedied at a qualified specialist
workshop.*
Failure sport mode
Have the fault remedied at a qualified specialist
workshop.*
Sport mode only usable
without reduction
Sport mode cannot be selected when the off-road driving
programme (Low Range) is engaged.
Limit exceeded
The set speed limit has been exceeded.
Spare wheel is not locked.
Danger of injury and damage. Before driving off
always lock the spare wheel correctly.
Driver’s door open
All unlocked doors and lids are displayed when the vehicle
exceeds 3 km/h (2 mph).
Passenger’s door open
All unlocked doors and lids are displayed when the vehicle
exceeds 3 km/h (2 mph).
Rear left door open
All unlocked doors and lids are displayed when the vehicle
exceeds 3 km/h (2 mph).
Rear right door open
All unlocked doors and lids are displayed when the vehicle
exceeds 3 km/h (2 mph).
Bonnet open
All unlocked doors and lids are displayed when the vehicle
exceeds 3 km/h (2 mph).
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
157
Light on
instrument
panel
Warning message
on the multi-purpose display
Meaning/measures
Rear lid open.
All unlocked doors and lids are displayed when the vehicle
exceeds 3 km/h (2 mph).
Rear window open
All unlocked doors and lids are displayed when the vehicle
exceeds 3 km/h (2 mph).
System fault
Several systems may have failed. Have the fault remedied at a
qualified specialist workshop.*
* We recommend that you use a Porsche partner for this work since these are staffed with trained personnel and have the necessary parts and tools.
158
Multi-Purpose Display and Instruments
Driving and Driving Safety
Before driving off ...................................... 160
Tips for running in ...................................... 160
Ignition lock/steering lock........................... 161
Starting and stopping the engine ................ 164
Parking brake ............................................ 166
Footbrake.................................................. 166
Brief overview – cruise control.................. 168
Cruise control ............................................ 169
Manual transmission, clutch ........................ 172
Tiptronic S ................................................ 173
Selector lever positions .............................. 174
Driving programmes for on-road
and off-road driving .................................... 181
Power-transmission
and running-gear control systems................ 188
Air suspension with level control
and height adjustment ................................ 200
Porsche Active Suspension Management
(PASM) ...................................................... 204
Porsche Dynamic Chassis
Control (PDCC)........................................... 205
Off-road driving .......................................... 206
Driving systems for off-road driving ............ 207
Uphill driving .............................................. 209
Airbag systems .......................................... 215
Driving and Driving Safety
159
Before driving off
Tips for running in
Bedding in new brake pads
f Check the filling pressure, tread and condition
of all tyres.
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining
optimum performance from your new Porsche.
New brake pads and brake discs have to be
“bedded in”, and therefore only attain optimal
friction when the vehicle has covered several
hundred km or miles.
The slightly reduced braking ability must be
compensated for by pressing the brake pedal
harder. This also applies whenever the brake pads
or brake discs are replaced.
f Clean headlight lenses, rear lights, direction
indicators and windows.
f Check operation of headlights, brake lights
and direction indicators with the ignition
switched on.
Despite the most modern, high-precision manufacturing methods, the “wearing in” of moving parts
with each other cannot be completely avoided.
This wearing-in occurs mainly in the first 3,000 km
(1,865 miles).
f Check operation of warning lights and
indicator lights with ignition switched on and
engine switched off.
During the first 3,000 km (1,865 miles) you
should:
f Ensure that fuel supply is adequate.
f Avoid frequent cold starts with short-distance
driving whenever possible.
f Adjust interior and door mirrors for proper
vision to the rear.
f Fasten seat belts – driver and passengers.
f Check all fluid levels regularly between service
intervals as well.
f Preferably take longer trips.
f Not participate in motor racing events, sports
driving schools or similar.
f Avoid high engine speeds, especially when the
engine is cold.
Oil and fuel consumption
The oil and fuel consumption may be somewhat
higher than normal during the running-in period.
f The values for oil and fuel consumption are
provided in the chapter Technical Data:
Please observe the chapter “ENGINE DATA” on
Page 359.
Please observe the chapter “FUEL CONSUMPTION” on Page 360.
160
Driving and Driving Safety
Running in new tyres
f Please note: new tyres at first do not possess
their full road-holding ability.
The new tyres should therefore be broken in
by driving at moderate speeds for the first
100 - 200 km (60 - 120 miles).
Ignition lock position 0
Initial position
The ignition key cannot be withdrawn when the
ignition is switched on or when the engine has
been started.
To withdraw the ignition key:
f Stop the vehicle.
f On vehicles with Tiptronic S:
Move Tiptronic selector lever to position P.
f Switch ignition off.
f Remove ignition key.
Note on operation
Key positions
0 - Initial position
1 - Ignition on
2 - Start engine
3 - Ignition off
Key positions with Porsche Entry & Drive
0 - Initial position
1 - Ignition on
2 - Start engine
3 - Ignition off
Ignition lock/steering lock
For vehicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive,
you do not need to insert the key into the ignition
lock but merely keep it with you. The ignition key
is replaced by a control unit in the ignition lock
which always remains in the ignition lock, unless
the vehicle is being towed.
The ignition lock has a total of four ignition lock
positions.
Note on operation
The vehicle key rebounds to the initial position
from every ignition lock position.
The vehicle battery discharges if the ignition key is
left inserted.
If the vehicle battery is dead, the key can only be
pulled out of the ignition lock if the emergency
operation is performed:
Please observe the chapter “EMERGENCY OPERATION – UNLOCKING THE IGNITION KEY” on
Page 164.
Removing the control unit from the ignition
lock
f Press button A and remove the control unit.
Driving and Driving Safety
161
Ignition lock position 1
Ignition on
f Turn ignition key to position 1.
Ignition is switched on.
Note on operation
All electrical equipment can be switched on.
The warning lights on the instrument panel light up
for a lamp check.
f For information on the location of the warning
lights:
Please observe the chapter “INSTRUMENT
PANEL” on Page 118.
If a load is not switched on for 10 minutes after
switching on the ignition, the ignition must be
switched on again.
Turn the ignition key to ignition lock position 3
(ignition off) first.
Ignition lock position 2
Start engine
f Operate footbrake.
f Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal or on
vehicles with Tiptronic S:
Move Tiptronic selector lever to position P or
N.
f Do not press the accelerator pedal.
The engine control unit will provide the correct
starting mixture.
162
Driving and Driving Safety
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2.
f Do not operate the starter for longer than
approx. 10 seconds.
If necessary, repeat the starting procedure
after a pause of approx. 10 seconds.
Turn the ignition key to ignition lock position 3
(ignition off) first.
f Do not warm up the engine when stationary.
Drive off immediately.
Avoid high revolutions and full throttle until the
engine has reached operating temperature.
f If battery output is insufficient, jump leads can
be used to start the engine.
For information on jump lead starting: Please
observe the chapter “EXTERNAL POWER
SUPPLY, JUMP LEAD STARTING” on
Page 332.
Notes on operation
The first operation of the starter is ended automatically when the engine starts.
If the engine does not start, subsequent starter
operations will not be ended automatically.
When the engine is started, the warning lights
must go out.
Ignition lock position 3
Ignition off
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 3.
Steering column lock
Vehicles without Porsche Entry & Drive
The steering column is automatically locked
when the ignition key is withdrawn from the
ignition lock.
The steering column is automatically unlocked
when the ignition key is inserted into the ignition
lock.
Vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive
The steering column is automatically locked
when the ignition is switched off and the vehicle is
locked.
Manually locking the steering column on
vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive
f Depress the clutch on vehicles with manual
transmission.
f Once the ignition is switched off, turn the
control unit again to ignition lock position 3
and hold it there for 2 seconds.
The steering column is locked.
The steering column is automatically unlocked
by turning the control unit from ignition lock
position 0.
Driving and Driving Safety
163
Starting and stopping the engine
The immobiliser can be deactivated and the
engine started only using an authorised ignition
key. For further information on the immobiliser:
Please observe the chapter “IMMOBILISER” on
Page 262.
Warning!
Risk of poisoning. Exhaust gas contains
colourless and odourless carbon monoxide,
which is toxic even in low concentrations.
f Never start the engine or let it run in confined
spaces.
Danger of fire in the area of the hot exhaust
system.
Emergency operation – unlocking the
ignition key
If the vehicle battery is dead, the key can only be
pulled out of the ignition lock if the emergency
operation is performed.
1. Turn ignition key counter-clockwise.
2. Press a pointed object, e.g. a ballpoint pen, in
the opening A next to the ignition lock and
keep pressed.
3. Remove ignition key.
164
Driving and Driving Safety
f Do not park or drive your vehicle where
combustible materials, such as dry grass or
leaves, can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system.
f For further information on the emission control
system:
Please observe the chapter “CAR CARE
INSTRUCTIONS” on Page 279.
Starting the vehicle
f Operate footbrake.
f Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal.
f Put gearshift lever into neutral or move
Tiptronic selector lever to the P or N position.
f Do not press the accelerator pedal.
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2.
f Do not operate the starter for longer than
approx. 10 seconds. If necessary, repeat the
starting procedure after a pause of approx.
10 seconds. Turn the ignition key back to the
3 position first.
The first operation of the starter is ended automatically when the engine starts.
If the engine does not start, subsequent starter
operations will not be ended automatically.
f Do not warm up the engine when stationary.
Drive off immediately. Avoid high revolutions
and full throttle until the engine has reached
operating temperature.
f If battery output is insufficient, jump leads can
be used to start the engine. Vehicles with
manual transmission can also be tow-started.
f For information on jump lead starting:
Please observe the chapter “EXTERNAL
POWER SUPPLY, JUMP LEAD STARTING” on
Page 332.
f For information on tow-starting:
Please observe the chapter “TOW-STARTING/
PUSH-STARTING” on Page 352.
Note on operation
To ensure a good charge condition for the battery
and thus its ability to start the engine, all electrical
accessories which are not required should be
switched off when the ignition is switched on and
when engine revolutions are low (in traffic jams, in
cities or in queues).
Stopping
f Withdraw the ignition key only when the vehicle
is stationary, otherwise the steering lock
engages and the vehicle cannot be steered.
f Only switch the ignition off when the vehicle is
stationary, as there is no steering assistance
and brake boost when the engine is switched
off.
f When leaving the vehicle always withdraw the
ignition key and engage the parking brake.
The control unit always remains in the ignition
lock on vehicles that have Porsche Entry &
Drive.
Radiator fans
Warning!
Risk of injury. After the engine is switched
off, the coolant temperature is monitored for
approx. 30 minutes.
During this period, and depending on
temperature, the fans may continue to run or
start to run.
f The radiators and radiator fans are in the front
of the vehicle. Carry out work in these areas
only with the engine off and exercise extreme
caution.
Note on operation
The vehicle battery discharges if the ignition key is
left inserted.
Driving and Driving Safety
165
Applying the parking brake
f Press down firmly on the foot pedal.
The warning light in the instrument panel lights
up.
A message will be displayed on the multipurpose display of the instrument panel if the
parking brake is not released before moving
off.
f For information on the warning message on
the multi-purpose display: Please observe the
chapter “OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES”
on Page 150.
Releasing the parking brake
Parking brake
The parking brake acts on the rear wheels and
serves to secure the vehicle while parked.
166
Driving and Driving Safety
f Press on the footbrake and pull handle A of the
parking brake.
The warning light and the message disappear.
Footbrake
Safety notes!
f Do not obstruct the pedal travel with floor mats
or other objects.
The brake booster is ready for operation only
while the engine is running.
If the engine is switched off or there is a defect in
the brake booster, much greater force has to be
applied to the pedal when braking.
f Vehicles with a faulty brake must not be
towed.
For further information on tow-starting and
towing: Please observe the chapter “TOWING
AND TOW-STARTING” on Page 352.
In heavy rain, while driving through water or after
leaving a car wash, the braking action may be
delayed and increased pressure may be required.
f For this reason, keep further back from the
vehicle in front and “dry” the brakes by
applying them at intervals. Make sure that
following traffic is not affected.
After a long drive over salted or gritted roads, a
coating may form on the brake discs and pads
that significantly reduces friction and thus braking
action.
f Therefore, clean the brake discs and pads
approx. every 2 weeks with a strong jet of
water. The cleaning effect of automatic car
washes is insufficient.
To prevent corrosion of the brake discs, “brake
them dry” before parking the vehicle.
f Even though the brake discs consist of alloyed
grey cast iron, they will unavoidably start to
corrode if your car is parked for an extended
period. The brakes will tend to “rub” as a
result.
The nature, extent and effects of corrosion
depend on the amount of time the vehicle was
parked, whether road salt or grit was spread
and whether grease-dissolving agents were
used in car washes.
If the braking comfort is noticeably impaired,
we recommend having the brake system
checked by experts.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Continuous braking overheats the brakes and
reduces the braking effect.
f For information on brake fluid and checking the
brake fluid level:
Please observe the chapter “CHECKING
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND CHANGING BRAKE
FLUID” on Page 270.
Brake pads and brake discs
Wear on the brake pads and brake discs depends
to a great extent on the driving style and the conditions of use and therefore cannot be expressed in
actual miles on the road.
The high-performance brake system is designed
for optimal braking effect at all speeds and
temperatures.
Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient conditions (such as temperature and humidity) therefore
might cause the brakes to squeal.
Warning message
A warning message will appear on the multipurpose display of the instrument panel if the wear
limit of the brake pads is reached.
f For information on the warning message on
the multi-purpose display:
Please observe the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 150.
f Have the brake pads changed immediately.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
f To relieve the braking system on downhill
stretches, change down to a lower gear in
good time to obtain engine braking.
If engine braking is insufficient on steep
stretches, operate the footbrake at intervals.
Driving and Driving Safety
167
Brief overview – cruise control
The cruise control maintains any selected
speed between approx. 30 and 240 km/h
(20 and 150 mph) without you having to use
the accelerator.
This brief overview does not replace the information provided in the chapter “Cruise control”. In
particular, warnings are not replaced by this brief
overview.
Cruise-control stalk
What do I want to do?
What do I have to do?
Storing and maintaining speed
Pull the stalk to detent position 1. Bring the vehicle to the desired speed. Press button A.
Changing stored speed
Acceleration: Press and hold stalk in position 3.
Deceleration: Press and hold stalk in position 4.
Switching off cruise control
Move the stalk to detent position 2 or operate the footbrake.
168
Driving and Driving Safety
Warning!
Risk of accident in heavy traffic, on twisting
roads or under unfavourable road conditions
(e.g. wintry or wet conditions or varying road
surfaces etc.).
f Do not use the cruise control in these
conditions.
Switching cruise control readiness on
f Pull the stalk back to position 1 until you feel it
click into place.
Cruise control readiness
The green indicator light on the tachometer now indicates readiness.
Maintaining and storing speed
f Bring the vehicle to the desired speed with the
accelerator.
f Press button A.
The desired speed has now been stored.
A - SET (store speed)
1 - RESUME
(switch on/resume cruise control readiness)
2 - OFF (Interrupt)
3 - + SPEED (accelerate)
4 - – SPEED (decelerate)
Cruise control
The cruise control maintains any selected
speed between approx. 30 and 240 km/h
(20 and 150 mph) without you having to use
the accelerator.
The cruise control is operated with the stalk on
the steering wheel.
Driving and Driving Safety
169
Accelerating (e.g. to overtake)
Decelerating
Interrupting cruise control operation
Option 1
Option 1
The speed driven before the interruption remains
stored in the memory and can be reactivated by
operating the control stalk. Please observe the
chapter “RESUMING THE STORED SPEED” on
Page 171.
f Increase speed as usual with the accelerator.
When you ease off the accelerator, the
previously saved value is again set.
Option 2
f Push stalk upwards to position 3 until the
desired speed is reached.
The speed reached is maintained and stored
when the stalk is released.
Option 3
f Briefly push stalk upwards to position 3
(a maximum of 10 times).
The speed is increased by 2 km/h (1 mph)
each time.
Note on operation
Cruise control operation is automatically interrupted if the speed is increased by more than
approx. 25 km/h (16 mph) for longer than
20 seconds.
f Push stalk downwards to position 4 until the
desired speed is reached.
The speed reached is maintained and stored
when the stalk is released.
Option 2
f Briefly push stalk downwards to position 4
(a maximum of 10 times).
The speed is reduced by 2 km/h (1 mph) each
time.
f Press stalk forward to position 2
(not engaged) or
f Operate brake or clutch pedal or, on
vehicles with Tiptronic S, shift to selector
lever position N.
f For further information on driving with
Tiptronic S:
Please observe the chapter “TIPTRONIC S” on
Page 173.
Cruise control operation is interrupted
automatically:
– If the set vehicle speed is exceeded by more
than approx. 25 km/h (16 mph) for longer than
20 seconds.
– If the actual vehicle speed falls to approx.
10 km/h (6 mph) below the set vehicle speed
for longer than 5 seconds (e.g. upward
slopes).
– If Porsche Stability Management (PSM) intervenes for longer than 0.2 seconds.
– If the Low Range off-road driving programme is
activated.
170
Driving and Driving Safety
Switching cruise control readiness off
f Press the stalk forward to position 2 until you
feel it click into place.
The memory is cleared and the green readiness light goes out.
The memory is cleared if the ignition is switched
off when the vehicle is parked.
Tip on driving
On upward or downward slopes, the set speed
cannot always be maintained by the cruise control.
f To obtain sufficient engine braking or a better
engine-speed range, you therefore have to
change down to a lower gear.
A - SET (store speed)
1 - RESUME
(switch on/resume cruise control readiness)
2 - OFF (Interrupt)
3 - + SPEED (accelerate)
4 - – SPEED (decelerate)
Resuming the stored speed
f Pull stalk back to position 1.
Note on operation
The stored speed should be recalled only when
traffic conditions and the road surface permit.
Driving and Driving Safety
171
The positions of the gears are shown on the shift
diagram on the gearshift lever.
f When shifting gears, always ensure that the
clutch pedal is fully depressed and the gear
has fully engaged.
f Select reverse only when vehicle is stationary.
f Select an appropriately low gear on upward
and downward slopes.
This will ensure optimum use of engine power
and engine braking.
When reverse gear is selected and the ignition is
on, the reversing lights are lit.
Manual transmission, clutch
Warning!
Risk of accident.
f Do not obstruct the pedal travel with floor mats
or other objects.
Floor mats of the correct size and with the appropriate fastening are available from your Porsche
partner.
172
Driving and Driving Safety
Permitted engine speed
f You should change into a higher gear before
the needle reaches the red mark on the
tachometer, or ease off the accelerator.
If the red zone is reached during acceleration, fuel
feed is interrupted.
Caution!
Risk of engine damage (overrevving) when
shifting down to a lower gear.
f Take care not to exceed the maximum
permitted engine speed when shifting down.
Tiptronic S
Release button
The release button (arrow) on the front side of the
selector lever prevents unintentional gear
changes.
The Porsche Tiptronic is a six-speed transmission
and features an “automatic” and a “manual”
gearshift mode.
The release button must be pressed when shifting
to position R or P.
In automatic selection mode (selector lever
position D), gear changing is automatic.
You can change temporarily from automatic to
manual mode using the rocker switches on the
steering wheel. depending on the driving
programme.
The selector lever can no longer be operated in
the event of an electrical fault.
f For information on emergency release of the
blocked selector lever:
Please observe the chapter “SELECTOR
LEVER EMERGENCY OPERATION” on
Page 179.
In manual selection mode (selector lever
position M), you change gear using the rocker
switches on the steering wheel or by pushing the
selector lever forward or back.
You can change between selector lever positions
D and M as you wish while driving.
Note on operation
Take care not to operate the rocker switches on
the steering wheel inadvertently, thereby
triggering undesired gear changes.
Starting
Changing the selector lever position
The selector lever is locked when the ignition is
switched off.
The selector lever can be moved from position P
and N only with:
– the ignition switched on,
– the brake pedal pressed and
– the release button pressed (arrow).
The engine can be started only in selector lever
position P or N with the brake pedal pressed.
Moving off
f Select the desired position for moving off
(D, M or R) only when the engine is idling and
whilst depressing the brake pedal.
f Since the vehicle creeps when in gear, do not
release the brake until you want to move off.
f After selecting a gear, do not accelerate until
you can feel that the gear is engaged.
Driving and Driving Safety
173
If there is a fault in the transmission:
Selector lever positions
– An X appears instead of the current gear
indication on the multi-purpose display of the
instrument panel.
The transmission no longer shifts.
P – Parking lock
f Have the fault rectified immediately.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
When the selector lever is in position P, the drive
wheels are mechanically locked.
f Engage parking lock only when vehicle is
stationary.
f Engage parking lock after applying the
parking brake and release it before releasing
the parking brake.
f Always apply the parking brake before leaving
the vehicle.
The ignition key can be withdrawn only in selector
lever position P.
Selector lever position
R – Reverse gear
Indicator for selector lever position and
engaged gear
f Select reverse only if vehicle is stationary and
the brake is applied.
When the engine is running, the selector lever
position and engaged gear are indicated.
N – Neutral
Selector lever position N must be selected for
towing or in car washes, for example.
f Select the desired position for moving off
(D, M or R) only when the engine is idling and
whilst depressing the brake pedal.
174
Driving and Driving Safety
D – Automatic selection mode
(in the on-road driving programme)
The functions of selector lever positions D and M
differ in the High Range on-road driving
programme and the Low Range off-road driving
programme.
f Use selector lever position D for “normal”
driving.
The gears are shifted automatically according
to the accelerator position and speed.
Depending on the way the vehicle is driven and on
the resistance (e.g. uphill), the gear-changing
points are shifted towards higher or lower enginespeed ranges. The accelerator movement, driving
speed, longitudinal and lateral acceleration and
the road profile all have an influence on the gearchanging characteristic.
When PSM is switched off, the gear-changing
points are shifted towards higher engine-speed
ranges.
The bend is taken in a suitable gear. It is not necessary to change down when accelerating out of the
bend.
Moving off
The vehicle moves off in 2nd gear if little throttle
is used. The vehicle moves off in 1st gear when
the throttle is open wider or when the engine is
cold (Cayenne S only).
The vehicle generally moves off in 1st gear when
PSM is switched off or when Sport mode is
switched on.
Shifting gears on the steering wheel
With the rocker switches on the steering wheel,
you can change temporarily from automatic
selection mode D to manual mode M.
Advantages
– Shifting down before bends and on entering
built-up areas.
Unwanted upward shifts, e.g. before bends, are
prevented by swiftly releasing the accelerator
pedal.
– Shifting down on downward slopes (engine
braking).
Depending on lateral acceleration, upward
changes on bends are not made until the enginespeed limit is reached.
– Selecting 1st or 2nd gear for moving off.
Under braking, and depending on the amount of
deceleration, the Tiptronic changes down earlier.
For subsequent cornering, the right gear is
engaged when pressure is applied to the brakes
before the bend.
– for cornering (depending on the lateral
acceleration) and overrunning,
The system leaves manual selection mode again:
– automatically after around 8 seconds
(unless vehicle is cornering, overrunning or
stationary),
– if you depress the accelerator to kickdown.
Temporary change-down
Precondition
– Speed is higher than approx. 54 km/h
(33 mph).
f Depress accelerator quickly.
Tiptronic temporarily changes to the sportiest
gear-changing map, i.e. to the highest possible
gear-changing points. Correspondingly, the
transmission shifts down immediately by one,
two or three gears.
Ending the function
f Release the accelerator markedly
(by approx. 25 %).
– Shifting down for brief spurts of acceleration.
The manual selection mode remains engaged:
– when the vehicle is stationary
(e.g. at a junction).
Driving and Driving Safety
175
Kickdown
The kickdown function is active in selector lever
position D.
f For optimum acceleration, e.g. when
overtaking, depress the accelerator pedal
beyond the full-throttle point (kickdown).
The transmission shifts down depending on the
speed of travel and engine speed.
Upward shifts occur at the highest possible engine
speeds.
These gear-changing speeds remain active until
the accelerator is released to approx. 80 % of the
full-throttle position.
D – Automatic selection mode
(in the off-road driving programme with
reduction)
The functions of selector lever positions D and M
differ in the High Range on-road driving
programme and the Low Range off-road driving
programme.
f Use selector lever position D for “normal”
driving.
The gears are shifted automatically according
to the accelerator position and speed.
The gear-changing points are chosen to achieve
the best possible vehicle control on difficult
terrain.
176
Driving and Driving Safety
Depending on the route profile, the gear-changing
points are shifted towards higher or lower enginespeed ranges. On steep downhill stretches,
upward shifts are prevented until medium engine
speeds are reached (at least 2,500 rpm).
When the vehicle is overrunning, an automatic
upshift does not occur when the engine speed
limit is reached.
Moving off
The vehicle moves off in 1st gear.
Shifting gears on the steering wheel
With the rocker switches on the steering wheel,
you can change temporarily from automatic
selection mode D to manual mode M.
Advantages
– Shifting down on downward slopes (engine
braking).
– Shifting down for brief spurts of acceleration.
– Selecting 1st, 2nd or 3rd gear for moving off.
The manual selection mode remains engaged:
– for overrunning,
– depending on lateral acceleration,
– when the vehicle is stationary
(e.g. at a junction).
The system leaves manual selection mode again:
– automatically after around 8 seconds
(unless vehicle is subject to high lateral
acceleration, overrunning or is stationary),
– if you depress the accelerator to kickdown.
Kickdown
The kickdown function is active in selector lever
position D.
f For optimum acceleration, e.g. when
overtaking, depress the accelerator pedal
beyond the full-throttle point (kickdown).
The transmission shifts down depending on the
speed of travel and engine speed.
Upward shifts occur at the highest possible engine
speeds.
These gear-changing speeds remain active until
the accelerator is released to approx. 80 % of the
full-throttle position.
Tip on driving
Unlike in the on-road driving programme, an
automatic upshift is not performed in manual
selection mode M when the engine-speed limit is
reached.
Tip on driving
The kickdown function is not active in selector
lever position M.
The kickdown function cannot be used to
downshift in selector lever position M. When
accelerating (e.g. to overtake), you must therefore change down manually.
Shifting up
f Press upper part (+) of a rocker switch A or
f Push selector lever B forward in the M gate.
Shifting down
f Press lower part (–) of a rocker switch A or
f Push selector lever B back in the M gate.
M – Manual selection mode
(in the on-road driving programme)
The functions of selector lever positions D and M
differ in the High Range on-road driving
programme and the Low Range off-road driving
programme.
Depending on driving speed and engine speed,
you can shift up or down at any time. However,
gear changes which would exceed the upper or
lower engine-speed limit are not executed by the
control unit.
You can change down two gears by quickly
pressing the rocker switches A or selector lever B
twice.
If PSM is active and the engine-speed limit is
reached, an automatic upward shift is performed
or, just before idling speed is reached, a
downward shift is performed.
f Select an appropriately low gear on upward
and downward slopes.
This will ensure optimum use of engine power
and engine braking.
If manual mode fails, the control electronics
switches to automatic mode.
In this event, the instrument panel will display
selector lever position D.
f Have the fault remedied. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop. We recommend that you
use a Porsche partner for this work since
these are staffed with trained personnel and
have the necessary parts and tools.
The currently selected gear is retained if you
change from D to M.
If you change from M to D, the gear-changing map
suitable for your current driving style is selected
and the appropriate gear is selected.
Driving and Driving Safety
177
M - Manual selection mode
(in the off-road driving programme)
The functions of selector lever positions D and M
differ in the High Range on-road driving
programme and the Low Range off-road driving
programme.
Shifting down
Stopping
f Push selector lever B back in the M gate.
f For a brief stop (e.g. at a traffic light), leave the
selector lever in drive position and hold the
vehicle with the brake pedal.
f Press lower part (–) of a rocker switch A or
The currently selected gear is retained if you
change from D to M.
Depending on driving speed and engine speed,
you can shift up or down at any time. However,
gear changes which would exceed the upper or
lower engine-speed limit are not executed by the
control unit.
If you change from M to D, the gear-changing map
suitable for your current driving style is selected
and the appropriate gear is selected.
You can change down two gears by quickly
pressing the rocker switches A or selector lever B
twice.
Tip on driving
The gear is changed down automatically just
before idle speed is reached.
The kickdown function is not active in selector
lever position M. Unlike in the on-road driving
programme, an automatic upshift is not
performed when the engine-speed limit is
reached.
Shifting up
f Press upper part (+) of a rocker switch A or
f Push selector lever B forward in the M gate.
178
Driving and Driving Safety
f Select an appropriately low gear on upward
and downward slopes.
This will ensure optimum use of engine power
and engine braking.
If manual mode fails, the control electronics
switches to automatic mode. In this event, the
instrument panel will display selector lever
position D.
f Have the fault remedied. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop. We recommend that you
use a Porsche partner for this work since
these are staffed with trained personnel and
have the necessary parts and tools.
f Do not hold the car on a slope using the
accelerator. Use the brake pedal or the
parking brake instead.
f Before leaving the vehicle, always apply the
parking brake and move the selector lever to
position P.
Tip on driving
In selector lever positions D and M, the hillholder
function makes it easier to move off from a standstill on an upward slope when the engine is
running. The driver does not have to apply the
brake.
f For information on using the hillholder function:
Please observe the chapter “HILLHOLDER –
MOVING-OFF ASSISTANT ON VEHICLES WITH
TIPTRONIC S” on Page 197.
Parking
f Go easy on the accelerator.
f When parking or manoeuvring in a small
space, control the speed by careful use of the
footbrake.
Driving in winter
In wintry road conditions it is advisable to take
steep inclines in manual mode M. This prevents
the occurrence of gear changes that could cause
wheelspin.
Reduced driving programme
If there is a fault in the transmission:
– An X appears instead of the current gear
indication on the multi-purpose display of the
instrument panel.
The transmission no longer shifts.
f Have the fault remedied. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop. We recommend that you
use a Porsche partner for this work since
these are staffed with trained personnel and
have the necessary parts and tools.
Warning!
Risk of accident and damage.
Reverse-lock monitoring does not function in
the reduced driving programme.
f Do not select position R while driving.
Tip on driving
3rd or 5th gear in selector position D and reverse
gear R are now available and will allow you to
reach the nearest qualified workshop.
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Selector lever emergency operation
In the event of an electrical fault, the selector
lever lock in position P can be manually released
(e.g. for towing the vehicle).
1. Fold up armrest.
2. Remove key B from the lower oddments tray
(underneath the rubber mat) in the centre
console.
Driving and Driving Safety
179
3. Undo screws A with key B.
4. Remove trim mounting F.
5. Lift trim C at rear and carefully pull it off.
6. Unplug plug connection D.
7. Press foam aside.
8. Press locking lever E aside (to the left) using a
suitable object.
9. Move selector lever to position N.
10.Reassemble in reverse order.
180
Driving and Driving Safety
With rocker switch A, you can easily select the
appropriate driving programme to suit the special
requirements for the respective terrain.
Low Range off-road programme
(with reduction)
When the Low Range off-road driving programme
is active, the power transmission and running-gear
control systems are automatically adapted to the
requirements for off-road driving.
High Range on-road driving programme
(without reduction)
When the High Range on-road driving programme
is active, the power transmission and running-gear
control systems are automatically adapted to the
requirements for on-road driving.
Driving programmes for on-road
and off-road driving
Two different driving programmes with special
power-transmission and running-gear control
systems (such as ABS, off-road ABS and PSM,
etc.) are provided in your Porsche with the aim of
realising the best possible driving dynamics
combined with maximum safety on the road.
All control systems meet these requirements for
both off-road and on-road driving.
Operation and use
The rocker switch A is located in the centre
console of the vehicle. It features a multi-step
function and can be operated in both directions.
Each time the rocker switch is pushed forward,
the vehicle becomes one step more suitable for
off-road driving. This is realised by changing from
the on-road driving programme to the off-road
programme or by engaging the differential locks in
stages.
The number of differential locks that can be
engaged in the Low Range driving programme
depends on the equipment of your vehicle.
Each time the rocker switch is pushed back, the
vehicle becomes one step more suitable for onroad driving.
Once the driving programme has been selected,
the rocker switch springs back to home position.
Notes on operation
If the Low Range indicator light next to the rocker
switch flashes rapidly after the ignition is
switched on, there is a fault in the shifting
system.
f Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Driving and Driving Safety
181
f Push rocker switch A forward until activation of
the off-road driving programme is indicated on
the multi-purpose display of the instrument
panel and by illumination of light-emitting
diode B.
The Low Range indicator light on the instrument panel and the light-emitting diode B next
to the rocker switch flash several times
during the shifting process.
Low Range is now engaged.
Low Range indicator light
If the Low Range indicator light next to the rocker
switch flashes when you attempt to operate
rocker switch A, then at least one condition for
shifting has not been met:
Vehicles with manual transmission
– Vehicle is not stationary.
– Brake is not pressed.
Caution!
– Gearshift lever in not in neutral.
Risk of engine damage (overrevving). In the
Low Range programme, the gear-shifting
points are shifted towards lower enginespeed ranges.
Vehicles with Tiptronic S
– Vehicle has exceeded or gone below the limit
speed.
– Tiptronic selector lever is not in position N.
A - Rocker switch
B - Low Range is engaged
Changing from on-road driving
programme to off-road driving
programme
Vehicles with manual transmission
f Stop the vehicle.
f Apply the brake.
f Put the gearshift lever in neutral.
182
Driving and Driving Safety
f Shift early to prevent overrevving the engine.
f Push rocker switch A forwards in stages until
engagement of the centre differential lock is
indicated on the multi-purpose display of the
instrument panel and by illumination of the two
light-emitting diodes B and C.
The centre differential lock is changed over to
fully engaged state by the automatic control
system.
Vehicles with Tiptronic S
f Reduce speed to below 15 km/h (9 mph) or
stop vehicle.
f Move Tiptronic selector lever to position N.
f Push rocker switch A forward until activation of
the off-road driving programme is indicated on
the multi-purpose display of the instrument
panel and by illumination of light-emitting
diode B.
The Low Range indicator light on the instrument panel and the light-emitting diode B next
to the rocker switch flash several times
during the shifting process.
Low Range is now engaged.
Danger!
The Tiptronic selector lever is blocked during
shifting. Shifting when driving uphill can
cause the vehicle to stand still or even roll
backwards as long as the shift operation has
not been completed. When driving downhill,
the vehicle can accelerate unintentionally
while shifting.
f Increased brake readiness is required.
A - Rocker switch
B - Low Range is engaged
C - Centre differential lock is fully engaged
Fully engaging the centre differential lock
in Low Range
Tip on driving
When the centre differential lock is fully engaged,
there is no longer any speed difference between
the front and rear axles. If, for example, both
wheels on the front axle lose traction on an icy
road or soft surface, the rigid drive-through
function will permit the vehicle to continue moving
nevertheless.
Driving and Driving Safety
183
f Push rocker switch A forwards in stages until
engagement of the rear differential lock is
indicated on the multi-purpose display of the
instrument panel and by illumination of the
three light-emitting diodes B, C and D.
The centre and rear differential locks are
changed over to fully engaged state by the
automatic control system.
Note on operation
The rear differential lock can be engaged only
while the engine is running.
ABCD-
Rocker switch
Low Range is engaged
Centre differential lock is fully engaged
Rear differential lock is fully engaged
Fully engaging the rear differential lock in
Low Range
Tip on driving
When the rear differential lock is fully engaged,
there is no longer any speed difference between
the two rear wheels. If, for example, one drive
wheel on the rear axle loses traction on an icy road
or soft surface, the rigid drive-through function will
permit the vehicle to continue moving nevertheless.
184
Driving and Driving Safety
Indicator light and warnings
Indication of a fault by:
– Continuous illumination of the light-emitting
diode in the button,
– Illumination of the warning light on the instrument panel,
– A message on the multi-purpose display of the
instrument panel.
For information on warning messages on the
multi-purpose display: Please observe the
chapter “OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES”
on Page 150.
f Adapt your driving behaviour to the changed
conditions.
Drive slowly to the nearest qualified specialist
workshop and have the fault remedied.
We recommend that you use a Porsche
partner for this work since these are staffed
with trained personnel and have the necessary
parts and tools.
Changing from off-road driving
programme to on-road driving
programme
Vehicles with manual transmission
f Stop the vehicle.
f Apply the brake.
f Put the gearshift lever in neutral.
f Pull rocker switch A back in stages until lightemitting diodes B, C and, where appropriate, D are out.
The Low Range indicator light on the instrument panel and the light-emitting diode B next
to the rocker switch flash several times
during the shifting process.
High Range is now engaged.
Vehicles with Tiptronic S
f Reduce speed to below 30 km/h (19 mph) or
stop vehicle.
f Move Tiptronic selector lever to position N.
f Pull rocker switch A back in stages until lightemitting diodes B, C and, where appropriate, D are out.
The Low Range indicator light on the instrument panel and the light-emitting diode B next
to the rocker switch flash several times
during the shifting process.
High Range is now engaged.
Danger!
The Tiptronic selector lever is blocked during
shifting. Shifting when driving uphill can
cause the vehicle to stand still or even roll
backwards as long as the shift operation has
not been completed. When driving downhill,
the vehicle can accelerate unintentionally
while shifting.
f Increased brake readiness is required.
Driving and Driving Safety
185
– PDCC (Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control) is
automatically set to Sport mode, and this
further reduces the roll tendency of the
vehicle.
– The air suspension automatically changes to
the low level setting.
– The Tiptronic S transmission changes to a
sportier shift strategy.
The gear-changing points are shifted to higher
speed ranges. Upward shifts are initiated later,
and deceleration shifts are performed earlier.
The vehicle moves off in 1st gear.
– The electronic accelerator pedal reacts
sooner, and the engine is more responsive to
throttle inputs.
Sport Mode
Function
The sports exhaust system is switched on and a
sportier car set-up is obtained when Sport mode
is switched on.
Interventions by the Porsche control systems are
intentionally shifted towards greater agility and
driving performance.
– PASM (Porsche Active Suspension Management) is automatically changed to Sport mode,
resulting in a stiffer suspension setup.
186
Driving and Driving Safety
– Sporty engine tuning is activated.
f For further information:
Please observe the chapter “PORSCHE ACTIVE
SUSPENSION MANAGEMENT (PASM)” on
Page 204.
Please observe the chapter “PORSCHE
DYNAMIC CHASSIS CONTROL (PDCC)” on
Page 205.
Switching Sport mode on and off
Sport mode can be activated when the ignition is
switched on and when the on-road driving
programme High Range (without reduction) is
selected.
f Press SPORT button E in the centre console.
When Sport mode is switched on, the lightemitting diode F in the SPORT button is lit.
When Sport mode is switched on, the logo SPORT
appears on the multi-purpose display.
After the ignition is switched off, Sport mode is
automatically reset to Normal mode.
Warning messages
A warning appears on the multi-purpose display of
the instrument panel in the event of a fault.
f For information on warning messages on the
multi-purpose display:
Please observe the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 150.
Vehicles with air suspension
If you wish to use the characteristics of Sport
mode and the sports exhaust system, but would
like a more comfortable running-gear setup, you
can:
– switch PASM and PDCC separately to Normal
or Comfort mode and/or
– raise the ride height of the vehicle.
f Press the corresponding PASM button in the
centre console. The light-emitting diode in the
button of the selected running-gear setup
lights up.
In addition, the selected running-gear setup is
shown on the multi-purpose display of the
instrument panel for approx. 12 seconds.
Please observe the chapter “PORSCHE ACTIVE
SUSPENSION MANAGEMENT (PASM)” on
Page 204.
Please observe the chapter “PORSCHE
DYNAMIC CHASSIS CONTROL (PDCC)” on
Page 205.
f Press the rocker switch in the centre console
forward. The corresponding light-emitting
diode next to the rocker switch lights up continuously after the adjustment process. The level
change is also indicated on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel.
Please observe the chapter “AIR SUSPENSION
WITH LEVEL CONTROL AND HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT” on Page 200.
Driving and Driving Safety
187
Power-transmission and running-gear control systems
A complex network of all control systems acting in power transmission and in the running gear has been realised in your Porsche.
All control systems are networked with the aim of combining the best possible driving performance with maximum safety.
The following systems are involved:
System/designation
Scope
PTM
Porsche Traction Management
– Full-time all-wheel drive
– Electronically controlled centre differential lock
– Automatic brake differential (ABD)
– Traction control system (TCS)
– Reduction gear/Low Range
PTM Plus
Porsche Traction Management
In addition to the PTM features, PTM Plus also includes:
PSM
Porsche Stability Management
– Stability management system
– Electronically controlled rear differential lock
– Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
– Brake system prefilling
– Brake booster
– Traction control system (TCS)
– Automatic brake differential (ABD)
– Engine drag torque control (MSR)
Air suspension
with level control and height adjustment
– Full load bearing air spring struts with integral shock absorbers
PASM
Porsche Active Suspension Management
– Shock absorber system with adaptive, continuous shock absorber control
PDCC
Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control
– Active chassis control system to stabilise roll tendency of vehicle body when driving
188
Driving and Driving Safety
– Air supply system with pressure accumulator
Porsche Traction Management (PTM)
Porsche Traction Management is a full-time allwheel control system designed to influence the
longitudinal and lateral dynamics. It is closely
linked with the Porsche Stability Management
(PSM) control system.
PTM ensures the best possible power distribution
to the four driven wheels at the front and rear
axles. The system realises this optimal traction by
intervening in the lock control function of the
transfer box and rear differential. PTM is active at
all times and, unlike PSM, cannot be switched off.
Advantages of PTM
– Obvious improvement in traction, driving
stability and steering ability of the vehicle.
– Vehicle is more manageable when driven at its
performance limits.
– Improved straight-ahead tracking and stability.
– The above features allow for a sportier setup
of the running gear.
– TCS and ABD further enhance traction for all
wheels.
Safety notes!
Safety notes!
In spite of the advantages of PTM, it is still the
driver’s responsibility to adapt his driving style and
manoeuvres in line with road and weather conditions, as well as the traffic situation.
In spite of the advantages of four-wheel drive, it is
still the driver’s responsibility to adapt his driving
style and manoeuvres in line with road and
weather conditions, as well as the traffic situation.
The increased safety that is provided should not
induce you to take greater risks with your safety.
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be
overcome, even with PTM.
Risks of accident due to inappropriate speed
cannot be reduced by PTM.
The increased safety that is provided should not
induce you to take greater risks with your safety.
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be
overcome, even with four-wheel drive.
Risks of accident due to inappropriate speed
cannot be reduced by four-wheel drive.
Full-time all-wheel drive
With the four-wheel drive, the drive power is
variably distributed to the front and rear wheels.
Power distribution and wheel speed compensation
between the front and rear axles is realised with a
transfer box.
Distribution of the drive power depends on the
wheel speed difference between the two axles.
The transfer box always controls power distribution in such a way that optimal propulsion is
achieved, even on an unfavourable road surface.
Full-time all-wheel drive ensures optimum handling
and a high level of driving stability.
Driving and Driving Safety
189
Automatic brake differential (ABD)
The ABD system controls the front and rear axles
separately. If one wheel of an axle starts to spin,
it is braked so that the other wheel on the same
axle can be driven.
ABD recognises different driving states, and it
features control strategies adapted to these
states. In situations in which little propulsive power
is required, such as when the vehicle moves off on
a level gravel surface, traction control already
becomes active at low engine speeds. If a large
amount of propulsive power is required, such as
when moving off on an uphill slope or for rapid
acceleration, the ABD system is adapted accordingly.
A special off-road driving programme is used in
Low Range mode.
Traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the wheels
from spinning by adjusting the engine power,
thereby ensuring good lane-holding ability and
stable handling.
190
Driving and Driving Safety
Porsche Stability Management (PSM)
PSM is an active control system for stabilisation of
the vehicle during extreme driving manoeuvres. It
is networked with the Porsche Traction Management (PTM) system.
PSM makes use of both the ABD and TCS
systems, as well as the known functions of the
anti-lock brake system (ABS) and engine drag
torque control system (MSR).
Safety notes!
In spite of the advantages of PSM, it is still the
driver’s responsibility to adapt his driving style and
manoeuvres in line with road and weather conditions, as well as the traffic situation.
The increased safety that is provided should not
induce you to take greater risks with your safety.
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be
overcome, even with PSM.
Risks of accident due to inappropriate speed
cannot be reduced by PSM.
Advantages of PSM
– Best possible traction and lane-holding ability
in all driving situations – even on road surfaces
with varying friction.
– The system compensates for undesired
vehicle reactions (Ferraria effect) when the
driver releases the accelerator pedal or brakes
on bends. This compensation functions up to
the maximum lateral acceleration.
– PSM actively stabilises the vehicle as required
during dynamic driving manoeuvres (e.g. rapid
steering movements, during lane changes or
on alternating bends).
– Improved braking stability on bends and on
different or varying road surfaces.
– Improved brake functioning and reduced
stopping distance in the event of emergency
braking.
Readiness for operation
PSM is switched on automatically every time you
start the engine.
The events below inform the driver of PSM control
operations and warn him to adapt his driving style
to the road conditions:
Function
– The multi-functional information light on the
instrument panel flashes.
Sensors at the wheels, brakes, steering system
and engine continuously measure:
– Light in the PSM Off button flashes.
– Speed
– Hydraulic noises can be heard.
– Direction of travel (steering angle)
– The vehicle decelerates and steering-wheel
forces are altered as PSM controls the brakes.
– Lateral acceleration
– Reduced engine power.
– Longitudinal acceleration
– The brake pedal vibrates and its position is
changed during braking.
In order to achieve full vehicle deceleration,
foot pressure must be increased after the
brake pedal has begun vibrating.
– Rate of turn about the vertical axis
PSM uses these values to determine the direction
of travel desired by the driver.
PSM intervenes and corrects the course if the
actual direction of motion deviates from the
desired course (steering-wheel position):
It brakes individual wheels as needed. If necessary, PSM additionally influences the engine power
or the gear-changing characteristic of Tiptronic in
order to stabilise the vehicle.
Examples of PSM control operations
– If the front wheels of the vehicle drift on a
bend, the engine power is reduced and the
rear wheel on the inside of the bend is braked
if necessary.
– If the rear of the vehicle swings out on a bend,
the front wheel on the outside of the bend is
braked.
– Brake system prefilling:
The brake system is prepared for possible
subsequent emergency braking if the accelerator pedal is released suddenly and quickly.
The brake system is prefilled and the brake
pads are already applied gently to the brake
discs.
– Brake booster:
In the event of an emergency braking operation
where the pedal force is insufficient, a brake
booster provides the braking pressure necessary for maximum deceleration at all 4 wheels.
Combined operation of PSM and PTM/PTM
Plus
In order to ensure optimum stabilisation of the
vehicle, the centre differential lock (PTM) and
where appropriate also the rear differential lock
(PTM Plus) are also opened when PSM interventions occur.
Tip on driving
When PSM is switched off, wheel-specific brake
interventions and the traction control system
(TCS) are also inactive.
The automatic brake differential (ABD) remains on.
Driving and Driving Safety
191
PSM should always be switched on during
“normal” driving.
However, it may be advantageous to switch off
PSM temporarily in exceptional situations:
Off-road PSM
(PSM in Low Range off-road programme)
When the Low Range off-road driving programme
is active, an off-road PSM specially matched to offroad driving is activated to enhance traction.
– On a loose surface and in deep snow,
In order to improve driveability on difficult terrain,
the response of the off-road PSM is less sensitive
in the low speed range when the vehicle is
operated in the Low Range off-road driving
programme.
– When “rocking the vehicle free” and
– When using snow chains.
Tiptronic vehicles: When PSM is switched off,
the slip monitoring function of Tiptronic is also
deactivated.
If the brakes are highly stressed, the automatic
brake differential (ABD) switches itself off to
protect the brakes. It remains deactivated until the
brake system has cooled sufficiently again.
Engine drag torque control (MSR)
In conditions of excessive slip, the engine drag
torque control system prevents all driven wheels
locking up when the vehicle is overrunning. This is
also the case for downshifts on a slippery road.
Switching off PSM
f Press PSM OFF button A.
PSM is switched off after a short delay.
The light-emitting diode in the button is lit up.
When PSM is switched off, the multi-functional
PSM light on the instrument panel lights up
and a message appears on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel.
During braking, the vehicle is stabilised even
when PSM is switched off.
One-sided spinning of the wheels is prevented,
even with PSM switched off.
192
Driving and Driving Safety
Multifunctional PSM light
– The multi-functional light on the instrument
panel lights up for a lamp check when the
ignition is switched on.
– The light indicates a control operation,
including when PSM is switched off (brake
control in the event of one-sided wheel spin).
– In conjunction with the multi-purpose display on
the instrument panel, the light indicates that
PSM is switched off.
– Faults are displayed by the light in conjunction
with the multi-purpose display of the instrument panel.
PSM is out of order.
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Collapsible spare wheel
f Never switch off PSM when driving with a
collapsible spare wheel.
Towing
f For information on towing:
Please observe the chapter “TOWING AND
TOW-STARTING” on Page 352.
Tip on driving
When PSM is switched off, wheel-specific brake
interventions and the traction control system
(TCS) are also inactive.
The automatic brake differential (ABD) remains on.
Switching PSM back on
f Press PSM OFF button A.
PSM is switched on after a short delay.
The light-emitting diode in the button and the
multi-functional PSM light on the instrument
panel go out.
A message is shown on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel.
Driving and Driving Safety
193
Vehicle-trailer combination stabilisation
(depending on country-specific vehicle equipment)
Vehicle-trailer combination stabilisation is an
assistance function for driving with trailers as part
of Porsche Stability Management (PSM).
Vehicle-trailer combination stabilisation detects
snaking of the vehicle-trailer combination.
If such critical driving situations are detected, the
vehicle-trailer combination stabilisation function
brakes the vehicle until the combination is stabilised.
The vehicle-trailer combination cannot be stabilised in all driving situations. Slippery roads or a
loose surface can cause the trailer to jackknife,
for example. Trailers with a high centre of gravity
can tip over.
f Steer carefully during the control process.
f For further information on driving with a trailer:
Please observe the chapter “DRIVING WITH A
TRAILER” on Page 242.
Danger!
Risk of accident.
In spite of the advantages of vehicle-trailer
combination stabilisation, it is still the
driver’s responsibility to adapt his driving
style and manoeuvres in line with road and
weather conditions, as well as the traffic
situation.
The increased safety that is provided should
not induce you to take greater risks with your
safety. The limits set by the physics of driving
cannot be overcome, even with vehicletrailer combination stabilisation.
Risks of accident due to inappropriate speed
cannot be reduced by vehicle-trailer combination stabilisation.
Risk of accident.
The vehicle-trailer combination cannot be
stabilised if the trailer jackknifes (e.g. on
slippery roads or on loose surfaces).
f Adjust your driving style to the road conditions.
Risk of accident.
Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip
over.
f Adjust your driving style.
194
Driving and Driving Safety
Risk of accident.
Excessive speed under the prevailing driving
conditions can lead to loss of control of the
vehicle-trailer combination.
f When using the vehicle with a trailer, drive at a
speed appropriate to road and traffic conditions, as well as adjusted to the loading situation.
f Never exceed a speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph).
Preconditions
– Trailer plug is plugged in,
– The trailer is in perfect technical condition.
Readiness for operation
– Vehicle-trailer combination stabilisation is
active when PSM is switched on.
f Observe country-specific laws for driving with
trailers.
Notes on operation
– Vehicle-trailer combination stabilisation is
switched off when PSM is switched off.
– When the brake pedal is pressed, vehicletrailer combination stabilisation is active even
if PSM is switched off.
– On vehicles with electrically folding trailer
hitch, the hitch must be fully extended and in
its end position.
Driving and Driving Safety
195
ABS brake system
(anti-lock brake system)
Safety notes!
In spite of the advantages of ABS, it is still the
driver’s responsibility to adapt his driving style and
manoeuvres in line with road and weather conditions, as well as the traffic situation.
The increased safety that is provided should not
induce you to take greater risks with your safety.
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be
overcome, even with ABS.
Risks of accident due to inappropriate speed
cannot be reduced by ABS.
ABS ensures
– Full steering control
The vehicle remains steerable
– Good driving stability
No skidding due to locked wheels
– Optimum braking distance
Shorter stopping distances in most cases
– Prevention of wheel locking
No flat spots on the tyres
196
Driving and Driving Safety
Function
The decisive advantage of ABS is in the driving
stability and manoeuvrability of the vehicle in
hazardous situations.
The ABS prevents locking of the wheels during full
braking, on almost all road surfaces, until shortly
before the vehicle stops.
The ABS begins to control the braking process as
soon as a wheel shows a tendency to lock.
This controlled braking process is comparable
with extremely rapid cadence braking.
The pulsating brake pedal and a “juddering noise”
warn the driver to adapt his driving speed to the
road conditions.
If full braking is necessary, fully depress the brake
pedal during the whole braking operation, even
though the pedal is pulsating. Do not reduce the
braking pressure.
Warning light
If the ABS warning lights light up on the instrument
panel and on the multi-purpose display of the
instrument panel while the engine is running, ABS
has switched off because of a fault.
In this case, the braking system will operate
without lock prevention, as in vehicles without
ABS.
f Adapt your driving style to the changed
braking behaviour.
The ABS system must be checked immediately
in order to prevent the occurrence of further
faults with effects which cannot be defined.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
The ABS control unit is adjusted for the approved
tyre dimensions.
The use of tyres with non-approved dimensions
can lead to different wheel speeds, causing ABS
to switch off.
Off-road ABS
(ABS in Low Range off-road programme)
When the Low Range off-road driving programme
is active, an ABS configuration specially matched
to off-road driving is activated automatically.
In the event of braking on loose ground, the
permissible slip values for ABS braking are
increased so that the off-road braking distance is
reduced (wheels dig into the surface).
If the driver needs to steer, this off-road driving
programme is automatically switched off to
maintain steerability.
Hillholder –
moving-off assistant on vehicles with
Tiptronic S
In Tiptronic selector lever positions D and M, the
hillholder function makes it easier to move off
from a stand-still on an upward slope when the
engine is running. The driver does not have to
apply the brake.
The hillholder function is not active:
– In Tiptronic selector lever positions N and R,
– In the reduced driving programme and
Safety notes!
In spite of the advantages of the hillholder
function, it is still the driver’s responsibility to
adapt his driving style and manoeuvres in line with
the prevailing conditions.
The increased safety that is provided should not
induce you to take greater risks with your safety.
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be
overcome, even with the hillholder function.
Driving in limit situations should be avoided, e.g.
on icy slopes or on slippery surfaces. Assistance
by the hillholder is not guaranteed in these and
similar cases.
– If not all of the wheels are touching the ground
(on difficult terrain, for example).
f For further information on moving off with the
hillholder function on vehicles with Tiptronic S:
Please observe the chapter “STOPPING” on
Page 178.
Driving and Driving Safety
197
Porsche Drive-Off Assistant –
Moving-off assistant on vehicles with
manual transmission
The Porsche Drive-Off Assistant is an assistance
function which helps the driver move off on
upward slopes. The vehicle must have sufficient
road contact.
The Porsche Drive-Off Assistant is available for
slopes with a gradient as from around 5 %.
Danger!
Risk of accident.
Assistance by the Porsche DriveOff Assistant is not guaranteed when moving
off on a slippery surface (e.g. on icy or loose
surfaces). In this case, the vehicle could slip.
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot
be overcome, even with the Porsche DriveOff Assistant. The responsibility for moving
off on upward slopes is still the driver’s
despite the Porsche Drive-Off Assistant.
f Always adjust your driving style to the driving
conditions and vehicle load, use the footbrake
if necessary.
198
Driving and Driving Safety
Moving off with Porsche Drive-Off Assistant
Note on operation
1. Hold the vehicle securely on the slope with the
footbrake or parking brake.
The engine must be running.
The Porsche Drive-Off Assistant is not active:
2. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
3. Engage a gear corresponding to the direction
of travel up the slope (1st gear or reverse
gear).
4. While keeping the clutch pedal depressed,
release the footbrake or foot-operated parking
brake.
The vehicle is held on the slope.
5. Move off as usual.
– In the event of shift to neutral.
– When changing gears.
– If the engine is not running.
Danger!
Risk of accident.
If the Porsche Drive-Off Assistant is not
active, the vehicle will no longer be held on
the slope.
f Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.
Engine Braking Support
(assistance when driving downhill)
The Engine Braking Support system is an assistance system which helps the driver when driving
slowly downhill at speeds up to approx. 20 km/h
(12 mph), e.g. on steep slopes or on wintry
mountain roads.
Engine Braking Support is active and brakes the
vehicle as long as the accelerator is not used
when travelling downhill.
If road grip is lost on one or more wheels, the
system brakes the wheels which have good road
contact.
Like all brakes, the braking ability of the Engine
Braking Support system is impaired by slippery
surfaces (e.g. on icy or loose surfaces).
Warning!
Risk of accident. Reduced braking ability on
a slippery surface.
f Always adjust your driving style to the driving
situation.
Preconditions:
Checks on test stands
– The accelerator must not be used when travelling downhill.
Performance test
– The speed must not exceed approx. 20 km/h
(12 mph).
– Vehicles with Tiptronic S: Tiptronic selector
lever position D, M or R must be engaged.
– Vehicles with manual transmission: A gear
must be engaged (1st – 6th or R). The clutch
pedal must not be used when travelling
downhill.
Performance tests on roller test stands are not
approved by Porsche.
Brake tests
Brake tests must be carried out only in the High
Range on-road driving programme and on platetype or roller test stands.
The following limit values must not be exceeded
on roller test stands:
Tip on driving
– Test speed 7.5 km/h (4.7 mph)
The Engine Braking Support system is active when
driving downhill either forwards or backwards.
– Test duration 20 seconds
Parking brake test
Parking brake tests on the brake test stand must
be performed only with the ignition switched off
and with the Tiptronic selector lever in position N
or with the gearshift lever in neutral position.
Balancing wheels on the vehicle
During finish balancing of the wheels, the entire
vehicle must be lifted and the wheels must be free
to turn.
Driving and Driving Safety
199
Note on operation
Frequent level changes can cause the compressor
to overheat. In this case, the compressor must
cool for several minutes before level adjustment is
fully functional again.
Normal level
The ground clearance at normal level is approx.
215 mm.
Off-road level
Air suspension with level control
and height adjustment
On vehicles with air suspension, the driver can set
five different levels.
The preselected level is automatically adapted to
suit the vehicle speed.
The height of the vehicle is automatically kept
constant when the vehicle is loaded.
Tip on driving
It is not permissible to drive on public roads with
the vehicle in the off-road or special terrain
setting.
200
Driving and Driving Safety
This level is intended for off-road driving, field
paths and forest paths, etc.
The vehicle is raised by around 26 mm compared
with normal level.
Off-road level can be selected only manually at
speeds below approx. 80 km/h (50 mph).
The vehicle is automatically lowered to normal
level at speeds exceeding approx. 80 km/h
(50 mph).
The vehicle is automatically raised to off-road level
when the Low Range driving programme is
selected.
Special terrain level
This setting is intended only for extremely
challenging terrain requiring maximum ground
clearance. The vehicle is raised by around 56 mm
compared with normal level.
The warning light on the instrument panel lights up
when special terrain level has been reached.
Special terrain level can be selected only at
speeds below around 30 km/h (19 mph).
The vehicle is automatically lowered to off-road
level at speeds exceeding approx. 30 km/h
(19 mph).
Low level
This level is intended for high-speed driving. The
vehicle is automatically lowered by approx.
27 mm compared with normal level above speeds
of around 125 km/h (78 mph).
The level is automatically raised to normal level if
the speed drops to below around 40 km/h
(25 mph).
Note
If low level was set with the rocker switch in the
centre console, low level also remains active at
speeds below approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
Loading level
Caution!
Risk of damage to running-gear parts,
assemblies and the vehicle underbody.
The vehicle may bottom when driven down from
kerbs, for example, if the ground clearance is
insufficient at loading level.
f Always switch to normal level before moving
off.
This setting makes it easier for you to load the
luggage compartment.
The vehicle is lowered by around 60 mm
compared with normal level.
The vehicle is automatically raised to normal level
at speeds exceeding approx. 5 km/h (3 mph).
Setting level manually
Preconditions
– Ignition on.
– Doors are closed.
Adjusting
f Move rocker switch in the appropriate direction.
This sets the next possible height.
Indication of selected level
The corresponding light-emitting diode next to the
rocker switch flashes during the adjustment
process. The light-emitting diode is lit continuously
after adjustment has been completed.
The level change is also indicated on the multipurpose display of the instrument panel.
1st actuation: Off-road level
Exceptions
Raising the vehicle
Automatic changes from normal level to low level
and back are not indicated on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel.
f Press rocker switch A forward once.
A message appears on the multi-purpose
display on the instrument panel and the yellow
light-emitting diode lights up when off-road
level is reached.
Note on operation
The level last selected is stored in the memory
after the ignition is switched off.
Driving and Driving Safety
201
2nd actuation: Special terrain level
f Press rocker switch A forward a second time.
A message appears on the multi-purpose
display on the instrument panel and the yellow
and red light-emitting diodes light up when
special terrain level is reached.
202
Driving and Driving Safety
1st actuation: Low level
Lowering the vehicle
f Pull rocker switch A back once.
A message appears on the multi-purpose
display on the instrument panel and the yellow
light-emitting diode lights up when low level is
reached.
2nd actuation: Loading level
f Pull rocker switch A back a second time.
A message appears on the multi-purpose
display on the instrument panel and the yellow
and red light-emitting diodes light up when
loading level is reached.
Warning message
Raising vehicle with the jack
Various messages are displayed on the multipurpose display on the instrument panel if there is
a system fault or if the compressor switches off
due to overload.
Whenever it is necessary to raise the vehicle using
the jack:
f For further information on warning messages
on the multi-purpose display:
Please observe the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 150.
f Adapt your driving style to the changed
conditions.
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop in
order to remedy a system fault. We recommend that you use a Porsche partner for this
work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
f If the overload-protection function causes the
compressor to switch off, wait for a time until
it has cooled down. The system will function
again as soon as it has cooled sufficiently.
The warning message appears when the control
system is switched off and when the collapsible
spare wheel is being filled. There is no fault
present in these cases.
The warning message will disappear once these
procedures have been completed.
f Manually set normal level and then switch off
level control.
Switching off level control
1. Switch ignition on.
2. Press rocker switch forward for
5 - 10 seconds.
A message is shown on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument cluster.
The vehicle can now be raised.
Switching level control back on
1. Switch ignition on.
2. Press rocker switch forward for
5 - 10 seconds or
3. Move off with the vehicle.
Level control switches on automatically.
Vehicle transport on car trains, ferries
and car transporters
f Lash the vehicle down only at its wheels.
Driving and Driving Safety
203
Porsche Active Suspension
Management (PASM)
Indication of the selected running-gear
setup
Various messages are shown on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel.
The light-emitting diode in the button of the
selected running-gear setup is lit.
In addition, the selected running-gear setup is
shown on the multi-purpose display of the instrument panel for approx. 12 seconds.
f For further information on warning messages
on the multi-purpose display:
Please observe the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 150.
Three different running-gear setups can be
selected at the push of a button:
– Comfort
– Normal
– Sport
If the running-gear setups “comfort” or “normal”
have been selected, the system automatically
changes the setup to “sport” when the vehicle is
driven in a sporty manner.
Warning light and warning
message
The warning light on the instrument panel lights up
if there is a system fault. A warning message is
shown on the multi-purpose display of the instrument panel.
f Adapt your driving style to the changed
conditions.
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop in
order to remedy the fault. We recommend that
you use a Porsche partner for this work since
these are staffed with trained personnel and
have the necessary parts and tools.
Selecting the running-gear setup
1. Switch ignition on.
2. Press the appropriate button.
Note on operation
The running-gear setup selected last is stored in
the memory after the ignition is switched off.
204
Driving and Driving Safety
Porsche Dynamic Chassis
Control (PDCC)
Function
Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control (PDCC) is a
system for roll stabilisation of the vehicle body
when driving. Driving comfort and driving safety
are improved by active intervention of the anti-roll
bars on the front and rear axles.
f For information on switching Low Range
reduction on and off:
Please observe the chapter “DRIVING
PROGRAMMES FOR ON-ROAD AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING” on Page 181.
Warning message
A warning message appears on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel if there is a system
fault.
No separate controls are available for the PDCC
system.
After selection of a running-gear setup in Porsche
Active Suspension Management (PASM):
f For further information on warning messages
on the multi-purpose display:
Please observe the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 150.
– comfort
f Adapt your driving style to the changed
conditions.
– normal
– sport
PDCC automatically activates the corresponding
on-road driving programme.
f For information on selecting a running-gear
setup: Please observe the chapter “PORSCHE
ACTIVE SUSPENSION MANAGEMENT (PASM)”
on Page 204.
Checking hydraulic fluid
Regular checking and changing of the hydraulic
fluid takes place
as part of servicing.
Further important information on “Maintenance”
can be found in a separate chapter.
f Please observe the chapter “NOTES ON
MAINTENANCE” on Page 264.
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop in
order to remedy the fault. We recommend that
you use a Porsche partner for this work since
these are staffed with trained personnel and
have the necessary parts and tools.
PDCC automatically activates the off-road driving
programme if Low Range reduction is switched
on.
Driving and Driving Safety
205
Off-road driving
Please read this chapter carefully before driving
off road with your Porsche.
The information provided will familiarise you with
the special advantages of your vehicle, allowing
you to arrive at your destination safely every time.
We recommend practising on less rugged terrain.
Vehicles with SportDesign package
Warning!
Risk of damage. On vehicles with the SportDesign package, front, rear and side
member trims are painted. Off-road driving
can seriously damage these trim parts.
f When driving off-road, make sure these parts
are not damaged.
f Make sure there is sufficient clearance
between obstacles and the underside of the
vehicle.
f Avoid driving through water.
f Do not use side member trims or rear wheel
spoilers as a running board.
206
Driving and Driving Safety
Maintenance note
Please bear in mind that off-road driving subjects
all vehicle components to considerably more wear
than normal use, making professional inspection
and maintenance after every use vital preconditions for functioning and safety.
Grains of sand, dirt particles and other abrasive
materials entering the brakes can cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking action.
Rules for off-road driving
f Pay attention to the ground clearance of the
vehicle. This information is provided in the
chapter Technical Data in this Driver’s Manual:
Please observe the chapter “GROUND CLEARANCE” on Page 366.
f Activate the Low Range off-road driving
programme.
f Stow or fasten luggage and loads securely.
For information on stowing loads and luggage:
Please observe the chapter “STOWING LOAD”
on Page 225.
f If unknown terrain is obscured from view,
examine it on foot first and traverse it with
extreme caution.
This way, obstacles are easier to recognise
and damage to the vehicle is avoided.
f Always drive with the engine running.
Steering assistance is provided only with the
engine running.
f Drive slowly and uniformly.
f Always make sure that the wheels are in
contact with the ground.
f Before driving through water, check the water
depth, the condition of the surface beneath it
and the speed of the water.
f Look out for obstacles such as boulders,
holes, tree stumps or channels.
f Always keep the sliding/lifting roof or
Panorama roof system and the side windows
closed while driving.
f Do not depart from marked routes or paths.
f Respect nature.
Always obey off-limits signs.
Driving systems for off-road
driving
Specially adapted driving programmes or powertransmission and running-gear control systems
are available for off-road driving:
– Low Range off-road programme
– Centre differential lock
– Rear-differential lock
– Off-road PSM
– Off-road ABS
f For further information on the functioning of
running-gear control systems:
Please observe the chapter “POWER-TRANSMISSION AND RUNNING-GEAR CONTROL
SYSTEMS” on Page 188.
Before driving off-road
Tyres
f Check tread depth and filling pressure of tyres.
f Check for damage and remove any foreign
objects (e.g. stones) from the tread.
f Replace missing valve caps.
Rims
After driving off-road
Off-road driving places a greater burden on the
vehicle than normal driving on roads.
We recommend inspecting the vehicle after offroad driving. Potential damage poses an accident
risk and impairs driving comfort. Damage on the
vehicle is recognised in good time if the vehicle is
checked.
Vehicles with SportDesign package
Warning!
Risk of damage.
On vehicles with the SportDesign package,
front, rear and side member trims are
painted.
Off-road driving can seriously damage these
trim parts.
Caution!
Vehicle damage poses an accident risk for
the vehicle occupants and other road users.
f In cases of doubt, have your vehicle checked
by a qualified specialist workshop.
f Examine tyres for signs of damage such as
cuts, tears, bulges or foreign objects stuck in
the tread and replace if necessary.
f Have any damage to your vehicle repaired
without delay.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
f When driving off-road, make sure these parts
are not damaged.
f Make sure there is sufficient clearance
between obstacles and the underside of the
vehicle.
f Avoid driving through water.
f Do not use side member trims as a running
board.
f Replace dented or damaged rims before
driving off-road.
Driving and Driving Safety
207
Recommended procedure
f Deactivate the Low Range off-road driving
programme.
f Clean headlights and tail lights and check them
for signs of damage.
f Clean the front and rear number plates.
f Clean the tyre tread with a jet of water and
remove any foreign objects.
f Clean wheels, wheel housings and the underbody with a jet of water.
f Check whether the vehicle has picked up plant
parts or branches.
These materials increase the risk of fire and
can damage fuel lines, brake hoses, boots of
the axle joints and drive shafts.
f After off-road driving, always check the entire
floor assembly, tyres, body structure, steering
system, running gear and exhaust system for
signs of damage.
f After driving for an extended period through
mud, sand, water or substances with a similar
soiling effect, check the brake discs, brake
pads, wheels and axle joints and have them
cleaned.
208
Driving and Driving Safety
f If you experience severe vibrations after
driving off-road, check the wheels for foreign
substances.
These substances can produce an imbalance
which might be responsible for the vibrations.
Removing these deposits may remedy the
problem.
Uphill driving
Danger!
Danger of severe or fatal injuries and risk of
damage if the vehicle should overturn.
f Do not turn round when driving uphill.
f If it is not possible to climb a gradient, the
vehicle must be backed down in reverse gear.
f Do not drive over embankments or slopes at
an angle to the line of maximum gradient.
f If the vehicle starts to tilt, immediately steer in
the direction of the tilt (line of slope).
Note on operation
f Activate the Low Range programme before
taking extreme uphill or downhill gradients.
Tips on driving
f Do not perform manual gear changes when
driving, and try to avoid stopping.
f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
Traction on uphill slopes
Note on operation
f Activate the Low Range programme and
engage differential lock(s) if necessary.
Tips on driving
f When driving uphill, go easy on the accelerator
and make sure that wheels have sufficient
traction (do not spin).
f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
f Drive slowly.
f When driving uphill, never let the vehicle roll
back when in idle or not in gear.
Exclusive use of the footbrake is too risky in
such situations.
Driving and Driving Safety
209
Driving downhill
Danger!
Danger of severe or fatal injuries and risk of
damage if the vehicle should overturn.
f Do not drive over slopes at an angle to the line
of maximum gradient.
f Drive downhill slowly, with the front wheels
pointing straight ahead.
f If the vehicle starts to tilt, immediately steer in
the direction of the tilt (line of slope).
f When driving downhill, never let the vehicle roll
when in idle.
f Use engine braking effect.
If the engine braking effect is not sufficient to
appropriately check the speed, gently apply
the footbrake.
210
Driving and Driving Safety
Note on operation
f Activate the Low Range off-road driving
programme. The off-road ABS is switched on
automatically.
Tips on driving
The same general principle as for uphill driving
applies to downhill driving.
f Do not perform manual gear changes when
driving, and try to avoid stopping.
f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
A special circuit of the off-road ABS permits
controlled brief lock-up of the front wheels so that
they can dig into the loose surface more effectively.
Locked wheels slip and can no longer be steered.
f When driving down steep hills on unpaved
surfaces, brake carefully to prevent sliding.
Humps
f Pay attention to the ground clearance of the
vehicle. This information is provided in the
chapter Technical Data in this Driver’s Manual:
Please observe the chapter “GROUND CLEARANCE” on Page 366.
Note on operation
f Activate the Low Range programme and
engage differential lock(s) if necessary.
Tips on driving
f Just before reaching the hump, ease off the
accelerator slightly and use only the vehicle’s
momentum to cross the hump. This will
prevent the vehicle from jumping over the
hump and landing on the following downward
slope at excessive speed.
f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
Danger!
Danger of drowning if water enters the
vehicle. Risk of damage to the engine and
accessories if water penetrates.
f Before driving through water, check the water
depth A, water speed and the condition of the
surface beneath it.
The water depth A must not exceed 50 cm
(55.5 cm for vehicles with level control and
height adjustment).
f Make sure that the door sills and rubber seals
are clean before starting to drive.
Water crossing
f Pay attention to the ground clearance of the
vehicle. This information is provided in the
chapter Technical Data in this Driver’s Manual:
Please observe the chapter “GROUND CLEARANCE” on Page 366.
Soiling can impair the braking action.
f Check and clean the brakes if they have been
soiled.
Danger of steering assistance failing during
a long journey in water if the drive belt slips.
f If the steering assistance fails, more effort will
be required to steer.
Danger of damage to the electrical systems.
f Avoid driving through salt water.
f Do not drive through deep or rapidly flowing
water.
Deep or rapidly flowing water such as
mountain streams can cause the vehicle to
deviate from the desired path.
f Avoid producing bow waves by driving at an
appropriate speed.
f Never open the doors when driving through
water.
Driving and Driving Safety
211
Tips on driving
f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
f Do not perform manual gear changes when
driving, and try to avoid stopping.
Moving off in water can be difficult due to the
high resistance and the loose surface involved.
f Start the water crossing at a shallow place at
walking speed.
f After checking the body of water, take the
shortest route through it.
f Never turn around when crossing a body of
water.
f If it is not possible to cross the body of water,
the vehicle must be backed out of it in reverse
gear.
The servo pump and generator can fail if the
vehicle is driven through water for an extended
period.
f If the servo pump fails, substantially more
force is necessary in order to steer.
f Never drive into water with momentum. The
resulting bow wave could damage the engine
and its accessories.
Maintenance note
f Adjust your driving style to the unfamiliar
surroundings.
f Remove mud from the tyre tread.
f Drive through the water slowly and at a
constant speed.
212
Driving and Driving Safety
The vehicle requires a special check after the
water crossing.
f Briefly brake the brake pads dry after driving
through the water.
Crossing obstacles
Driving on sand
Note on operation
Caution!
f Activate the Low Range programme and
engage differential lock(s) if necessary.
Risk of damage to the underbody and
chassis components if obstacles are
traversed improperly.
Tips on driving
f Always pay attention to the ground clearance
of your vehicle.
Loose sand is an especially tricky surface for offroad driving.
f Slowly drive over the middle of tree trunks.
boulders or other obstacles with one of the
front wheels.
You can often become stuck in sand within
minutes if you do not drive correctly in such situations.
f Cross the obstacle with the rear wheel in the
same way.
f Drive at a brisk pace and do not stop under any
circumstances. Otherwise, the vehicle will
become bogged down.
Note on operation
f Activate the Low Range programme and
engage differential lock(s) if necessary.
Tips on driving
f Have your passenger direct you if necessary.
f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
f Drive slowly.
f Follow existing tracks – provided that they
have not been covered by blown sand, are not
too deep and the vehicle’s ground clearance is
sufficient.
Pay attention to the ground clearance of the
vehicle. This information is provided in the
chapter Technical Data in this Driver’s Manual:
Please observe the chapter “GROUND CLEARANCE” on Page 366.
Driving and Driving Safety
213
When driving on slopes with soft sand on vehicles
with Tiptronic S:
f Use the manual select mode M in addition to
the Low Range programme.
If your vehicle becomes stuck nevertheless:
Do not spin the wheels. Instead, use branches,
mats or similar items to provide adequate traction
so that you can drive out of the critical area.
Track ruts
Other vehicles leave ruts on many off-road
courses or gravel roads.
f Pay attention to the ground clearance of the
vehicle. This information is provided in the
chapter Technical Data in this Driver’s Manual:
Please observe the chapter “GROUND CLEARANCE” on Page 366.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the vehicle floor when
driving through ruts that are too deep.
f Always bear in mind the vehicle’s ground clearance.
f Do not drive through ruts that are too deep.
Note on operation
f Activate the Low Range programme and
engage differential lock(s) if necessary.
Tips on driving
f In cases of doubt, drive with one wheel on the
grass strip.
f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
f Drive slowly.
214
Driving and Driving Safety
Airbag systems
Safety notes!
f Always fasten seat belts, as the triggering of
the airbag system depends on the force and
angle of any impact.
f Make sure there are no persons, animals or
objects between the driver or passengers and
the area into which the airbag inflates.
f Always hold the steering wheel by the outer
rim.
f For airbags to give effective protection, they
must be a certain distance from the driver or
passengers.
So select your seat position so that it is not
unnecessarily close to the airbags.
Do not lean against the inside of the doors
(side airbags).
f Objects must not protrude out of the door
oddments tray.
f Do not transport heavy objects on or in front of
the seats.
f Give your passengers all the information in this
chapter.
Function
In conjunction with the seat belts, the airbags are
a safety system designed to provide the driver and
passengers with maximum protection from injury
in an accident.
Airbags protect the face and upper body, whilst
simultaneously damping the motion of the driver
and passengers in the impact direction in the
event of a frontal impact or side impact.
The front airbags are installed under the padded
steering wheel panel on the driver’s side and in the
dashboard on the passenger’s side.
The side airbags of the front seats are installed
in the side of the seat backrests.
The head airbags are installed above the doors
in the roof area.
The respective airbags could trigger depending
on the angle of impact and force of impact.
After inflation, the front airbags deflate so quickly
again that any restriction of vision is insignificant.
Equally, the inflating noise will be drowned out by
the noise of the accident.
Safety notes!
f Always consult a qualified specialist workshop
if the airbag system is faulty.
f Have triggered airbag systems replaced
immediately.
f Do not modify the wiring or components of the
airbag systems.
f Do not attach any additional trim or stickers to
the steering wheel or in the vicinity of the
passenger airbag, side airbags or head
airbag.
f Do not route any cables of additional electrical
equipment in the vicinity of the airbag wiring
harnesses.
f Do not disassemble airbag components
(e.g. steering wheel, front seats, roof trims).
f If you sell your Porsche, tell the buyer that the
car is fitted with airbags and refer him to the
chapter “Airbag Systems” in the Driver’s
Manual.
f Have the functional readiness checked at the
prescribed service intervals.
f Always keep feet in the footwell while driving.
Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat
area.
Driving and Driving Safety
215
Danger!
Warning light and warning
message
Risk of serious or mortal injury from the
passenger airbag.
If the “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” warning
light is not lit when the ignition is switched on
and the Airbag OFF switch is switched off,
this could indicate a fault in the system.
Faults are indicated by the warning light on the
tachometer.
f Please consult a qualified specialist workshop
in the following cases:
f Do not fit a child restraint system on the
passenger’s seat.
– If the warning light does not light up when the
ignition is switched on or
f Have the fault remedied immediately.
– If the warning light does not go out once the
engine is running or
Risk of serious or mortal injury for the
passenger if the passenger airbag remains
switched off after the child seat is removed.
– If the warning light appears whilst driving.
f The passenger airbag must be switched on
again once the child seat has been removed.
Warning light “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF”
f For information on the function of the warning
light A “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF”:
Please observe the chapter “SWITCHING
PASSENGER AIRBAG ON AND OFF” on
Page 44.
216
Driving and Driving Safety
Disposal
Non-ignited gas generators, or whole vehicles or
subassemblies with airbag units, must not be
disposed of as “normal” scrap or waste or put into
any other form of end storage.
Your Porsche partner will be able to give you
details about disposal.
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
Folding rear seats forward
and returning to upright position.................. 218
Loadspace ................................................ 221
Cargo management system ........................ 222
Stowing load.............................................. 225
Luggage compartment cover ...................... 226
Luggage safety net .................................... 227
Ski bag...................................................... 229
Roof Transport System............................... 231
Storage..................................................... 232
Cupholder.................................................. 236
DVD player under the right front seat ........... 237
Ashtray, front ............................................ 238
Cigarette lighter ......................................... 239
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
217
Folding rear seats forward and
returning to upright position
On vehicles with automatically controlled
four-zone air conditioning:
Safety button
The rear seats are divided and can be folded
forward individually to make the loadspace bigger.
f Press the safety button in the driver’s door
armrest before folding the rear seats forward.
The rear control panel for the air conditioning
is deactivated.
This prevents unintentional adjustment of the
air conditioning.
The symbol in the switch lights up.
Caution!
Risk of damage to seat cushions, backrest
and seat belt if only the backrest is folded
forward.
f Always fold seat cushions and backrest
forward.
1. Remove the headrests of the backrest to be
folded forward.
To do this:
Please observe the chapter “HEADRESTS” on
Page 36.
Folding rear seats forward
If the luggage safety net is installed, always first
move the left seat cushion to a vertical position
and fold the left rear seat backrest forward.
218
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
2. Move front seats forward.
3. Pull seat cushion up at loop A.
4. Pull seat cushion forward (arrow B).
5. Raise seat cushion vertically.
6. Pull release lever A and fold the backrest
forward.
7. Insert hook on the seat cushion in the eyelet of
the backrest (arrow).
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
219
8. Insert headrest into the fixing holes in the seat
cushion (arrow).
220
Adjusting rear seats to vertical position
3. Fold seat cushion down.
1. Remove the headrests from the seat cushion.
4. Push seat cushion under the backrest.
2. Make sure that the seat belts are not trapped.
Fold up the backrest until it locks with an
audible click.
The red “check tab” A must be lowered
completely.
5. Press seat cushion downward at the front.
Make sure that the belt buckles are accessible.
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
6. Insert the headrests into the backrest.
To do this:
Please observe the chapter “HEADRESTS” on
Page 36.
Loadspace
The maximum permissible load on the loadspace
floor is 400 kg. The weight must be distributed
evenly over the entire loadspace.
f For information on stowing loads and luggage:
Please observe the chapter “STOWING LOAD”
on Page 225.
2. Unclip support arm B and insert it into fixing
recess C in the loadspace floor.
Closing loadspace floor
1. Lift the loadspace floor and clip support arm B
into its holder in the vehicle floor.
2. Close the loadspace floor.
Tie-down rings
You can secure the load in the luggage compartment against slipping. Tie-down straps or the
luggage net can be fastened to the tie-down
rings D.
f Make sure that all rings are equally loaded
when securing a load.
Opening loadspace floor
Note on operation
1. Pull handle A and lift the loadspace floor.
The tie-down rings are not designed to restrain a
heavy load in an accident.
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
221
Cargo management system
The cargo management system is a variable
system for securing objects in the luggage
compartment.
It comprises two telescopic rails integrated
in the loadspace, a telescopic bar, four tie-down
rings as well as a strap reel and a reversible mat.
The reversible mat is provided with an anti-slip
structure on the underside.
f For information on stowing loads and luggage:
Please observe the chapter “STOWING LOAD”
on Page 225.
Inserting and adjusting the telescopic bar
Inserting and adjusting the strap reel
1. Insert the two end elements of the telescopic
bar in the openings A of the mounting rails.
The strap reel is stored in the supplied bag
together with the tie-down rings in the luggage
compartment or in the spare-wheel well.
2. Press the end elements down and push against
the load. When the bar is correctly positioned,
the load should no longer be able to move.
3. Release the end elements.
4. Check that the elements are locked in position
by pushing against them.
222
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
1. Take the strap reel out of the bag.
2. Press the button B on the end element of the
strap reel and pull both elements out to the
width of the two mounting rails.
3. Insert the two end elements of the strap reel in
the openings A of the mounting rails.
4. Press both end elements down and push
against the load.
5. Release the end elements.
6. Check that the elements are locked in position
by pushing against them.
7. Press button B and tension the strap so that
the load cannot move.
8. Release button B.
Inserting strap reel on one rail
1. Press button B on the end element and pull
both elements apart slightly.
2. Insert one end element of the strap reel in the
opening A of a mounting rail, press down and
slide into position.
3. Insert the second element in the same opening
A, press down and slide in the opposite direction.
4. Check that the elements are locked in position
by pushing against them.
5. Press button B and place the strap around the
item of luggage.
Tension the belt so that the item of luggage
cannot move.
6. Release button B.
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
223
Inserting and adjusting tie-down rings
Tie-down straps or the luggage net can be
fastened to the tie-down rings.
Make sure that all rings are equally loaded when
securing a load.
The tie-down rings are not designed to restrain
loads in serious accidents.
1. Insert the tie-down ring in the opening A of the
mounting rail.
2. Press button C nach down and slide the
tie-down ring in the correspondig direction.
3. Release button C.
4. Check that the tie-down ring is locked in
position by pushing it.
224
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
5. Insert the remaining tie-down rings.
Note on operation
The opposing tie-down rings must always be
inserted in the opposite direction.
Stowing load
Safety notes!
An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load
can slip out of place or endanger the vehicle
occupants during braking, direction changes
or in accidents.
Never transport objects which are not
secured (accident, braking, curves).
f Always transport loads in the loadspace, never
in the passenger compartment (e.g. on or in
front of the seats).
f Support the load against the seat backrests
whenever possible. Always lock the backrests
into place.
f Place the load behind unoccupied seats
whenever possible.
f Stow heavy objects as far forward as possible
on the floor, with lightweight objects behind
them.
f Never load the vehicle higher than the top
edge of the seat backrest.
f Always protect the passenger compartment
with a luggage safety net and a luggage
compartment cover.
Do not drive with objects on top of the luggage
compartment cover.
f If the rear seats are not occupied, the
backrests can be additionally secured with the
seat belts. Simply cross the outer seat belts
and insert each into the opposite buckle.
f Make sure that the load cannot damage the
heating filaments of the rear window and the
TV antenna of the side windows.
Luggage net
f Luggage must always be stowed completely
under the luggage net.
The luggage net is suitable only to prevent light
objects from slipping.
Tie-down belts
f Do not use elastic belts or straps to tie down
a load.
f Do not route belts and straps over sharp
edges.
f Observe the directions for use and information
for the tie-down equipment.
f Use only belts with a tear strength of at least
700 kg and a maximum width of 25 mm.
f Cross the belts over the load.
Driving
f The vehicle’s handling changes depending on
the vehicle load. Adapt your driving style to the
changed driving behaviour.
f Do not exceed the maximum gross weight and
the axle load.
This information is provided in the chapter
Technical Data in this Driver’s Manual:
Please observe the chapter “WEIGHTS” on
Page 365.
f Never drive with the rear window or rear lid
open.
Exhaust gases can enter the passenger
compartment.
f Adapt the tyre pressure to the load.
If you change the tyre pressure, you must also
update the setting for Tyre Pressure
Monitoring. For information on setting Tyre
Pressure Monitoring on the multi-purpose
display: Please observe the chapter “SETTING
VEHICLE LOADING AND ADJUSTING TYRE
PRESSURE” on Page 137.
f The information on tyre pressures for partially
and fully loaded vehicles is provided in the
chapter Technical Data in this Driver’s Manual:
Please observe the chapter “TYRE
PRESSURES, COLD” on Page 363.
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
225
Luggage compartment cover
Luggage can be protected against prying eyes
with the luggage compartment cover.
f Always pull out the luggage compartment
cover when transporting objects in the
luggage compartment.
The luggage compartment cover is not
designed to carry objects.
f Do not hang bags or objects on the support
brackets A. The support brackets could break
off.
Warning!
Risk of injury. In the event of braking,
direction changes or in an accident, objects
can slide into the passenger compartment
and endanger the occupants.
f Do not place objects on top of the luggage
compartment cover.
Pulling out luggage compartment cover
Removing luggage compartment cover
f Pull out the cover by the handle and insert it
into the guides on the left and right side walls.
f Pull the release B back.
Luggage compartment cover, retracting
f Disengage the luggage compartment cover
from the guides on the side walls and carefully
guide it back into the retractor roller.
226
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
f Lift the cover at the right and remove.
Luggage safety net
The luggage safety net can hold back only lightweight items in the event of braking, changes in
direction or in an accident.
f For information on stowing loads and luggage:
Please observe the chapter “STOWING LOAD”
on Page 225.
Warning!
Risk of injury. Unsecured loads can slip and
endanger the occupants in the event of
braking, changes in direction or in an
accident.
f Always secure the passenger compartment
with the luggage safety net.
Installing luggage compartment cover
f Insert the cover into the receiving holder on the
left side.
f Press the cover down into the holder on the
right side until it can be heard and felt to
engage.
Release B must point forwards.
f Always fasten the load at the tie-down rings.
f Never load the vehicle higher than the top
edge of the seat backrest.
Permitted uses
A – Variant 1
Maintenance note
f If the luggage safety net was heavily stressed
or damaged during braking or in an accident
etc., have the safety net and its retaining
bracket checked by a qualified specialist
workshop.
We recommend that you use a Porsche
partner for this work since these are staffed
with trained personnel and have the necessary
parts and tools.
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
227
Securing passenger compartment with
luggage safety net
Pulling out luggage safety net
f Pull the luggage safety net out and engage the
fastening hooks into the fixing rings on the
ceiling.
The luggage safety net fastening hooks can be
pulled out at the sides.
f Make sure that the luggage safety net
fastening hooks are properly engaged in the
fixing rings.
B – Variant 2
In the case of variant, 2, it is necessary to first fold
forward the rear seats and open the covers of the
luggage safety net fixing points.
For information on folding the rear seats forward:
Please observe the chapter “FOLDING REAR
SEATS FORWARD” on Page 218.
Removing luggage safety net assembly
from the rear seat backrest
1. Open both rear doors.
2. Fold down the left rear seat backrest first,
followed by the right rear seat backrest. The
seat cushions need not be folded over for this
purpose.
f For information on folding the rear seats
forward:
Please observe the chapter “FOLDING REAR
SEATS FORWARD” on Page 218.
3. Push the luggage safety net assembly in the
direction of arrow 1.
4. Lift the luggage safety net assembly up and off
(direction of arrow 2).
228
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
Ski bag
Long objects such as skis can be transported
cleanly and without damaging the passenger
compartment.
Loading ski bag
2. Fold down the armrest of the rear seat
backrest.
5. Pull out and unfold the ski bag.
3. Pull protective cover B off the Velcro strip at
the top and fold down.
6. Insert objects into the ski bag from the
luggage compartment.
4. Press release button C on the lid of the passthrough facility and fold down the lid.
1. Press release button A on the lid of the passthrough facility.
Fold down the lid.
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
229
Stowing the ski bag
1. Empty ski bag.
2. Pull ski bag into the passenger compartment.
3. Close lid in the luggage compartment.
4. Carefully fold the ski bag and close the lid.
5. Insert protective cover and fasten it with the
Velcro strip.
Note on operation
f Fold up the ski bag only when it is dry.
Securing load
f Secure the stowed objects with tightening
belt D.
f Insert belt tongue into the buckle.
230
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
Roof Transport System
f Please follow the separate instructions for
fitting the Roof Transport System.
f Only use Roof Transport Systems from the
Porsche Tequipment product range or Roof
Transport Systems which have been tested
and approved for your car by Porsche. Fitting
normal commercially available luggage racks
is not possible.
The Porsche Roof Transport System allows you
to carry various sports and hobby equipment.
Your Porsche partner will be pleased to tell you
about the various different uses of the Roof Transport System.
Safety notes!
f Completely remove the Roof Transport System
before using an automatic car wash – risk of
damage to the vehicle!
f Do not exceed the maximum permitted roof
load, the maximum permitted gross weight
and the maximum permitted axle loads.
This information is provided in the chapter
Technical Data in this Driver’s Manual:
Please observe the chapter “WEIGHTS” on
Page 365.
f Distribute load evenly, with heavy items as low
as possible. Items of luggage must not project
beyond the side of the load area.
f Fix and secure every item to the basic carrier
with a rope or lashing strap (do not use elastic
rubber tensioners).
When the Roof Transport System is loaded, the
maximum speed depends on the nature, size and
weight of the load being carried.
f But never drive faster than 140 km/h
(90 mph).
f With the basic carrier fitted and no load, do
not exceed a maximum speed of 180 km/h
(110 mph).
f Driving, braking and steering behaviour
change due to the higher centre of gravity and
the greater wind-resistant area. You should
adapt your driving style appropriately.
f Since fuel consumption and noise are
increased with the Roof Transport System
fitted, it should not remain on the vehicle if not
in use.
f Before every journey, and at regular intervals
during long trips, check that Roof Transport
System and load are secure. Re-tighten if
necessary and secure additionally by locking.
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
231
Storage
Warning!
Danger of injury during braking, rapid
direction changes or in an accident.
f Do not carry items of luggage or objects in the
passenger compartment unsecured.
f Do not transport any heavy objects in open
oddments trays.
f Always keep the covers of the oddments trays
closed while driving.
f Always protect the passenger compartment
with a safety net and a luggage compartment
cover.
Note on operation
An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load can
slip out of place or endanger the vehicle
occupants during braking, direction changes or in
accidents.
Storage options
– In the glasses case in the roof console,
– In the glove compartment, pen holder,
– In the front and rear armrests,
– In the drawer underneath the passenger’s
seat,
– In the storage compartments at the sides of
the luggage compartment,
– In the door trim panels,
– In the centre console, front and rear,
– On the back of the front seats,
– Coat hooks on the rear grab handles,
– Under the load compartment floor,
– In the front and rear cupholders.
f For information on stowing loads and luggage:
Please observe the chapter “STOWING LOAD”
on Page 225.
232
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
Glasses case in the roof console
Sunglasses, for example, can be stored in this
storage compartment.
Opening
f Press button (arrow).
Closing
f Close the lid until it clicks audibly into place.
Glove compartment
A drawer, designed to hold the vehicle folder, is
located in the glove compartment.
Opening
f Press button A and open cover.
Locking
f Always lock button A with the vehicle key to
secure the contents from unauthorised
access.
B - Control for glove compartment cooling
C - Holder for pens
Cooling the glove compartment
f Turn thumb wheel B counter-clockwise.
Switching off cooling
f Turn thumb wheel B clockwise.
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
233
Oddments trays in the armrest between
the front seats
Two oddments trays are located in the armrest.
Opening the lower tray
f Press button B and lift top tray with the cover
closed.
Opening the top tray
f Press button A and lift the cover.
234
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
Oddments tray in the rear armrest
An oddments tray is located in the armrest.
Opening the oddments tray in the armrest
1. Fold down the armrest completely.
2. Press button C and lift the cover.
Caution!
Risk of damage.
f Because of heat, the right-hand storage
compartment cannot be used as such in
vehicles that have air suspension with level
control and height adjustment.
Drawer under the right front seat
There is room for the fire extinguisher in the
drawer underneath the right front seat.
On vehicles with DVD navigation, the DVD player is
under the right front seat.
Side storage compartments in the
luggage compartment
Space is provided for the warning triangle in the
right-hand storage compartment.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, there
is an additional storage option in the left-hand
storage compartment. The shelf can be removed
to increase the size of the compartment.
f For information on the installation location of
the DVD player:
Please observe the chapter “DVD PLAYER
UNDER THE RIGHT FRONT SEAT” on
Page 237.
Opening
f Lift the release handle and pull out the drawer.
Closing
f Close the drawer until it clicks audibly into
place.
Opening the storage compartment
f Pull off the cover at the handle recess.
Closing the storage compartment
f First, insert the cover at the bottom and then
close it until it audibly clicks into place.
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
235
Cupholder
You can place drinks cans and cups in the
cupholder.
f Keep the cupholder closed while driving.
Warning!
Risk of scalding or damage due to spilling
drinks.
f Only use containers which fit.
f Never put overfull containers in the cupholder.
f Never use hot drinks.
Opening front cupholder
f Open shutter A (arrow).
Removing cupholder insert
The cupholder insert can be removed for cleaning.
Removing the insert makes an additional
oddments tray available.
f Open shutter A.
f Press together the cupholder insert at the two
engagement recesses B.
f Remove the cupholder insert.
236
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
Opening rear cupholder
f Press on the cover of the cupholder (arrow).
Closing rear cupholder
f Close and engage the cupholder.
DVD player under the right front
seat
On vehicles with DVD navigation, the DVD player is
under the right front seat behind a cover.
Opening the cover
f Pull cover upwards by means of handle
(direction of arrow 1).
Closing the cover
f Insert the four guide lugs of the cover into their
openings (arrow).
f Press the cover into place.
f Push down cover until it can be felt clicking into
place.
f Pull out cover towards the front
(direction of arrow 2).
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
237
Ashtray, front
Ashtray, rear
Opening
Depending on the vehicle equipment, an ashtray
may be installed in the rear door panels.
f Press ashtray lid briefly.
Emptying
f Move unlocking button A to the right and pull
out the ashtray insert in upward direction.
f After emptying, replace the ashtray insert and
push it down until it clicks audibly into place.
238
Opening
f Press ashtray lid briefly.
Emptying
f Open ashtray lid and press carefully towards
the door panel.
The insert is raised slightly.
f Remove insert and empty.
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
Cigarette lighter
Warning!
Risk of fire and burning.
f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended.
f Only hold the heated lighter by the knob.
The cigarette lighter is ready for use regardless of
the ignition lock position.
Using the front cigarette lighter
f Press ashtray lid briefly. Ashtray opens
independently.
f Press lighter into the receptacle (arrow). When
the element is red hot the lighter jumps back
to its initial position.
Using the rear cigarette lighter
f Briefly press the lid in the centre console. The
lid opens independently.
f Press lighter into the receptacle (arrow). When
the element is red hot the lighter jumps back
to its initial position.
Luggage Compartment, Loadspace and Storage
239
Trailer Hitch
Trailer coupling........................................... 241
Trailer coupling with removable ball hitch...... 243
Electrically folding trailer coupling ................249
240
Trailer coupling
Trailer coupling
Definitions
f Please follow the operating instructions for the
trailer.
The towed weight (gross weight of the trailer) is
the sum of the trailer’s empty weight and the
weight of the load.
f Do not modify or repair the trailer coupling.
Retrofitting
Have a trailer coupling retrofitted only by a qualified specialist workshop. They are familiar with the
manufacturer’s specifications and any necessary
conversion measures.
We recommend that you use a Porsche partner
for this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Electrical connection
Your Porsche is equipped with a 13-pin plug for
the electrical connection to the trailer.
If you wish to tow trailers with a 7-pin plug, an
appropriate adapter must be used.
The vertical coupling load is the weight that the
trailer drawbar exerts on the trailer coupling of the
vehicle.
The rear-axle load is the vehicle weight on the
rear axle plus the weight of the transported load
and the vertical coupling load of the trailer.
The gross weight of the vehicle and trailer is
the sum of the weight of the towing vehicle and the
weight of the trailer.
f Never exceed the permissible individual
weights.
Safety notes!
Driving with a trailer
f Always observe the permissible towed weight,
vertical coupling load and rear-axle load.
This information is provided in the chapter
Technical Data in this Driver’s Manual:
Please observe the chapter “WEIGHTS” on
Page 365.
f When connected, the trailer must always be
horizontal behind the towing vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer with an adjustable drawbar.
f When the vehicle is driven in the mountains, the
engine output decreases as altitude increases.
The maximum weights stated are the values at
sea level. The total weight of the vehicle-trailer
combination must therefore be reduced by
10 % for each increment of 1,000 metres
altitude. Please take this into consideration
when planning your route.
Distributing the load
f Distribute the load in the trailer so that heavy
objects are as close to the axle as possible.
Always safeguard all objects against slipping
and tie them down securely.
f You should make the best possible use of the
trailer coupling’s rated vertical coupling load
when loading the trailer, but never exceed it.
Trailer coupling
241
Tyre pressure
f Select the vehicle tyre pressure for full load
when towing a trailer.
f The information on tyre pressure is provided in
the chapter Technical Data in this Driver’s
Manual:
Please observe the chapter “TYRE
PRESSURES, COLD” on Page 363.
f Check the tyre pressure of the trailer’s wheels
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Door mirrors
f If the width of the trailer obstructs your view of
the traffic behind the trailer, you must have
additional door mirrors fitted.
Headlights, lights
f Always check the headlight adjustment before
driving with a trailer.
If necessary, correct with the headlight beam
adjustment function.
f Check whether the plug of the trailer is
plugged into the towing vehicle and whether all
lights function.
242
Trailer coupling
Driving with a trailer
The vehicle with trailer must be used at a speed
appropriate to street and traffic conditions, as well
as adjusted to the loading situation. Never exceed
a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). Excessive speed
considering the conditions of use can lead to
losing control of the vehicle-trailer combination.
f Carefully and gradually familiarise yourself with
the handling and braking behaviour of the
vehicle-trailer combination.
f Do not drive with the towing vehicle empty and
the trailer loaded.
If this unfavourable condition is unavoidable,
please drive especially slowly.
f Bear in mind the different vehicle handling and
size in situations such as braking, parking,
cornering and overtaking, etc.
f The driving stability of the vehicle-trailer combination worsens as the speed increases. Therefore, drive especially slowly on downhill
stretches and in the case of unfavourable road
and weather conditions (such as wind).
f Drive in an appropriately low gear on downhill
stretches in order to make use of the engine
braking effect.
f Slow down immediately if the trailer starts to
sway. Do not countersteer; brake if necessary.
Never attempt to straighten out the vehicletrailer combination by accelerating.
f Activate the Low Range off-road driving
programme when moving off on steep slopes.
f Under no circumstances may people, animals
or objects be in the space between the trailer
and towing vehicle when the vehicle is moving.
f When reversing, bear in mind that ParkAssist is
not active.
Maintenance note
f Please take into consideration that driving with
a trailer places much greater stress on all
vehicle components. Expert inspection and
maintenance after every use are indispensable
prerequisites for proper functioning and safety.
Hitching trailer
Warning!
Danger of injury and risk of damage by flying
ball hitch in an accident, during braking and
in the case of direction changes.
f Always turn off the alarm system before you
attach a trailer. The inclination sensor could
trigger the alarm unintentionally.
f Do not transport the ball hitch in the vehicle
unsecured.
Unhitching trailer
f Transport the ball hitch only in the tool box.
f Always turn the alarm system off before
uncoupling the trailer, otherwise the alarm will
be tripped when the plug is removed.
Risk of damage to the locking mechanism of
the ball hitch, so that safe use of the trailer
coupling is no longer ensured.
f If the trailer is equipped with an overrun brake,
do not unhitch the trailer when its brake is still
applied.
f Never use auxiliary devices or tools to insert or
remove the ball hitch.
The ball hitch can be inserted and removed
using normal manual force.
Trailer coupling with removable
ball hitch
The removable ball hitch is stored in the tool box
under the loadspace floor cover.
Risk of accident if the ball hitch is not
properly locked.
f Use the trailer coupling only when it is locked
and the key has been withdrawn.
1. Open and prop up the loadspace floor cover.
For information on opening the loadspace
floor: Please observe the chapter “OPENING
LOADSPACE FLOOR” on Page 221.
2. Open Velco strap of the tool box.
3. Remove the top part of the tool box.
4. Take ball hitch out of the bottom part of the
tool box.
Trailer coupling
243
Notes on operation
f Do not modify or repair the ball hitch or
mounting tube.
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you
experience handling difficulties, notice
anything unusual or find any faults.
f Make sure that the ball hitch is properly locked
in place prior to every journey.
f When driving with a trailer, always lock the lock
and withdraw the key.
f Never unlock the ball hitch when a trailer is still
hitched to the vehicle.
f Always remove the ball hitch and stow it in the
tool box when driving without a trailer.
f Insert the plug into the mounting tube
whenever the ball hitch is removed.
f Important: before using the ball hitch for the
first time, write down the number embossed
on the key.
Note field for
key number
244
.................................
Trailer coupling
Inserting ball hitch
The mount for the ball hitch and the socket are
located below the bumper.
A plug in the mounting tube protects it against
soiling.
Removing plug
f Pull plug A out of the mounting tube.
Store plug in the tool box.
f Before inserting the ball hitch, always check
the mounting tube for signs of soiling. In order
to ensure that the ball hitch locks securely, it is
very important to remove any dirt in the
mounting tube.
Preparing the ball hitch
Shank B, locking balls C and handwheel D must
not be soiled or damaged.
Ball hitch E must be pretensioned for insertion.
Checking whether the ball hitch is
pretensioned
– Key F must be in the lock, the arrow on the key
must point towards the “lock open” symbol
and the key cannot be withdrawn.
– The red marking G on the handwheel must
point towards the green area H on the ball
hitch.
Trailer coupling
245
– There must be a clearly visible space between
the handwheel and the ball hitch; the gap J
between handwheel and ball hitch must be
around 5 mm.
– It must be possible to press locking balls C
completely into the shank with their full
diameter.
If the ball hitch is not pretensioned, tension it
as described below:
f The ball hitch must be unlocked, i.e. the arrow
on the key must point to the “lock open”
symbol on the handwheel.
f Hold the ball hitch with your left hand.
Pull the handwheel out in arrow direction 1
with your right hand and then, with the
handwheel still pulled out, turn it in arrow
direction 2 until it engages.
The ball hitch has now been pretensioned.
Attaching ball hitch to the vehicle
If the ball hitch cannot be pretensioned, it must not
be used.
1. Insert tensioned ball head E into mounting tube
K in the direction of the arrow and push it up
firmly until the ball hitch snaps into place.
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
246
Trailer coupling
When inserting ball hitch E, do not touch
handwheel D with your hand. When the ball hitch
locks into place, the handwheel rotates back
counter-clockwise and comes into contact with
the ball hitch again.
Warning!
Risk of accident.
f Do not use the trailer coupling if at least one of
the 4 points below is not met.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
1. The green marking N on the handwheel must
coincide with the green area H on the ball
hitch.
2. The handwheel must be in contact with the ball
hitch.
2. Turn key L counter-clockwise to lock the ball
hitch and then withdraw the key. Once the key
has been removed, it must not be possible to
pull the handwheel to the side.
3. Cover lock with cap M.
4. Store key in the tool box.
Safety check
You can use the following 4 points to check
whether the ball hitch was fitted properly.
3. After firmly shaking by hand, the ball hitch
must still be securely seated in the mounting
tube.
4. The key must have been withdrawn and cap M
must be in place.
Trailer socket
The socket is located to the left of the inserted ball
hitch.
Trailer coupling
247
2. Hold ball hitch E with your left hand. Pull
handwheel D out in arrow direction 1 and
then, with the handwheel still pulled out, turn it
as far as it will go in arrow direction 2.
Hold handwheel in this position.
3. Remove ball hitch from the mounting tube in
arrow direction 3.
Release handwheel.
The ball hitch has now been tensioned and can
be stowed in the tool box in this state.
4. Always insert the plug into the mounting tube
to protect against soiling.
Tip on driving
The ball hitch must always be removed when
driving without a trailer.
Removing ball hitch
1. Uncap the lock.
Insert key and turn clockwise to unlock.
The arrow on the key must point to the “lock
open” symbol on the handwheel.
Warning!
Danger of injury by the heavy ball hitch.
f When removing the ball hitch, hold it in such a
way that your hand cannot be pressed onto the
road surface.
248
Trailer coupling
Care instructions
The ball hitch and mounting tube must be kept
clean to ensure proper functioning.
Remove the ball hitch and insert the plug before
cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner,
steam cleaner or similar device.
The ball hitch must not be cleaned with a highpressure cleaner, steam cleaner or similar device,
because this would wash out the lubricating
grease inside the ball hitch.
Electrically folding trailer coupling
Warning!
Danger of injury and risk of damage when
the ball hitch is extended or retracted.
f Make sure that no persons, animals or obstacles are in the movement range of the ball
hitch.
f In order to stop the ball hitch movement in the
event of danger, touch rocker switch A again.
f Never swivel the ball hitch if a trailer is hitched
to the vehicle or a bicycle carrier or similar
item is mounted on or supported by the ball
hitch.
f Use the trailer coupling only with the ball hitch
fully extended.
f Never use auxiliary devices or tools to interfere with the movement of the ball hitch. This
could damage the locking mechanism. Safe
use of the trailer coupling would then no longer
be guaranteed.
f Make sure that the ball hitch is properly locked
in place prior to every journey.
Extending trailer coupling
Preconditions
– The vehicle must be stationary.
– The rear lid or rear window must be open.
Extending
f Press top half of rocker switch A.
The ball hitch automatically extends to
operating position.
The red light-emitting diode in the rocker
switch flashes until the ball hitch reaches
operating position.
Retracting trailer coupling
Preconditions
– The vehicle must be stationary.
– The rear lid or rear window must be open.
– Trailer must be unhitched.
– The plug (and any adapter) must have been
removed from the socket.
– There must not be any items on the ball hitch
(e.g. ball protection cap, bicycle carrier, etc.).
Trailer coupling
249
Retracting
f Press bottom half of rocker switch A.
The ball hitch automatically moves to retracted
position.
The red light-emitting diode in the rocker
switch flashes until the ball hitch reaches
retracted position.
Notes on operation
– The ball hitch must be in retracted position
when not in use.
– The plug of the trailer, bicycle carrier or similar
item must be plugged in when the trailer
coupling is in use.
– In order to stop the ball hitch movement in the
event of danger, touch rocker switch A again.
The two red light-emitting diodes in the rocker
switch flash rapidly to indicate this interruption.
It is prohibited to use the trailer coupling
in this intermediate position.
f A warning appears on the multi-purpose
display in the event of malfunctions. For information on warning messages on the multipurpose display: Please observe the chapter
“OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES” on
Page 150.
250
Trailer coupling
Trailer socket
The socket is located to the right of the extended
ball hitch.
The socket is retracted along with the ball hitch.
Overload protection
When the rocker switch is used in one-touch
mode, movement of the ball hitch is interrupted if
resistance is encountered. The red light-emitting
diode in the rocker switch flashes rapidly to
indicate this interruption.
Switching overload protection off
f Keep the rocker switch depressed (for at least
2 seconds) until the ball hitch has reached
operating or retracted position.
Care instructions
When cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure
cleaner, steam cleaner or similar device, make
sure that the cleaning jet does not strike the ball
hitch seal directly. Moisture could penetrate.
Faults
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you
experience handling difficulties, notice
anything unusual or find any faults.
We recommend that you use a Porsche
partner for this work since these are staffed
with trained personnel and have the necessary
parts and tools.
Storing end positions of the trailer coupling
The end positions of the trailer coupling could be
lost after a fault (e.g. when the battery is disconnected and reconnected).
To teach the end positions:
– Press and hold top half of rocker switch A until
the ball head has reached operating position.
– Press and hold bottom half of rocker switch A
until the ball head has reached retracted
position.
Parking
ParkAssist ................................................. 252
Swivelling down mirror glass
as parking aid ............................................ 256
Garage door opener ................................... 257
Parking
251
ParkAssist
ParkAssist provides a visual and audible indication
to the driver of the distance between the vehicle
and an obstacle.
ParkAssist is switched on automatically when the
ignition is switched on and remains active up to a
speed of approx. 14 km/h (9 mph).
ParkAssist is switched off automatically at higher
speeds. ParkAssist is switched on again automatically when the speed drops below approx.
14 km/h (9 mph).
ParkAssist is activated together with the corresponding monitoring range depending on the
position of the Tiptronic selector lever or gearshift
lever.
– ParkAssist is activated automatically when
reverse gear is selected and the ignition is on.
Tiptronic selector lever position:
– P – ParkAssist is not activated.
– R, N – ParkAssist is activated for the front and
rear areas.
– D, M – ParkAssist is activated for the front
area.
Gearshift lever position:
– R – ParkAssist is activated for the front and
rear areas.
– in all other gearshift positions – ParkAssist
is activated for the front area.
Note
On vehicles with manual transmission, ParkAssist
is not switched on in the rear area if the vehicle
rolls backward without reverse gear engaged.
Warning!
Risk of accident. Even when using
ParkAssist, the driver is still responsible for
taking appropriate care when parking and
when assessing obstacles.
f Make sure that no persons, animals or obstacles are within the manoeuvring area.
252
Parking
Switching ParkAssist on and off
f Switch ParkAssist on and off using button A in
the roof console.
When ParkAssist is switched off, the indicator
light in the button lights up.
Note on operation
It is recommended to switch off ParkAssist when
driving on unpaved surfaces and off-road.
Maintenance notes
f The sensors must always be kept free of dust,
ice and snow in order to ensure that they are
fully functional.
f Do not damage sensors by abrasion or
scratching.
f Maintain sufficient distance when cleaning with
steam-jet units.
The sensors will be damaged if the pressure is
too high.
Note on operation
The rear ultrasound sensors may not function
correctly if tyres that have not been recommended by Porsche are fitted on the spare wheel
bracket.
Front ultrasound sensors
Rear ultrasound sensors
Sensors
– Range of rear middle sensors (arrow)
(on vehicles without spare wheel bracket):
approx. 150 cm
Six ultrasound sensors in the front and rear
bumpers measure the distance to the closest
obstacle.
– Range of outer sensors
(front and rear):
approx. 60 cm
– Range of front middle sensors (arrow):
approx. 120 cm
– Range of rear middle sensors
(on vehicles with spare wheel bracket):
approx. 120 cm
If the spare wheel bracket is open, this may impair
the function of the rear ultrasound sensors.
On vehicles that have air suspension with level
control and height adjustment, the system may
not recognise obstacles near the ground at terrain
level or special terrain level.
Obstacles cannot be detected in the “blind”
sensor area (above and below the sensors).
Parking
253
If the first yellow LED segment lights up, the
obstacle is still 120 cm (front) or 120 to 150 cm
(rear) away.
A brief signal tone sounds when reversing.
An intermittent tone sounds when the distance
becomes less than approx. 60 cm. The fourth
yellow LED segment lights up.
If the distance becomes less than approx. 25 cm
(on vehicles with trailer coupling: approx. 35 cm),
a continuous tone sounds. The second red LED
segment lights up.
f Set the radio volume so that the signal tones
are not drowned out.
You can have the volume of the signal tones
adjusted to your own requirements.
A - Front display – left monitoring area
B - Front display – right monitoring area
C - Rear display – right monitoring area
D - Rear display – left monitoring area
Warning indicators, signal tones, distances
If ParkAssist is activated, the green LED
segments of the active warning indicators are lit
up continuously.
The warning indicator for the front area is located
on the dashboard.
The warning indicator for the rear area is located
in the roof lining at the rear of the vehicle.
The warning indicators for the respective
monitoring areas (left and right) are subdivided
into one green, 4 yellow and 2 red LED segments.
254
Parking
If the vehicle approaches an obstacle that has
been detected by the sensors, one or more of the
yellow or red LED segments lights up, depending
on the distance to the obstacle.
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Note on operation
If the obstacle is approached even closer after the
continuous tone sounds and the second red LED
segment lights up, the system may not be able to
recognise the obstacle any longer.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Fault indication with warning tone
Driving with a trailer
– ParkAssist cannot detect sound-absorbing
obstacles (e.g. powdery snow),
In the event of a permanent fault in ParkAssist,
the red LED segments of the active warning indicators light up and a continuous tone sounds for
three seconds after a transmission range has
been selected.
The ParkAssist rear monitoring area is switched
off when the trailer’s power supply is plugged in.
– sound-reflecting obstacles (e.g. glass
surfaces, flat painted surfaces),
– and very thin obstacles.
Other sources of ultrasound (e.g. pneumatic
brakes of other vehicles and jackhammers) may
interfere with detection of obstacles.
Fault indication without warning tone
All red LED segments of the active warning indicators light up when there is a temporary fault in
ParkAssist as a result of other ultrasound sources.
Note
Correct operation is no longer guaranteed if there
is a temporary fault (e.g. caused by ice formation
or heavy soiling on the sensors).
Possible causes
– Defect or system fault.
f Switch ParkAssist off.
When ParkAssist is switched off, the indicator
light in the button lights up.
f Have the fault remedied. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop. We recommend that you
use a Porsche partner for this work since
these are staffed with trained personnel and
have the necessary parts and tools.
The system detects the temporary fault. All LED
segments light up until a speed of 14 km/h
(9 mph) is reached.
ParkAssist is ready for operation again when the
interference is no longer present.
Parking
255
Preconditions
– Vehicle must be equipped with seat memory.
– Control switch A must be turned to position C
(passenger mirror adjustment).
– Reverse gear must be engaged.
Moving mirror to its initial position
The mirror swivels back to its initial position when:
– The vehicle is shifted out of reverse gear or
– The position of the control switch for door
mirror adjustment is changed.
A - Control switch for door mirror adjustment
C - Passenger mirror adjustment
Swivelling down mirror glass as
parking aid
When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror on the
passenger's side swivels down slightly to show
the kerb area.
256
Parking
Warning!
Risk of accident when using the garage door
opener if persons, animals or objects are
within the range of movement of the equipment that is being operated.
f When using the garage door opener, ensure
that no persons, animals or objects are within
the range of movement of the equipment that
is being operated.
f Observe the safety notes for the original handheld transmitter.
Notes on operation
A - Programmable keypad
B - Light-emitting diode for status identification
Garage door opener
The garage door opener of your Porsche replaces
up to three original hand-held transmitters used to
operate various devices (e.g. garage door, gate to
the property, alarm system).
You have the option of assigning up to 3 different
signals to the keys on keypad A.
f Always use the garage door opener in the
direction of travel.
Otherwise, range restrictions cannot be ruled
out.
f Before selling the vehicle, delete the
programmed signals of the garage door
opener on the keypad.
f Please read the instructions for the original
hand-held transmitter to find out whether the
original transmitter is equipped with fixed or
changeable code.
Deleting programmed signals from the
keys
This process deletes the standard codes set at
the factory. Do not repeat this process if you
would like to assign additional signals to the keys.
f Keep the two outer buttons of keypad A
depressed for approximately 20 seconds until
light-emitting diode B begins to flash.
Parking
257
5. Keep both buttons depressed until lightemitting diode B starts to flash (first slowly and
then quickly).
Only release both buttons when light-emitting
diode B flashes quickly.
The rapidly flashing light-emitting diode B
confirms that the new signal has been
programmed successfully.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to assign signals to the
other buttons.
Assigning garage door opener signal to
key with changeable code system
1. Please follow the operating instructions for the
original hand-held transmitter.
Assigning garage door opener signal to
key with fixed code system
1. Please follow the operating instructions for the
original hand-held transmitter.
2. The standard codes set at the factory must be
deleted before programming for the first time.
3. Point the original transmitter at the marked
position.
4. Press the button of the original hand-held transmitter and the button to be allocated on the
keypad simultaneously (see illustration).
258
Parking
2. The standard codes set at the factory must be
deleted before programming for the first time.
3. Point the original transmitter at the marked
position.
4. Press the button of the original hand-held transmitter and the button to be allocated on the
keypad simultaneously.
5. Keep both buttons depressed until lightemitting diode B starts to flash (first slowly and
then quickly).
Only release both buttons when light-emitting
diode B flashes quickly.
The rapidly flashing light-emitting diode B
confirms that the new signal has been
programmed successfully.
6. To synchronise the system:
Press the programming button on the receiver
for the garage door drive.
Afterwards, you usually have approx.
30 seconds to initiate step 5.
7. Press the button to be assigned on the keypad
twice (for some devices you must press the
key on the keypad a third time to complete the
setting process).
8. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to assign signals to the
other buttons.
Note
f Please consult a Porsche partner if you have
not been able to successfully assign signals to
the buttons even though you have carefully
followed the instructions in this chapter and
the operating instructions for the original handheld transmitter. Your Porsche Partner has a
list of all garage door opener signals that can
be taught.
Operating the garage door opener
f Press the corresponding button on keypad A.
Light-emitting diode B lights up during signal
transfer.
Alarm System and Theft Protection
Alarm system............................................. 260
Immobiliser................................................ 262
Steering column lock.................................. 262
Theft protection ......................................... 262
Alarm System and Theft Protection
259
Alarm system
Switching off
The alarm system monitors the following alarm
contacts:
f The alarm system is deactivated when the
vehicle is unlocked.
– Alarm contacts in doors, rear lid, rear window
and engine compartment lid
Note on operation
– Passenger compartment monitoring system:
Movement in the interior when the vehicle is
locked (e.g. attempted theft after breaking
window)
– Inclination sensor: Tilting of the vehicle
(e.g. attempt to tow away the vehicle)
You can temporarily deactivate the passenger
compartment monitoring system and inclination
sensor separately on the multi-purpose display in
the instrument panel.
f If one of these alarm contacts is interrupted,
the alarm horn sounds for approx. 30 seconds
and the hazard warning lights flash.
After 5 seconds of interruption, the alarm is
triggered again. This cycle is repeated ten
times.
Switching on
f The alarm system is activated when the vehicle
is locked.
260
Alarm System and Theft Protection
f If you unlock the vehicle with the key in the
door lock, you must switch the ignition on
(ignition lock position 1) within 15 seconds of
opening the door in order to prevent the alarm
system from being triggered.
Switching off the alarm system if it is
triggered
f Unlock vehicle doors or
f Switch ignition on.
Switching off passenger compartment
monitoring system and inclination sensor
If people or animals are remaining in the locked
vehicle or the vehicle is being transported on a
train or ship, for example, the passenger compartment monitoring system and inclination sensor
must temporarily be switched off.
Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle that
the alarm system will be triggered if the door is
opened.
Note on operation
When locked again, the passenger compartment
monitoring system and inclination sensor are
activated once more.
The passenger compartment monitoring system
and inclination sensor remain switched off if:
– You switched off the passenger compartment
monitoring system and inclination sensor when
you last locked the vehicle and
– The vehicle was automatically locked
30 seconds after unlocking because no door
was opened.
On vehicles without Porsche Entry & Drive
f Quickly press button
of the remote control
twice.
The hazard warning lights flash four times.
The doors are locked but can be opened from
the inside.
The passenger compartment monitoring
system and inclination sensor are switched
off.
– The light-emitting diodes flash rapidly for
2 seconds, go out for 28 seconds, and then
flash slowly.
Faults in the central locking system and the
alarm system
The light-emitting diodes flash rapidly for
2 seconds, light for 28 seconds, and then flash
slowly.
Avoiding false alarms
On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive
f Press button A in the door handle twice
quickly.
The hazard warning lights flash four times.
The doors are locked but can be opened from
the inside.
Opening doors from inside
1. Pull inner door handle once.
Door lock is unlocked.
2. Pull inner door handle again.
Door can be opened.
A - Light-emitting diode for alarm system –
example: driver’s door
Function indication
The locking condition of the vehicle is indicated by
the light-emitting diodes A in the front doors
flashing at different frequencies.
The light-emitting diodes go out when the vehicle
is unlocked.
The passenger compartment monitoring
system and inclination sensor are switched
on.
f If people or animals are remaining in the locked
vehicle or the vehicle is being transported on a
train or ship, for example, the passenger
compartment monitoring system and inclination sensor must temporarily be switched off.
f Always close the sliding/lifting roof or the
Panorama roof system and all door windows.
f Do not leave a mobile phone switched on in the
glasses case of the roof console.
f Always turn off the alarm system before you
attach or uncouple a trailer. The alarm system
could trigger an alarm unintentionally.
– The light-emitting diodes flash rapidly for
2 seconds, then slowly.
Alarm System and Theft Protection
261
Immobiliser
Steering column lock
Theft protection
There is a transponder (an electronic component),
containing a stored code, in each key.
Before the ignition is switched on, the ignition lock
checks the code.
Vehicles without Porsche Entry & Drive
When leaving the vehicle, you should always:
The steering column is automatically locked
when the ignition key is withdrawn from the
ignition lock.
f Close sliding/lifting roof or Panorama roof
system,
The immobiliser can be deactivated and the
engine started only using an authorised ignition
key.
Key:
Switching off the immobiliser
f Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock.
Switching on the immobiliser
f Remove ignition key.
Porsche Entry & Drive:
Switching off the immobiliser
f Switch ignition on.
Switching on the immobiliser
f Switch ignition off.
262
Alarm System and Theft Protection
f Close all door windows,
The steering column is automatically unlocked
when the ignition key is inserted into the ignition
lock.
f Withdraw ignition key (switch ignition off on
vehicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive),
Vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive
f Close oddment trays,
The steering column is automatically locked
when the ignition is switched off and the vehicle is
locked.
Manually locking the steering column on
vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive
f Depress the clutch on vehicles with manual
transmission.
f Once the ignition is switched off, turn the
control unit again to ignition lock position 3
and hold it there for 2 seconds.
The steering column is locked.
The steering column is automatically unlocked
by turning the control unit from ignition lock
position 0.
f Lock the glove compartment,
f Remove valuables, vehicle registration
documents, telephone and house keys from
the car,
f Cover luggage compartment with the luggage
compartment cover,
f Close rear lid and rear window and
f Lock the doors.
Maintenance and Car Care
Notes on maintenance ................................ 264
Checking the engine oil level ...................... 265
Topping up engine oil ................................ 266
Checking the coolant level
and adding coolant..................................... 268
Checking brake fluid level
and changing brake fluid............................. 270
Adding washer fluid ................................... 271
Changing air cleaner................................... 272
Changing particle filter................................ 272
Power steering ......................................... 272
Wiper blades.............................................. 273
Emission control system............................. 276
Fuel can .................................................... 276
Filling with fuel ........................................... 277
Car care instructions .................................. 279
Maintenance and Car Care
263
Notes on maintenance
We recommend a Porsche partner for this work.
Experienced, Porsche trained workshop
personnel, supplied with the latest information as
well as special tools and equipment are prerequisites for looking after your Porsche properly.
If, however, you work on your vehicle yourself, you
must do it with great care. Only in this way is
operational reliability fully guaranteed.
Unskilled maintenance work performed during the
guarantee period may cause you to lose your
claims.
Power measurements
Performance tests on roller test stands are not
approved by Porsche.
Danger!
Risk of death, injury and fire during maintenance work.
f Do not smoke in the vicinity of the battery or
fuel system, and do not use a naked flame.
f Only work on the vehicle in the open or in wellventilated spaces.
f Take care when working near hot engine parts
and parts of the exhaust system.
f Before working in the engine compartment,
always switch the engine off and let it cool
sufficiently.
f If you have to work on the engine while it is
running, always apply the parking brake and
put the gearshift lever in neutral or the
Tiptronic selector lever in position P.
f Take great care to ensure that hands, fingers,
articles of clothing (e.g. ties, sleeves),
necklaces or long hair cannot be caught up by
the radiator fans, drive belt or other moving
parts.
f Exercise extreme caution when working in the
area of the radiator fans.
The radiators and radiator fans are in the front
of the vehicle.
The fans can start running as a function of
temperature, even with the engine switched
off.
264
Maintenance, Car Care
f When the ignition is on, all cables and wires of
the ignition system carry a high voltage.
Special care is therefore required.
f Always place the vehicle on stable supports if
work has to be carried out under the vehicle.
The car jack is not suitable for this.
For information on raising vehicles with air
suspension with level control and height adjustment:
Please observe the chapter “RAISING VEHICLE
WITH THE JACK” on Page 203.
f Refill fluids, e.g. engine oil, washer fluid, brake
fluid or coolant, are hazardous to health.
Store refill fluids out of reach of children and
dispose of these fluids properly.
Checking the engine oil level
f Check the oil level regularly. It is best to do this
when refuelling and before extended journeys.
f Please observe the chapter “NOTES ON
MAINTENANCE” on Page 264.
Oil-level warning
If the oil level is too low, this is indicated by the
oil-warning light lighting up on the multi-purpose
display.
f Check the oil level using the oil dipstick as
soon as possible and add engine oil if necessary.
f For information on warning messages on the
multi-purpose display: Please observe the
chapter “OVERVIEW OF WARNING MESSAGES”
on Page 150.
Note on operation
If the engine compartment lid is opened and oil is
not added, the warning message appears again
after approximately 100 km (62 miles).
Warning!
Risk of injury. The radiator fans can start
running as a function of temperature, even
with the engine switched off.
Risk of burning from hot parts in engine
compartment.
f Exercise extreme caution when working on the
engine compartment.
Preconditions for measuring the oil level
correctly
– Vehicle must be level.
– Engine must be switched off and at operating
temperature.
– Before the oil-level measurement, allow the
engine oil to flow back into the oil pan for
around 3 minutes.
Cayenne S oil dipstick
Checking oil level with the oil dipstick
f Do not top up engine oil.
1. Pull out the oil dipstick and wipe it with a clean,
lint-free cloth.
MIN marking
2. Push oil dipstick fully home, withdraw again
and read off the oil level.
The oil level must never fall below or
exceed the MIN and MAX marks on the
dipstick.
The difference between the marks is approx.
1.5 litres.
MAX marking
f Top up engine oil immediately.
3. Push oil dipstick in as far as the stop.
Maintenance, Car Care
265
Topping up engine oil
Always observe the following points:
– Use only non-seasonal light-running oils in
accordance with the Porsch approval list
which are suitable for the respective temperature range (see “Oils for the correct temperature range”).
This is a precondition for optimum and
problem-free operation of your vehicle.
– Use of these Porsche-approved oils is also a
precondition for the 2year/30,000 km
service intervals of the Cayenne.
f Always use the same oil type if possible.
Do not mix oils.
f Regular oil changes are part of servicing.
Change the oil more frequently in dusty
regions.
Your Porsche partner will be pleased to advise
you.
The right oil for every temperature range
Oil type
Cayenne
Note for Cayenne (V6)
Cayenne oil dipstick
MAX marking
f Do not top up engine oil.
A – Normal marking
f Engine oil can be topped up.
MIN marking
f Top up engine oil immediately.
266
Maintenance, Car Care
Using fuels in accordance with Euro standard
EN 228 and using an engine oil from the Porsche
approval list for Cayenne (V6) are requirements for
the 2 year/30,000 km service intervals.
– You will find a sticker in the engine compartment which provides information (manufacturer) about the first filling of your engine.
– Generally you can find the manufacturer
suggestions on the oil containers or as a
bulletin on the market.
f Do not mix oil additives with your engine oil.
Use1)
(V6): SAE2)
Cayenne S:
0W - 30 For all temperature
and
ranges.
0W - 40
SAE2) 0W - 40, Above –25 °C
5W - 40
and
5W - 50
SAE2) 0W - 40 Below –25 °C
1. Use with Porsche approval
2. SAE viscosity class - Example: SAE 0W - 30
Specification 0W = Viscosity specification for
low temperatures (winter).
Specification 30 = Viscosity specification for
high temperatures.
Engine oil filling point on Cayenne S
Caution!
Fire hazard if engine oil comes into contact
with hot engine parts.
Risk of damage if engine oil comes into
contact with the drive belt.
f Exercise great care when adding engine oil.
Engine oil filling point on Cayenne
1. Unscrew cap of the oil filler opening.
2. Carefully pour in oil in half-litre steps, and
measure the oil level again after each step
after waiting for a few minutes.
Never exceed the MAX mark on the oil
dipstick.
3. Push in the oil dipstick as far as the stop when
the correct oil level is reached.
4. Carefully close cap of the oil filler opening.
Maintenance, Car Care
267
Checking the coolant level and
adding coolant
The coolant provides year-round protection from
corrosion and freezing down to –35 °C.
(Nordic countries –40 °C).
Observe the following points:
f Use only antifreeze authorised by Porsche.
f Check the coolant level regularly.
When the engine is cold and the car is level, the
coolant level must be between the minimum and
maximum marks.
f For further important information on “service
topics”: Please observe the chapter “NOTES
ON MAINTENANCE” on Page 264.
The expansion tank for the coolant is located in
the engine compartment under the engine
compartment cover.
Checking when engine is cold
1. Remove cover.
2. Open cap of the expansion tank carefully and
allow any overpressure to escape.
Then unscrew cap completely.
3. Read the coolant level.
4. Top up with coolant if necessary.
Do not exceed the max. mark.
Only add a mixture of antifreeze and water in
equal parts.
Antifreeze share in coolant:
50 % provides antifreeze protection down to
–35 °C.
5. Screw the cap closed firmly and put on the
cover.
268
Maintenance, Car Care
Checking the coolant level when a warning
message is shown on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel
Warning!
Risk of scalding from hot coolant.
f Take great care when opening the cap of the
expansion tank when the engine is hot.
1. Remove cover.
2. If the engine is hot, cover the expansion tank
cap with a cloth.
Open cap carefully and allow any overpressure
to escape.
Then unscrew cap completely.
3. Read the coolant level.
Top up with coolant if necessary.
Only add a mixture of antifreeze and water in
equal parts.
Antifreeze share in coolant:
50 % provides antifreeze protection down to
–35 °C.
Do not exceed the max. mark.
5. Have the cooling system checked.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Radiator fans
Maintenance notes
Risk of injury. The fans can start running as
a function of temperature, even with the
engine switched off.
If pure water is added in an emergency, the mixing
ratio will have to be corrected.
Marked loss of coolant indicates leakage in the
cooling system.
The radiators and radiator fans are in the front of
the vehicle.
Warning!
f Exercise extreme caution when working in the
area of the radiator fans.
f The cause must be eliminated without delay.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Note on operation
f If the coolant level exceeds the max. mark
when the engine is hot, check the coolant level
again when the engine is cold.
4. Screw the cap closed firmly and put on the
cover.
Maintenance, Car Care
269
Checking brake fluid level and
changing brake fluid
f Only use genuine Porsche brake fluid or a
brake fluid of similar quality which has been
manufactured according to Porsche specifications and product requirements.
f For further important information on “service
topics”: Please observe the chapter “NOTES
ON MAINTENANCE” on Page 264.
Warning!
Brake fluid is toxic and attacks paintwork
and other surfaces.
f Store brake fluid out of reach of children.
f Immediately rinse off spilled brake fluid with
clean water.
Checking the brake fluid level
f If brake fluid gets into your eye, immediately
rinse with clean water for a few minutes. Then
see a doctor immediately.
The reservoir for the hydraulic braking system is
located in the engine compartment.
f Please note all the information on the refill
container of the brake fluid.
270
Maintenance, Car Care
1. Rotate the turn-locks 90° counter-clockwise
(arrow) with a screwdriver and remove the lid.
2. Check the brake fluid level at the transparent
reservoir.
The fluid level should always be between the
MIN and MAX marks.
A slight decrease in the fluid level due to wear and
automatic readjustment of the disc brakes is
normal.
However, if the fluid level falls markedly or below
the minimum mark, the braking system may have
developed a leak.
f Have the braking system checked immediately. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
We recommend that you use a Porsche
partner for this work since these are staffed
with trained personnel and have the necessary
parts and tools.
Changing the brake fluid
Summer filling with water + window cleaner
concentrate in the mixture ratio specified on
the container.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over
time. The absorbed water can impair braking
efficiency.
Winter filling with water + antifreeze +
window cleaner concentrate in the mixture
ratio specified on the container.
f Therefore, have the brake fluid changed in
accordance with the change intervals stated in
the booklet “Guarantee and Maintenance”.
Always follow all the instructions on the
containers of the additives used.
Warning light and warning
message
f Only use window cleaner concentrate which
meets the following requirements:
The warning light on the instrument panel and the
warning message on the multi-purpose display of
the instrument panel
Dilutability 1:100, phosphate-free, suitable for
plastic headlights.
– indicate that the brake fluid level is too low.
– could indicate a braking circuit failure if the
brake pedal travel is greater than normal.
Note on operation
If the warning lights should light up while driving:
f Stop immediately in a suitable place.
f Do not continue driving.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Adding washer fluid
We recommend window cleaner concentrates
approved by Porsche. Your Porsche partner
will be pleased to advise you.
A warning message is shown on the multipurpose display of the instrument panel if the
washer fluid level is too low.
In this case, the remaining quantity is only around
0.8 litre.
The washer fluid reservoir for windscreen, rear
window and headlights is located in the engine
compartment.
f Add washer fluid at the next opportunity.
2. Add washer fluid.
The maximum capacity is approx. 7.5 litres.
3. Close cap carefully.
1. Open cap of washer fluid reservoir.
Observe the following points:
f Depending on the season, mix the water with
the appropriate additives (window cleaner
concentrate, antifreeze) in the correct mixture
ratio.
Maintenance, Car Care
271
Changing air cleaner
Regular replacement of the filter element is part of
servicing.
f In dusty conditions, clean the filter element
more frequently and replace if necessary.
For further important information on “service
topics”: Please observe the chapter “NOTES ON
MAINTENANCE” on Page 264.
Changing particle filter
Regular replacement of the filter is part of
servicing.
A dirty filter can be the cause of reduced air
throughput.
f Have the filter replaced.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Note on operation
The particle filter ensures that the fresh air
entering the passenger compartment is virtually
free of dust and pollen.
f If the outside air is polluted by exhaust fumes,
press the circulating-air button.
272
Maintenance, Car Care
Power steering
Warning!
Risk of accident. When the engine is
stationary (e.g. when the car is on tow) or the
hydraulic system fails, there is no power
assisted steering.
Therefore, substantially more force will have
to be exerted in order to steer.
f Exercise great care when on tow.
f Have the fault remedied. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop. We recommend that you
use a Porsche partner for this work since
these are staffed with trained personnel and
have the necessary parts and tools.
The flow noise heard at full steering lock is designrelated and does not indicate a defect in the
steering system.
Checking and adding hydraulic fluid
Observe the following points:
f Only use genuine Porsche hydraulic fluid or a
hydraulic fluid of similar quality which has been
approved according to Porsche specifications
and product requirements.
f Check the fluid level with the engine stopped
and cold (engine temperature approx. 20 °C).
1. Remove cover A.
Note on operation
f If the fluid level drops significantly, please have
the cause remedied immediately.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Wiper blades
Maintenance notes
Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital
for a clear view.
f Replace the wiper blades twice per year
(before and after the cold season) or if wiper
performance deteriorates or the blades are
damaged.
f For important information on “service topics”:
Please observe the chapter “CAR CARE
INSTRUCTIONS” on Page 279.
Caution!
2. Open the reservoir cap.
Risk of damage if wiper arm accidentally
falls back onto the windscreen.
3. The fluid level should be between the MIN and
MAX marks on the dipstick.
f Always hold the wiper arm securely when
replacing the wiper blade.
4. Add hydraulic fluid if necessary.
Risk of damage if wiper blades that are
frozen in place are loosened improperly.
5. Close cap carefully.
6. Put on cover A.
7. Close engine compartment lid.
f Thaw the wiper blades before loosening them.
Risk of damage.
If the wiper blades are not changed properly,
they can come loose when the car is moving.
f Check whether the wiper blades are seated
securely.
The wiper blade must be pushed onto the
wiper arm up to the stop.
Maintenance, Car Care
273
f Periodically clean the wiper blades with
window cleaner, especially after the vehicle
has been washed in a car wash.
We recommend the Porsche window cleaner. If
they are very dirty (e.g. with insect remains),
they can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth.
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this may be as
a result of the following:
– If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
wash, wax residues may adhere to the
windscreen. These wax residues can be
removed only by using window cleaner concentrate.
Please observe the chapter “ADDING WASHER
FLUID” on Page 271.
Please contact your Porsche partner for
further information.
– The wiper blades may be damaged.
Replace damaged wiper blades as soon as
possible.
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Switch the wipers off (position 0).
3. Switch ignition off.
4. Fold windscreen wiper arm away from the
windscreen.
5. Lift up wiper blade completely (arrow).
274
Maintenance, Car Care
6. Unclip cap A.
7. Turn wiper blade at right angles (arrow 1).
Changing rear window wiper blade
8. Pull off wiper blade towards the windscreen
(arrow 2).
1. Apply the parking brake.
9.Push on new wiper blade.
Make sure that the wiper blade is pushed onto
the wiper arm up to the stop.
10.Fit cap A again.
11.Fold wiper blade back to its original position.
12.Carefully fold wiper arm back onto the
windscreen.
2. Switch ignition off.
3. Carefully fold the wiper arm away from the rear
window until it reaches its locking position
(approx. 60°).
4. Carefully unclip the wiper blade from the wiper
arm (arrow).
Hold the wiper arm with your other hand when
doing this.
5. Push the new wiper blade onto the centre of
the wiper arm and snap it into place.
6. Carefully fold wiper arm back onto the rear
window.
Maintenance, Car Care
275
Emission control system
To ensure the efficiency of the emission control
system (three-way catalytic converter, oxygen
sensor and electronic control unit),
f Avoid high cornering speeds after the fuel-level
warning light lights up.
f Never drive the tank dry.
Fuel can
Danger!
– use only unleaded fuel.
For information on tow-starting or push-starting
the vehicle:
Please observe the chapter “TOWING AND TOWSTARTING” on Page 352.
Risk of fire or explosion if the fuel can is
damaged in an accident and fuel escapes.
Escaping vapours can be harmful to health.
Tip on driving
Risk of fire in the area of the exhaust system.
f Observe the relevant laws.
– observe the service intervals,
Faulty preparation of the fuel/air mixture can
cause the catalytic converters to overheat and
can destroy them.
Warning!
Risk of damage to emission control system.
f Avoid frequent and prolonged use of the
starter if the engine does not start.
f If misfiring occurs while driving (identifiable by
rough running of the engine or loss of power),
have the fault remedied immediately.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
276
Maintenance, Car Care
f Do not apply additional undersealing or rust
protection agent on or near the exhaust
manifolds, exhaust pipes, catalytic converters
or heat shields.
The protective material could overheat and
ignite while you are driving.
f Do not drive or park your vehicle where
combustible materials, such as dry grass or
leaves, can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system.
f Do not carry a fuel can on journeys.
Filling with fuel
When the ignition is on, the fuel level is displayed
on the instrument panel.
f For further information on this:
Please observe the chapter “FUEL GAUGE” on
Page 122.
Warning!
Fuel is highly flammable and harmful to
health.
f Fire, naked flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling fuel.
f Avoid contact with skin or clothing.
f Do not inhale fuel vapours.
To avoid permanent damage to the functionality of
the catalytic converters and oxygen sensors, use
only unleaded fuel.
The engine is designed to provide optimum
performance and fuel consumption if unleaded
premium fuel with 98 RON/88 MON is used.
Note on operation
Information on the fuel quality is normally provided
on the petrol pump.
If this should not be the case, ask a petrol station
attendant.
If the recommended fuel is not available,
you can also use unleaded regular fuel
(91 RON/82.5 MON) in an emergency.
However, this could reduce performance and
increase fuel consumption.
f Avoid driving at full throttle.
In some countries the available fuel quality may
not meet requirements, and this can lead to
coking in the area of the intake valve.
In this case, the fuel may be mixed with the
additive sold and recommended by Porsche after
consulting a Porsche partner.
Porsche part number 000 043 206 89.
f Observe the instructions and mixture ratios
provided on the container.
1. Stop the engine and switch off the ignition.
2. Open the filler flap by
pressing on the rear part of the filler flap
(arrow). The vehicle must be unlocked.
If unleaded premium fuels with octane numbers of
at least 95 RON/85 MON are used, the engine’s
knock control automatically adapts the ignition
timing.
f Never drive the tank dry.
Maintenance, Car Care
277
Note on operation
Do not add further fuel once the correctly
operated automatic pump nozzle has switched
off. Fuel could spray or could run over when
heated.
7. Replace the tank cap immediately after refuelling and turn it until you hear it and feel it
engage.
8. Close the filler flap and press on the rear of the
filler flap (arrow) until it can be felt to engage.
Maintenance note
If you lose the tank filler cap, you must replace it
with an original part only.
3. Slowly unscrew the tank cap.
Hang the tank cap on the filler flap by its plastic
strap A.
4. Add the fuel additive recommended by
Porsche if necessary.
5. Fully insert the pump nozzle in the filler neck.
The handle of the pump nozzle must point
downwards.
The maximum filling capacity is approx.
100 litres, including approx. 12 litres reserve
6. Operate the pump nozzle and refuel the
vehicle.
278
Maintenance, Car Care
Emergency unlocking of filler flap
If the electrical unlocking mechanism is faulty, the
filler flap can be opened as follows:
1. Remove lid of right side storage compartment.
2. Pull emergency release A in the direction of
the arrow.
The filler flap pops open.
Car care instructions
Regular, skilled care helps to maintain the value of
your Porsche and can be a precondition for the
upholding of claims under the vehicle guarantee
and warranty.
You can obtain suitable care products at your
Porsche partner, individually or as a complete set.
f Follow the instructions for use on the
packaging of care products.
f Keep care products out of reach of children.
f If necessary, dispose of these fluids properly.
To ensure that the vehicle’s condition is expertly
checked and that the warranty remains valid for
the full period, every Porsche partner will inspect
the level of care of the car and record the results
in writing. For this purpose, the Porsche partner
will issue a Condition Report and also certify this
in the “Guarantee and Maintenance” booklet under
“Long-life Guarantee Condition Report”.
High-pressure cleaning units
Warning!
High-pressure cleaning units can damage
the following components:
– Tyres,
f Never use high-pressure cleaning units with a
round-jet nozzle.
A high-pressure cleaning unit with round nozzle
will damage your vehicle. The tyres are particularly susceptible to damage.
f Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of
the aforementioned components.
– Logos, emblems,
– Painted surfaces,
Care of door lock
– Widened wings,
f To prevent the door lock from freezing during
the cold season, cover the lock barrel with a
suitable adhesive tape during washing.
– Lock and latch of the removable towing attachment,
– Seals of the electrically retractable ball hitch,
– Generator, valve covers,
– ParkAssist sensors.
f Please observe the operating instructions from
the unit manufacturer.
If the lock freezes nevertheless, use an ordinary
de-icer.
In many cases, a well warmed key can help.
Never use excessive force.
f Always cover the lid of the brake fluid reservoir
prior to cleaning. Never point the cleaning jet
directly at the lid.
f When cleaning with a flat-jet nozzle or a socalled “dirt blaster”, maintain a minimum
distance of 50 cm (20 inches).
Maintenance, Car Care
279
Washing
The best protection for the vehicle from the
damaging effects of the environment is frequent
washing and preservation.
The longer road salt, road dust, industrial dust,
insect remains, bird excrement, and tree exudations (e.g. resin, pollen), etc. are allowed to
remain on the bodywork, the more serious is their
harmful effect.
Pay attention to the following points in order to
ensure that the vehicle is washed thoroughly
without damaging the paintwork:
f The underside of the vehicle should also be
thoroughly washed at the end of the gritting
season at the latest.
f Wash your vehicle only at sites provided for
this purpose to prevent soot, grease, oil and
heavy metals from entering the environment.
f Dark colours are slightly more susceptible to
scratching and require particularly careful
paint care.
Dark paints make even the smallest surface
blemishes (scratches) more conspicuous than
lighter colours.
f Do not wash your Porsche in direct sunlight or
when its body is hot.
f When washing by hand, use a car shampoo,
plenty of water, and a soft sponge or washing
brush.
We recommend Porsche car shampoo.
280
Maintenance, Car Care
f Begin washing the vehicle by thoroughly
wetting the paintwork and rinsing the heavy
dirt off.
f After washing the vehicle, rinse it thoroughly
with water and leather it dry.
Do not use the same leather to rub down as
you use for cleaning the windscreen and
windows.
Warning!
Risk of accident! Reduced or uneven braking
action may be caused by wet brakes.
f After washing the vehicle, test the brakes and
briefly brake the discs dry.
When doing so, make sure that following traffic
is not affected.
Cleaning in car washes
Optional add-on parts or parts which project
beyond the contours of the vehicle may be
damaged by design features of car washes.
The following parts are particularly susceptible to
damage:
– Windscreen wipers and rear wiper (always
switch them off – position 0 – to prevent them
wiping unintentionally in intermittent or sensor
operation).
– Door mirrors (always fold in)
– Roof Transport System (always remove
completely)
– Spoiler
– Wheels (the wider the rim and the lower the
tyre height, the greater the risk of damage)
f Please consult the operator before using
automatic car washes.
f Wash and leather by hand all points not
reached by a car wash, such as door and lid
seams or door sills.
Paint care
Polishing
In order to protect the paint of your vehicle in the
best possible way against mechanical and
chemical damage, you should
Only when the original polish can no longer be
obtained using preservatives should paint polish
be used to clean the paint.
We recommend Porsche paint polish.
– preserve it regularly,
– polish it if necessary,
– remove spots and stains, and
– repair paint damage as soon as possible.
General information
f Never rub a dusty vehicle with a dry cloth,
because the grains of dirt will damage the
paintwork.
f Do not treat matt-painted components with
preservatives or polishes, otherwise the matt
effect will be lost.
Preservation
The paint surface becomes dull over time due to
weathering.
f Preserve paint regularly.
f Apply paint preservative after washing the
vehicle and polish it smooth to preserve the
paintwork.
This keeps the paint shiny and elastic. Dirt is
prevented from adhering to the paint surface and
industrial dust is prevented from penetrating the
paint.
Removing spots and stains
f Remove tar spatters, traces of oil, insects etc.
as soon as possible with an insect remover, as
they discolour the paint if left to work on it over
time.
f Carefully wash the treated areas again.
Repairing minor paint damage
f Have minor paint damage (cracks, scratches
or stone damage) repaired immediately
before corrosion begins.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Cleaning the engine compartment
Caution!
Risk of damage, e.g. to the generator,
painted surfaces, and the valve covers.
f Never use high-pressure cleaners with a roundjet nozzle.
f Always observe a minimum distance of 50 cm
(20 inches).
f Always cover the lid of the brake fluid reservoir
prior to cleaning with a high-pressure cleaner.
Never point the cleaning jet directly at the lid.
f Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of
the aforementioned components.
Note on operation
If the vehicle is driven off-road frequently and after
driving on salted or gritted roads:
f Clean the engine compartment regularly.
If traces of corrosion have already formed, these
must be thoroughly removed. An anti-corrosion
primer is then applied at these locations, followed
by top coat paint.
Paint data can be found on the vehicle data bank.
f For information on the location of vehicle data
bank: Please observe the chapter “DATA
BANK” on Page 357.
Maintenance, Car Care
281
Cleaning windows
Care of windscreen wiper blades
f Clean all windows regularly, inside and out,
with window cleaner.
We recommend the Porsche window cleaner.
Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital
for a clear view.
f Make sure not to damage the TV antennas in
the side windows when cleaning.
f Do not use the same leather for painted
surfaces and for drying the windows.
Preservative residues could reduce transparency.
f Remove insect residues with insect remover.
Note
The front side windows feature a water-repellent
(hydrophobic) coating which prevents soiling of
the windows.
This coating is subject to natural wear and can be
renewed.
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
282
Maintenance, Car Care
f Replace the wiper blades twice per year
(before and after the cold season) or if wiper
performance deteriorates or the blades are
damaged.
f Please observe the chapter “WIPER BLADES”
on Page 273.
f Periodically clean the wiper blades with
window cleaner, especially after the vehicle
has been washed in a car wash.
We recommend the Porsche window cleaner.
In the event of heavy soiling (e.g. insect
residue), the blades can be cleaned with a
sponge or a cloth. If the wiper blades rub or
squeak, this may have the following causes:
If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash,
wax residues may adhere to the windscreen.
These wax residues can be removed only by using
window cleaner concentrate.
f Please observe the chapter “ADDING WASHER
FLUID” on Page 271.
Please contact your Porsche partner for further
information.
Repairing the underbody protection
The underside of the vehicle is lastingly protected
against chemical and mechanical effects.
Damage to the protective coating while driving
cannot be ruled out.
f For this reason, have the vehicle underside
checked and repaired at regular intervals by a
qualified specialist workshop.
Warning!
Risk of fire in the area of the exhaust system.
f Do not apply additional undersealing or rust
protection agent on or near the exhaust
manifolds, exhaust pipes, catalytic converters
or heat shields.
The protective material could overheat and
ignite while you are driving.
Cleaning headlights, lights, interior and
exterior plastic parts
Observe the following points:
f Use only clean water and a little dishwashing
detergent or interior window cleaner to clean
headlights, lights, plastic parts and surfaces.
Use a soft sponge or a soft, lint-free cloth.
Note
An interior window cleaner can also be used to
clean plastic surfaces (observe cleaning instructions on the container!).
We recommend the Porsche interior window
cleaner.
f Gently wipe the surface without applying too
much pressure.
f Do not clean when dry.
f Never use other chemical cleaners or
solvents.
f Rinse cleaned surfaces with clear water.
Light alloy wheels
Metal particles (such as brass or copper in brake
dust) must not remain too long on a light alloy
wheel.
Contact corrosion can cause pitting.
Note
Cleaners with an oxide-removing effect or wrong
pH value, as are commonly used for other metals,
as well as mechanical tools and products, will
damage the oxide layer and are therefore unsuitable.
f Use only cleaners for light alloy wheels
(pH value 9.5).
We recommend Porsche cleaner for light alloy
rims.
f If possible, wash the wheels every two weeks
with a sponge or washing brush. Where there
is road salt, grit or industrial dust, weekly
cleaning is necessary.
f Every three months, after cleaning, grease the
wheels with car wax or an acid-free grease
(e.g. Vaseline).
Rub the grease in well with a soft cloth.
Warning!
Danger of accident if cleaning agents
(e.g. wheel cleaning agents) come into
contact with the brake discs. The resulting
film on the brake discs can impair braking
performance.
f Make sure that no cleaning agent comes into
contact with the brake discs.
f If cleaning agent has come into contact with
the brake discs, thoroughly clean the brake
discs with a strong jet of water.
f Paying attention to any road users behind you,
dry the brake discs by applying the brakes.
Stainless steel exhaust tailpipes
Stainless steel exhaust tailpipes can discolour due
to soiling, strong heat, and combustion residues.
The original polish can be achieved again using
commercially available metal polishing paste or
metal polish.
f For information on cleaning the light alloy
wheels in car washes:
Please observe the chapter “CLEANING IN CAR
WASHES” on Page 280.
Maintenance, Car Care
283
Cleaning door, roof, lid and window seals
Caution!
The lubricant coating on the inner door seals
may be damaged by unsuitable cleaning and
care agents.
f Do not use any chemical cleaning agents or
solvents.
f Do not use any care agents.
f Wash dirt (e.g. abrasion, dust, road salts) from
all seals regularly using warm soapy water.
f When there is a frost hazard, protect the outer
door seals and the lid seals against freezing
into place with a suitable care product.
Leather care
The natural surface markings of leather,
e.g. creases, healed scars, insect sting marks,
structural differences and slight variations in
shade and grain add to the attractiveness of the
high-quality natural leather product.
Observe the following care instructions:
Caution!
The leather will be damaged by the use of
unsuitable cleaning and care agents and by
inappropriate treatment.
f Do not use caustic cleaners or hard cleaning
objects!
f Perforated leather must under no circumstances get wet on its reverse side.
f All types of leather should be cleaned regularly
to remove fine dust using a soft, damp, white
woollen cloth or a commercially available
microfibre cloth.
f Remove heavy contamination with a leather
cleaner.
Please always follow the instructions for use
given on the containers.
We recommend the Porsche leather care
product.
f Treat cleaned leather only with a leather care
liquid.
We recommend the Porsche leather care
product.
284
Maintenance, Car Care
Cleaning carpet, floor mats
f Use a vacuum cleaner or a brush (not too soft)
for cleaning.
f Remove heavy dirt and stains with a stain
remover.
We recommend Porsche stain remover.
To protect carpets, the Porsche range of accessories includes mats of the correct size with the
appropriate fastenings.
Warning!
Risk of accident.
f Do not obstruct the pedal travel with floor
mats.
Secure floor mats properly – do not place
them loosely on the floor.
Cleaning airbag covers
Danger!
There is a danger of severe or fatal injuries if
operation of the airbag system is impaired by
improper cleaning work.
f Do not make any modifications whatsoever on
individual components such as the padded
covers of the steering wheel, the front seats,
the roof pillars and the roofliners.
f Let your Porsche partner clean these components.
Cleaning fabric linings
f Fabric linings on pillars, roofliner and sun
blinds etc. must be treated only using suitable
cleaning agents or a suitable dry foam and a
soft brush.
Alcantara care
Laying up your Porsche
Do not use a leather care product to clean
Alcantara.
If you wish to keep your Porsche off the road for a
lengthy period, we recommend that you contact
your Porsche partner.
They will be glad to advise you about the necessary measures, e.g. corrosion prevention, care,
maintenance and storage.
For regular care it is sufficient to clean the cover
with a soft brush.
Heavy abrasion or rubbing when cleaning causes
a lasting change in the surface.
Cleaning when lightly soiled
Further important information on “Laying up your
Porsche” can be found in other chapters.
Cleaning when heavily soiled
f To lock the vehicle when the battery is disconnected:
f Wet a soft cloth with water or a neutral soap
solution and wipe off the dirt.
f Wet a soft cloth with lukewarm water or
thinned white spirit and dab the dirt from the
outside in.
f Please observe the chapter “BATTERY” on
Page 328.
f Please observe the chapter “NOT ALL VEHICLE
DOORS ARE LOCKED.” on Page 29.
Cleaning the seat belts
f Use mild detergent to clean soiled belts.
f When drying, avoid direct sunlight.
f Only use suitable cleaning agents.
f Do not dye or bleach the belts.
The belt fabric could be weakened, thus
affecting safety.
Maintenance, Car Care
285
Minor repairs
Notes on minor repairs................................ 287
Tyres and wheels........................................ 288
Jack ......................................................... 294
Tool kit ...................................................... 294
Compressor ............................................... 295
Spacers ..................................................... 295
Wheel bolts ................................................ 296
Flat tyre ..................................................... 297
Inflating tyres on vehicles
without level control ................................... 309
Inflating tyres on vehicles with level control ... 311
Electrical system ........................................ 317
Battery....................................................... 328
Replacing the remote control battery............ 331
External power supply, jump lead starting ..... 332
Replacing bulbs .......................................... 335
Headlights.................................................. 335
Tail light ..................................................... 345
Number plate lights .................................... 348
Headlight adjustment .................................. 349
Changing headlights from left
to right-hand traffic ..................................... 349
Bulb chart .................................................. 351
Towing and tow-starting .............................. 352
286
Minor Repairs
Notes on minor repairs
First aid kit
We recommend that you use your Porsche partner
for carrying out this work.
Experienced, Porsche trained workshop
personnel, supplied with the latest information as
well as special tools and equipment are prerequisites for looking after your Porsche properly.
There is space for the first aid kit under the rear
bench on the right in the direction of travel.
If, however, you work on your vehicle yourself, you
must do it with great care. Only in this way is
operational reliability fully guaranteed.
Unskilled maintenance work performed during the
guarantee period may cause you to lose your
claims.
Warning triangles
The warning triangles are stored in the right-hand
storage compartment in the luggage compartment.
Tool kit
The tool kit is accommodated in the spare-wheel
well under the cover of the loadspace floor.
f For information on folding the rear seats
forward: Please observe the chapter
“FOLDING REAR SEATS FORWARD” on
Page 218.
Danger!
Risk of death, injury and fire during
maintenance work.
f Do not smoke in the vicinity of the battery or
fuel system, and do not use a naked flame.
f Only work on the vehicle in the open or in wellventilated spaces.
f Take care when working near hot engine parts.
f Before working in the engine compartment,
always switch the engine off and let it cool
sufficiently.
f If you have to work on the engine while it is
running, always apply the parking brake and
put the gearshift lever in neutral or the
Tiptronic selector lever in position P.
f Exercise extreme caution when working in the
area of the radiator fans.
The radiators and radiator fans are in the front
of the vehicle.
The fans can start running as a function of
temperature, even with the engine switched
off.
f When the ignition is on, all cables and wires of
the ignition system carry a high voltage.
Special care is therefore required.
f Always place the vehicle on stable supports if
work has to be carried out under the vehicle.
The car jack is not suitable for this.
For information on raising vehicles with air
suspension with level control and height adjustment:
Please observe the chapter “RAISING VEHICLE
WITH THE JACK” on Page 203.
f Refill fluids, e.g. engine oil, brake fluid or
coolant, are hazardous to health.
Store refill fluids out of reach of children and, if
necessary, dispose of these fluids properly.
f Take great care to ensure that hands, fingers,
articles of clothing (ties, sleeves, etc.),
necklaces or long hair cannot be caught up by
the radiator fans, drive belt or other moving
parts.
Minor Repairs
287
Tyres and wheels
In addition to correct tyre filling pressure and
correct wheel alignment, the service life of the
tyres also depends on your driving style.
Abrupt acceleration, high cornering speeds and
heavy braking increase tyre wear. The tread wear
is also greater at higher outside temperatures and
on rough road surfaces.
Just like the engine, tyres always require the
correct operating conditions. When correctly
treated, they are a long-lived safety component on
your Porsche.
For your own protection and that of other road
users, you must observe the following instructions.
We recommend inspecting the tyres for damage
after off-road driving.
Load and speed
f Do not overload your vehicle. Be careful about
the roof load. There is a danger from
overloading
+ insufficient tyre pressure
+ high speed
+ high outside temperature
(e.g. holiday driving).
Tyre pressure
The tyre pressure must match the prescribed
value.
288
Minor Repairs
You can find information on the tyre pressure:
– In the front left door aperture.
– In the Technical Data chapter in this Driver’s
Manual:
Please observe the chapter “TYRE
PRESSURES, COLD” on Page 363.
These values are for cold tyres (20 °C).
f Check the tyre pressure at least every
2 weeks. Always check when tyres are cold.
f On vehicles with Tyre Pressure Monitoring:
Please observe the chapter “SETTING TYRE
PRESSURE MONITORING” on Page 134.
When tyres are warm, the tyre pressure is
increased.
f Never let air out of hot tyres. This could cause
the tyre pressure to fall below the prescribed
value.
Valve caps protect the valve from dust and dirt,
and thus from leakage.
f Always screw caps down tightly.
f Replace missing caps immediately.
Insufficient tyre pressure can cause tyres to
overheat and thus be damaged – even invisibly.
Hidden tyre damage is not eliminated by subsequently correcting the tyre pressure.
Tyre damage
Cleaning with high-pressure cleaners can damage
the tyres.
f For further information on cleaning with highpressure cleaners:
Please observe the chapter “HIGH-PRESSURE
CLEANING UNITS” on Page 279.
Warning!
Risk of accident due to hidden tyre damage.
Tyres may burst, especially at high speeds.
f Check tyres including the sidewalls regularly
for foreign bodies, nicks, cuts, cracks and
bulges.
f Cross kerb edges slowly and at right angles if
possible.
Avoid driving over steep or sharp kerbs.
f In cases of doubt, have the wheel (particularly
the inner side) checked by an expert.
In the case of the following tyre damage, the tyre
must be replaced for safety reasons:
– Tyre damage where the possibility of a ply
fracture cannot be ruled out.
– If the tyre has been thermally and mechanically
overloaded following a loss of pressure or
other previous damage.
Maintenance note
Tyre repairs are not permissible under any circumstances.
f After driving off-road, examine tyres for signs
of damage such as cuts, tears, bulges or
foreign objects stuck in the tread and replace
if necessary.
Kerbs
Heavy or sharp-angled impacts against kerbs or
sharp-edged objects (e.g. stones) can cause
hidden tyre damage that only shows up later.
Depending on the strength of the impact, the rim
flange may also be damaged.
Storing wheels
f Always store wheels in cool, dry, dark conditions. Tyres without wheels should be stored in
a standing position.
f Avoid contact with petrol, oil and grease.
In no case should tyres be more than 6 years
old.
The idea that tyres become more wear-resistant
with storage and age has no foundation.
Chemical additives that make the rubber elastic
lose their effect in the course of time and the
rubber becomes brittle. The age of a tyre can be
seen from the DOT code on the tyre sidewall.
If, for example, the last four digits are 1206, this
means: the tyre was manufactured in the twelfth
week of 2006.
Tread
The less tread, the greater the danger of
aquaplaning.
f For safety reasons, replace the tyres before
the wear indicators appear (webs in the tyre
grooves, 1.6 mm high).
f Check tyre tread regularly, particularly before
and after long journeys.
Wheel balancing
f As a precaution, have wheels with summer
tyres balanced in the spring, and those with
mud and snow tyres before winter.
Only specified weights may be used for wheel
balancing.
Self-adhesive weights must not come into contact
with cleaning agents, since they could drop off.
Wheel change
f When wheels are removed, mark the direction
of rotation and position of each wheel.
Example:
FR (front right), FL, RR and RL.
f Always fit the wheels in accordance with their
marking.
Minor Repairs
289
Wheel alignment
Replacing tyres
Uneven tread wear indicates incorrect wheel alignment. In this case, the vehicle should be checked.
f Before having new tyres fitted, find out about
the current approval status.
f Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Warning!
Risk of accident. You can lose control of the
vehicle.
If, during a journey, uneven running or vibrations occur that could be caused by damage
to tyres or the car:
f Reduce speed immediately, but without
braking sharply.
f Stop the vehicle and check the tyres.
If no cause for the fault can be found, drive
carefully to the nearest qualified specialist
workshop.
We recommend that you use a Porsche
partner for this work since these are staffed
with trained personnel and have the necessary
parts and tools.
290
Minor Repairs
f Use only tyre makes tested and approved by
Porsche.
Basically, only tyres of the same make, same
type and with the same specification number
(e.g. “N0”, “N1” ...) may be fitted.
In the initial period, new tyres do not have their full
grip.
f Therefore, do not drive above moderate
speeds during the first 100 to 200 km
(60 to 120 miles).
If new tyres are fitted to only one axle, the
different tread depths on the two axles can cause
a marked change from the previous driving behaviour to which you have become accustomed. This
is particularly true when new tyres are fitted to the
rear axle.
The effect is reduced continuously, however, as
tyre mileage increases.
f Adapt your driving style to the changed
handling.
Tyres should only be fitted by specialist firms.
When a defective tyre is replaced, it should be
noted that deviations in tread depth must not
exceed 30 % on one axle.
f Do not use second-hand tyres if you do not
know their history.
Valves
f Use only plastic valve caps.
Rubber valves must be replaced whenever the
tyres are changed.
In the case of metal valves, please observe the
fitting and replacement instructions.
Use only genuine Porsche metal valves or valves
of the same quality, which are manufactured
according to the specifications and production
demands of Porsche.
f Protect valve inserts against soiling with valve
caps.
Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss
of air.
f Fit winter tyres to both axles in good time
before the cold season begins.
Your Porsche partner will be pleased to advise
you.
Maintenance note
We recommend fitting winter tyres on the vehicle
at temperatures below 7 °C since the driving
performance of summer tyres is reduced at low
temperatures. Summer tyres may be permanently
damaged at extremely low temperatures.
Winter tyres lose their suitability when their tread
depth falls below 4 mm.
f Please note that in addition to winter tyres, allseason and all-terrain tyres also belong to the
category M+S tyres.
Sticker for maximum speed
Winter tyres
Warning!
Risk of accident due to excessive speed.
f Always observe the permissible maximum
speed of the respective tyre.
f A sticker showing the maximum permissible
speed must be affixed in the driver’s field of
vision.
Observe the country-specific laws.
Wheel change
f When wheels are removed, mark the direction
of rotation and position of each wheel.
Example: FR (front right), FL, RR and RL.
f Always fit the wheels in accordance with their
marking.
Snow chains
Optimal handling characteristics can be achieved
only when snow chains are fitted on all four wheels
of the vehicle. It is also possible to fit snow chains
on only one axle (preferably the rear axle).
f Remove spacers if 18 inch tyres, snow chains
or a collapsible spare wheel are mounted.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the wheel housings if the
spacers on the rear axle are not removed
before fitting snow chains.
f The 17 mm spacers must always be removed
from the rear axle when snow chains are to be
fitted.
f For information on the spacers:
Please observe the chapter “SPACERS” on
Page 295.
For information on removing the spacers:
Please observe the chapter “CHANGING A
WHEEL WITH REMOVAL OF 17 MM SPACERS”
on Page 305.
f Use only the fine-link snow chains recommended and authorised by Porsche so that
sufficient clearance between the wheel well
and the chain is assured.
Minor Repairs
291
f For information on approved snow chains:
Please observe the chapter “TYRES, RIMS,
TRACKS” on Page 361.
f Before fitting chains, remove accumulated ice
and snow from the wheel well.
f Observe the maximum permissible speed
when using snow chains of 50 km/h
(30 mph).
292
Minor Repairs
T = up to 190 km/h (118 mph)
H = up to 210 km/h (131 mph)
V = up to 240 km/h (149 mph)
W = up to 270 km/h (167 mph)
Y = up to 300 km/h (186 mph)
Tip on driving
f Tyres with a maximum speed rating that is
lower than the specified maximum vehicle
speed may be mounted only if they bear an
M+S identification on the tyre sidewall.
Please note that in addition to winter tyres, allseason and all-terrain tyres are also subject to
speed limits and bear this identification.
Inscription on light alloy wheels
ABCDEF-
Nominal width in mm
Cross-section ratio in %
Belt type code letter for radial
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating code number
Speed code letter
The rim width in inches G and the rim offset L are
visible from the outside. This information can be
found near the tyre valve.
GHI JKL-
Rim width in inches
Rim-flange contour code letter
Symbol for drop-centre rim
Rim diameter in inches
Double hump
Rim offset in mm
Inscription on radial tyre
Speed code letters
The speed code letter F indicates the maximum
permissible speed for the tyre.
This code letter is shown on the tyre sidewall.
Minor Repairs
293
Warning!
Risk of injury. The vehicle may slip off the
jack.
f Only use the jack to raise the car for wheel
changing.
f Always place the vehicle on stable supports if
work has to be carried out under the vehicle.
The car jack is not suitable for this.
Lifting the vehicle with a lifting platform
or trolley jack
f For information on wheel changing: Please
observe the chapter “CHANGING A WHEEL” on
Page 304.
f Lift only at the jacking points provided.
A - Tool kit
Jack
The jack is accommodated with the tool kit A
under the loadspace floor.
294
Minor Repairs
f Before driving the vehicle onto a lifting
platform, ensure that there is sufficient space
between the lifting platform and the vehicle.
f In order to avoid serious damage, never jack
up the vehicle at the engine, transmission or at
the axles.
Tool kit
The tool kit and, where appropriate, the
compressor with pressure tester are accommodated under the loadspace floor.
Note on operation
The screwdriver is located in the handle of the
wheel bolt wrench.
A - Compressor
Compressor
On vehicles without level-control system, there is
an additional compressor A with pressure tester
under the loadspace floor.
f For information on filling the tyres using the
compressor under the loadspace floor:
Please observe the chapter “INFLATING TYRES
ON VEHICLES WITHOUT LEVEL CONTROL” on
Page 309.
On vehicles with level control, you can use the
compressor of the level-control system to fill the
tyres.
The filler hose required for this purpose can be
found under the loadspace floor in the spare-wheel
well.
Spacers
f For information on filling the tyres with the
compressor of the level-control system:
Please observe the chapter “INFLATING TYRES
ON VEHICLES WITH LEVEL CONTROL” on
Page 311.
f Remove spacers if 18 inch tyres, snow chains
or a collapsible spare wheel are mounted.
f Use the spacers only together with wheels
approved by Porsche.
Before having spacers fitted, find out about the
current approval status.
Danger!
Risk of accident if spacers are not removed
before mounting 18 inch tyres or a collapsible spare wheel.
f Always remove the 17 mm spacers before
mounting 18 inch tyres or a collapsible spare
wheel because the wheel cannot be fitted
correctly.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the wheel housings if the
spacers on the rear axle are not removed
before fitting snow chains.
f The 17 mm spacers must always be removed
from the rear axle when snow chains are to be
fitted.
Minor Repairs
295
Tightening torque
Note on operation
f For information on removing the spacers:
Please observe the chapter “CHANGING A
WHEEL WITH REMOVAL OF 17 MM SPACERS”
on Page 305.
Tightening torque of the wheel bolts 160 Nm
(118 ftlb.).
Security wheel bolts
f For information on fitting the spacers: Please
observe the chapter “FITTING THE 17 MM
SPACERS” on Page 306.
The adapter (wrench socket) for the security
wheel bolts is in the tool kit.
The adapter must be used between the wheel bolt
and the wheel bolt wrench to loosen or tighten
wheel bolts with anti-theft protection.
f When positioning the wrench socket, ensure
that it engages fully in the teeth of the wheel
bolt.
Notes on operation
Wheel bolts
f Always clean the wheel bolts before fitting.
Maintenance notes
f Wheel bolts must not be greased.
f Replace damaged wheel bolts.
Only use genuine Porsche wheel bolts
assigned especially to this model or wheel
bolts of similar quality which have been
manufactured according to Porsche specifications and production requirements.
296
Minor Repairs
On vehicles with 17 mm spacers on the rear axle,
the wheels are secured with steel nuts. There is no
anti-theft protection for the wheel nuts.
If the wheels have to be removed at the workshop,
please do not forget to hand over the socket for
the security wheel bolts along with the vehicle key.
Flat tyre
1. Stop the vehicle as far away from the driving
lane as possible.
The vehicle must be parked on a firm and flat
surface offering adequate grip.
2. Switch on the hazard warning lights.
3. Fully apply the parking brake.
4. Shift into 1st gear or move the Tiptronic
selector lever to position P.
5. Straighten the front wheels.
6. Withdraw the ignition key to lock the steering
and prevent the engine from being started.
7. Have all passengers leave the vehicle.
8. Set up a warning triangle at a suitable
distance.
A - Wedges
Securing the vehicle against rolling
For this purpose, use the two folding wedges A
secured next to the tool kit.
A - Folding wedges
2. Unfold the wedges.
3. Lock them in unfolded position.
1. You can remove the wedges after undoing the
Velcro fastening.
Minor Repairs
297
The tyre sealant and a compressor with pressure
tester (on vehicles without level-control system)
can be found under the loadspace floor in the
luggage compartment.
The tyre sealant comprises:
– a filler bottle,
– a filler hose,
– a valve turner,
– a spare valve insert,
– a sticker with the maximum permissible speed
and
– a set of instructions.
Place one wedge each directly in front of and
behind the diagonally opposite wheel.
A - Filler bottle
B - Filler hose
Tyre sealant
The tyre sealant is located in the luggage
compartment under the loadspace floor.
The tyre sealant can be used to seal small cuts,
especially in the tyre tread.
Sealing the tyre with the tyre sealant is only an
emergency repair, so you can drive to the next
workshop. Even if the tyre is air-tight, it may only
be used for short journeys in an emergency.
298
Minor Repairs
Danger!
Risk of accident.
f Use the tyre sealant only in the case of cuts or
punctures no larger than 4 mm.
f Never use the tyre sealant if the rim is
damaged.
Warning!
The sealant is highly flammable and harmful
to health.
f Fire, naked flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling tyre sealant.
f Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
f Keep tyre sealant away from children.
f Do not inhale vapours.
In case of contact with the sealant:
f If sealant gets on the skin or in the eyes,
thoroughly rinse the affected part of the body
off or out without delay.
f Change soiled clothing immediately.
f Visit a doctor immediately in the event of an
allergic reaction.
f If sealant was swallowed, thoroughly rinse out
the mouth without delay and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting.
See a doctor immediately.
Minor Repairs
299
5.Screw filler hose B onto the filler bottle.
The filler bottle is now open.
6.Unscrew valve cap from tyre valve F.
7.Remove valve insert E from the tyre valve with
valve turner D.
Keep the valve insert in a clean and dry place.
8.Remove plug C of filler hose B.
9.Push filler hose onto the tyre valve.
10.Hold filler bottle higher than the level of the tyre
valve and squeeze it forcefully until the bottle
is completely emptied into the tyre.
11.Pull filler hose off the tyre valve.
12.Twist the valve insert firmly into the tyre valve
using the valve turner.
ABCDEF-
Filler bottle
Filler hose
Plug of the filler hose
Valve turner
Valve insert
Tyre valve
Filling in sealant
1.Leave the object that caused the puncture in
the tyre.
2.Remove sealant and the enclosed sticker from
the luggage compartment.
3.Adhere the sticker in the driver’s field of vision.
4.Shake filler bottle A.
300
Minor Repairs
13.Inflate tyre.
Set the prescribed tyre pressure.
Information on the tyre pressure is provided in
the chapter Technical Data in this Driver’s
Manual:
Please observe the chapter “TYRE
PRESSURES, COLD” on Page 363.
14.Screw valve cap onto the tyre valve.
15.Check the tyre pressure after driving for
around 10 minutes.
If the tyre pressure is less than 1.5 bar
(22 psi), do not continue driving.
If a value of more than 1.5 bar (22 psi) is
indicated, correct the pressure to the
prescribed value.
16.Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Note on operation for vehicles with Tyre
Pressure Monitoring
The settings for Tyre Pressure Monitoring must be
updated on the multi-purpose display after filling
the tyre with sealant. To do this: Please observe
the chapter “SETTING TYRE PRESSURE
MONITORING” on Page 134.
Care instructions
After drying, any sealant that emerges can be
peeled off like a film.
Warning!
Risk of accident.
f Have tyre replaced by a specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
speeds.
f Observe maximum speed of
80 km/h (50 mph)
f Please always observe the safety and
operating instructions, which can be found in
the separate operating instructions for the
sealant and on the compressor.
Raising vehicle with the jack
Warning!
Risk of injury. The vehicle may slip off the
jack.
f Make sure that no one is in the vehicle when
jacking up and changing a wheel.
f Never jack up the vehicle when it is parked on
a surface which slopes up, down or to the side.
f Only use the jack to raise the car for wheel
changing.
f Always place the vehicle on stable supports if
work has to be carried out under the vehicle.
The car jack is not suitable for this.
Danger of injury if the level-control system
operates during the wheel change.
Maintenance note
The jacking point for the jack on the vehicle must
be free of dirt.
1.Slightly slacken the wheel bolts of the wheel to
be changed.
2.Only attach the jack at the jacking points
provided. The jack foot must be in contact over
its whole area and must be positioned directly
below the head piece.
Use a suitable support surface if necessary.
3.Hold jack tight and wind it up until its head is in
contact with the jacking point on the vehicle.
Only jack vehicle up until only the wheel to be
changed is completely off the ground.
4.After lowering the vehicle, remove the jack.
f Set the vehicle to jacking mode before starting
to change the wheel.
f For information on setting jacking mode:
Please observe the chapter “AIR SUSPENSION
WITH LEVEL CONTROL AND HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT” on Page 200.
Risk of injury and damage if the vehicle is not
secured.
f Secure the vehicle against rolling To do this:
Please observe the chapter “SECURING THE
VEHICLE AGAINST ROLLING” on Page 297.
Minor Repairs
301
Front jacking point
Rear jacking point
Access to the jacking points differs according to
the respective vehicle equipment.
The rear jacking point is accessible after removing
the covering cap B from the sill cover.
Jacking points
Removing covering cap:
f Attach jack only at the points provided A or C.
f Pull out covering cap B at the bottom at the
rear.
Inserting covering cap:
f Insert the covering cap B in the bottom guides
and push in completely until you feel the upper
lugs snap into place.
302
Minor Repairs
Vehicles with running board
Front jacking point
Jacking points on vehicles with a running
board
f Attach jack only at the points provided D or E.
Vehicles with running board
Rear jacking point
Vehicles with sill cover
Front jacking point
Vehicles with sill cover
Rear jacking point
Jacking points on vehicles with sill covers
2. Attach jack only at the points provided G or I.
The jacking points are accessible after removing
the plastic covering caps F or H from the sill
covers.
Fitting covering cap:
Removing covering cap:
f Insert the covering cap F or H completely in
the slots of the sill cover with both centring
lugs and fold back until it can be felt to engage.
1. Open covering cap F or H in the sill cover to
the front by means of the internal handle
recess and pull off (arrow).
Minor Repairs
303
6. Fill the tyre with air if necessary.
Information on the tyre pressure is provided in
the chapter Technical Data in this Driver’s
Manual: Please observe the chapter “TYRE
PRESSURES, COLD” on Page 363.
7. Lower vehicle and remove jack.
8. Tighten wheel bolts in diagonally opposite
sequence.
Note on operation for vehicles with Tyre
Pressure Monitoring
On vehicles with Tyre Pressure Monitoring, the
settings on the multi-purpose display must be
updated after the wheel change:
Please observe the chapter “SETTING TYRE
PRESSURE MONITORING” on Page 134.
Changing a wheel
1. Remove the top wheel bolt.
2. Remove assembly aid from the tool kit and
screw in instead of the wheel bolt.
3. Remove the remaining wheel bolts.
For further information on wheel bolts:
Please observe the chapter “WHEEL BOLTS”
on Page 296.
4. Change wheel.
5. Insert wheel bolts and tighten by hand.
Remove assembly aid, screw in remaining
wheel bolt.
Initially tighten bolts only slightly in diagonally
opposite sequence so that the wheel is
centred.
304
Minor Repairs
Maintenance note
f Immediately after changing a wheel, use
a torque wrench to check the prescribed
tightening torque of the wheel bolts
(160 Nm/118 ftlb.).
Changing a wheel with removal of 17 mm
spacers
Danger!
Risk of accident if spacers are not removed
before mounting 18 inch tyres or a collapsible spare wheel.
f Always remove the 17 mm spacers before
mounting 18 inch tyres or a collapsible spare
wheel because the wheel cannot be fitted
correctly.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the wheel housings if the
spacers on the rear axle are not removed
before fitting snow chains.
f The 17 mm spacers must always be removed
from the rear axle when snow chains are to be
fitted.
Puller
2. Remove wheel nuts.
1. Remove plastic covers from the wheel nuts
with the puller D from the tool kit.
f Remove spacers if 18 inch tyres, snow chains
or a collapsible spare wheel are mounted.
f It is not necessary to use the assembly aid to
fit an equivalent wheel or spare wheel.
f For information on the spacers: Please
observe the chapter “SPACERS” on Page 295.
Minor Repairs
305
8.Fill the tyre with air if necessary.
Information on the tyre pressure is provided in
the chapter Technical Data in this Driver’s
Manual: Please observe the chapter “TYRE
PRESSURES, COLD” on Page 363.
9.Lower vehicle and remove jack.
10.Tighten wheel bolts in diagonally opposite
sequence.
Note on operation for vehicles with
Tyre Pressure Monitoring
On vehicles with Tyre Pressure Monitoring, the
settings on the multi-purpose display must be
updated after the wheel change:
Please observe the chapter “SETTING TYRE
PRESSURE MONITORING” on Page 134.
3. Unscrew the wheel bolts A which serve to
fasten the spacer.
4. Remove the spacer.
5. Remove assembly aid from the tool kit and
screw in instead of the wheel bolt.
6. Fit wheel.
7. Use the wheel bolts A with which the spacer
was fastened to secure the wheel.
Insert wheel bolts and tighten by hand.
Remove assembly aid, screw in remaining
wheel bolt.
Initially tighten bolts only slightly in diagonally
opposite sequence so that the wheel is
centred.
306
Minor Repairs
Maintenance note
f Immediately after changing a wheel, use
a torque wrench to check the prescribed
tightening torque of the wheel bolts
(160 Nm/118 ftlb.).
f Spacer, steel nuts and plastic covers should
be stored together.
Fitting the 17 mm spacers
1. Remove wheel.
2. Fit the spacer with the wheel bolts A used to
fasten the wheel.
Tightening torque: 160 Nm (118 ftlb.)
3. Fit wheel.
To do this use the original wheel nuts for
fastening the wheels.
Tightening torque: 160 Nm (118 ftlb.)
Place plastic covers onto the steel nuts.
Note
There is no anti-theft protection for the wheel nuts.
Collapsible spare wheel
Warning!
Risk of accident.
The collapsible spare wheel is located under the
loadspace floor in the luggage compartment.
f The collapsible spare wheel must be used only
over short distances in cases of emergency.
For safety reasons, replace the tyres before
the wear indicators appear (webs in the tyre
grooves, 1.6 mm high).
On vehicles with 17 mm spacers:
f Before fitting a collapsible spare wheel on the
rear axle always remove the corresponding
spacer.
For information on the spacers: Please
observe the chapter “SPACERS” on Page 295.
For information on removing the spacers:
Please observe the chapter “CHANGING A
WHEEL WITH REMOVAL OF 17 MM SPACERS”
on Page 305.
f Never deactivate the Porsche Stability
Management (PSM) system.
f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
speeds.
The maximum permitted speed is 80 km/h
(50 mph) and must not be exceeded because
of altered driving characteristics and for
reasons of wear.
1. Remove rotary knob A and put it on screw B.
2. Undo the screw and take out the collapsible
spare wheel.
3. Mount the collapsible spare wheel on the
vehicle before inflating it. Leave the vehicle
jacked up.
For information on wheel changing: Please
observe the chapter “CHANGING A WHEEL” on
Page 304.
4. Inflate tyre.
Information on the tyre pressure is provided in
the chapter Technical Data in this Driver’s
Manual:
Please observe the chapter “TYRE
PRESSURES, COLD” on Page 363.
f Do not use a collapsible spare wheel from a
different vehicle type.
f Do not mount the collapsible spare wheel from
your vehicle on a different vehicle.
f Only fit one collapsible spare wheel on the
vehicle at any time.
f On vehicles with air suspension, use the tyre
filling connection only to inflate the collapsible
spare wheel.
Minor Repairs
307
After using the collapsible spare wheel
f Release air by unscrewing the valve insert.
Notes on operation
The tyre will revert to its original shape only after
several hours. Only then can it be stowed in the
spare wheel recess in the luggage compartment.
There is a plastic sheet in the tool kit for storing
the damaged wheel.
308
Minor Repairs
Maintenance note
The collapsible spare wheel must be repaired only
by the manufacturer.
f If there is a fault on the collapsible spare
wheel:
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
Inflating tyres on vehicles without
level control
The compressor with pressure tester is located in
the luggage compartment under the loadspace
floor.
f Please follow the operating instructions on the
compressor.
1. Screw filler hose of the compressor onto the
tyre valve.
2. Remove cover A of the engine compartment
lining.
+ = Positive terminal for jump lead starting
– = Ground point for jump lead starting
3. Connect clips of the compressor to the jump
lead starting terminals.
Always observe the sequence below:
– Open the cap of the positive terminal for jump
lead starting (+).
– Connect positive lead (red) to the positive
terminal for jump lead starting (+).
– Connect negative lead (black) to the negative
terminal for jump lead starting (–).
Minor Repairs
309
Caution!
Danger of burns. The compressor filler hose
can become hot during the inflation process.
f Wear gloves.
4. Switch on compressor.
The required filling pressure will be reached
after a few minutes.
5. Switch off compressor.
6. Check filling pressure with pressure tester.
Then reduce tyre pressure or add more air if
necessary.
Check filling pressure again.
7. Unscrew the compressor filling hose.
Reducing filling pressure on vehicles
without level control
1. Switch off compressor.
2. Open air bleed screw on the filling hose until
the correct filling pressure is achieved.
310
Minor Repairs
Warning!
Danger of injury and risk of damage if the
operating unit is used improperly.
f Use this operating unit only to inflate or bleed
air from the tyres of this vehicle.
5. Switch ignition on.
6. Press hand valve D until the correct tyre
pressure is achieved.
Monitor the tyre pressure with pressure
tester C during the inflation process.
7. Unscrew the screw coupling from the
compressor connection.
8. Unscrew filler connection from the tyre valve.
Inflating tyres on vehicles with
level control
The bag with the tyre filling hose is located under
the loadspace floor in the spare-wheel recess.
1. Take tyre filling hose out of the bag.
2. Remove cover in footwell of right front seat.
9. Stow tyre filler hose.
BCDEF-
Screw coupling for compressor connection
Pressure tester
Hand valve for tyre filling
Air bleed screw
Filler connection for tyre valve
3. Screw the screw coupling B into the
compressor connection (in footwell of the right
front seat).
4. Screw filler connection F onto the tyre valve.
Minor Repairs
311
Note on operation
The compressor features a protective function
against overheating and switches itself off
automatically if necessary. The compressor must
cool down for a few minutes after automatic
deactivation.
Reducing tyre pressure on vehicles with
level control
f Open air bleed screw E until the correct tyre
pressure is achieved.
Monitor the tyre pressure with pressure
tester C while correcting the tyre pressure.
312
Minor Repairs
Spare wheel
Warning!
Risk of accident. The wheel size, tyre size
and tyre quality of the spare wheel and
normal wheel may differ.
If a spare wheel is used that differs from the
normal tyres used, this may impair the
driving behaviour.
f The spare wheel must be used only over short
distances in cases of emergency.
For safety reasons, replace the tyres before
the wear indicators appear (webs in the tyre
grooves, 1.6 mm high).
Removing spare wheel
Warning!
Danger of injury if the spare wheel is
removed improperly.
f Remove the spare wheel only when the spare
wheel bracket is locked.
f Remove the spare wheel from the spare wheel
bracket with care. The wheel is very heavy (up
to around 35 kg).
f Never deactivate the Porsche Stability
Management (PSM) system.
f If the tyre on the spare wheel is older than
4 years old, the spare wheel should be used
only in the event of a flat tyre.
f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
speeds.
The maximum permitted speed is 80 km/h
(50 mph) if the mounted spare wheel differs
from the other three wheels on the vehicle.
This maximum speed must not be exceeded
because of altered driving characteristics and
for reasons of wear.
1. Loosen all 5 wheel bolts.
2. Remove the top wheel bolt.
Remove assembly aid from the tool kit and
screw in instead of the wheel bolt.
Remove the remaining wheel bolts.
Fitting spare wheel
f Insert wheel bolts and tighten by hand.
Remove assembly aid, screw in remaining
wheel bolt.
Initially tighten bolts only slightly in diagonally
opposite sequence so that the wheel is
centred.
f After mounting the wheel, tighten all 5 wheel
bolts to 150 Nm (111 ftlb.).
Minor Repairs
313
Precondition
The central locking system must be unlocked.
f Press button B and swing the spare wheel
bracket open.
Notes on operation
– If the opening angle exceeds 30°, the spare
wheel bracket automatically moves to its final
position.
The rear lid may be opened only when the
spare wheel bracket is in its final position.
B - Button for unlocking the spare wheel bracket
Opening spare wheel bracket
Warning!
Danger of injury and risk of accident if the
spare wheel bracket is operated improperly.
f Make sure that no persons or animals are
within the swivel range of the spare wheel
bracket. Operate the spare wheel bracket only
using button B.
f If the vehicle is inclined to the side, the
additional lock C on the spare wheel bracket
must be operated.
314
Minor Repairs
– If the opening angle is less than 30°, the
spare wheel bracket automatically moves back
to its initial position.
However, the spare wheel bracket is not
completely engaged yet and must be closed
by hand.
C - Additional lock
Operating the additional lock of the spare
wheel bracket if the vehicle is tilted to the
side
1. Open spare wheel bracket.
2. Slide additional lock C to the left.
The spare wheel bracket is mechanically
blocked.
The warning light “rear lid” and a message on
the multi-purpose display of the instrument
panel warn the driver that the spare wheel
bracket is open.
Closing spare wheel bracket
Warning!
Danger of injury and risk of accident if the
spare wheel bracket is operated improperly.
f Operate the spare wheel bracket only using
button B.
f If the vehicle is tilted to the side, more effort
will be required to swing the spare wheel
bracket.
Automatic locking
In the multi-purpose display of the instrument
panel, you can set variants of locking and
unlocking the doors and the rear lid as well as the
check-back signal when locking and unlocking the
vehicle and save them on the respective remote
control.
To do this: Please observe the chapter “SETTING
REAR LID LOCKING” on Page 145.
f Make sure that no persons or animals are
within the swivel range of the spare wheel
bracket.
1. Check whether additional lock C is engaged. If
necessary, slide additional lock C to the right.
2. Swing spare wheel bracket closed with force.
3. Check that the spare wheel bracket is locked
and observe indication on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel.
The indicator light must go out when the spare
wheel bracket is locked.
Minor Repairs
315
Warning!
Danger of injury and risk of accident if the
spare wheel bracket is operated improperly.
f Perform emergency unlocking of the spare
wheel bracket only when the vehicle is on a
level surface.
1. Remove cover of left towing lug D.
2. Pull emergency release cable E in the direction
of the arrow.
The spare wheel bracket is now unlocked and
can be operated.
D - Towing lug cover (left)
E - Emergency release cable
Emergency release for the spare wheel
bracket
If the battery is flat, the only way to open the spare
wheel bracket is by using the mechanical
emergency release.
316
Minor Repairs
Electrical system
In order to avoid damage and faults in electrical or
electronic systems, electrical accessories should
be installed by a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
f Use only accessories authorised by Porsche.
Warning!
Risk of short circuit and fire.
f Disconnect the battery during all work on the
electrical system.
Relays
Sockets
Note on operation
Relays should be checked or changed only by an
authorised workshop.
The assignment and number of sockets depend
on the respective vehicle equipment.
The sockets and thus the connected electrical
accessories function even if the ignition is
switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn.
If the engine is not running and the accessories
are switched on, the vehicle battery will be
discharged.
Electrical accessories can be connected to the
12 V sockets.
Minor Repairs
317
Changing fuses
In order to prevent damage to the electrical
system due to short circuits and overloads, the
individual circuits are protected by fuses.
One fuse box is in the engine compartment. Two
additional fuse boxes are located in the outer ends
of the dashboard.
1. Switch off the load with the defective fuse.
2. Open the fuse-box lid.
3. Remove the corresponding fuse from its slot to
check it with the plastic gripper.
A blown fuse can be identified by the melted
metal strip.
4. Replace only with fuses of the same rating.
Note
f If a fuse blows repeatedly:
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
318
Minor Repairs
Cover of engine-compartment fuse box
Fuse box in engine compartment
Opening fuse-box lid in engine compartment
2. Rotate the turn-locks of the fuse-box lid 90°
counter-clockwise with a screwdriver and
remove the lid.
1. Rotate the turn-locks 90° counter-clockwise
with a screwdriver and remove the cover.
Opening fuse-box lid in the dashboard
1. Carefully lever off the plastic cover with a
screwdriver (arrow) and remove.
The fuse plan is located on the inside of the
cover.
A - Plastic gripper
2. Carefully remove the fuses with plastic
gripper A.
Minor Repairs
319
Fuse assignment – fuse box in left side of
dashboard
No.
Designation
1
Centre console socket, cigarette lighter
Rating in A
20
2
Parking heater radio receiver
5
3
Socket in passenger footwell
20
4
Parking heater
20
5
Sockets in luggage compartment
20
6
not used
7
Diagnostic socket, rain sensor, light sensor
5
8
Wiper motor for windscreen
30
9
Vehicle electrical system control unit, pump for washer fluid
15
10
Power window, rear left
25
15
11
Central locking system, left
12
not used
13
not used
14
Power window, front left
25
15
Tail light, right
15
16
Vehicle electrical system control unit, horn
20
17
Vehicle electrical system control unit, left direction indicator, right parking light, left dipped beam
30
18
Headlight washer system
20
19
Vehicle electrical system control unit, interior light
5
20
Instrument lighting, left fog light, left additional high beam
30
320
Minor Repairs
No.
Designation
Rating in A
21
not used
22
Rear differential lock, automatic rear lid
30
23
Differential lock
10
24
Tyre Pressure Monitoring
5
25
not used
26
Engine control unit (engine management, radiator fans), airbag, instrument panel
27
not used
28
not used
29
not used
30
not used
31
not used
32
not used
33
Steering column module
10
15
34
Passenger compartment monitoring, inclination sensor
5
35
Vehicle electrical system control unit, right fog light, right additional high beam, interior light
30
30
36
Electrical seat adjustment, left
37
not used
38
not used
39
Heated rear window
40
Instrument panel, diagnosis
5
41
Steering column lock, ignition lock, central locking system, Porsche Entry & Drive
15
42
Sliding/lifting roof or Panorama roof system
30
43
Subwoofer
30
5
Minor Repairs
321
No.
Designation
Rating in A
44
Electrical seat adjustment, left; electrical steering column adjustment
30
45
Seat heating, rear
30
46
not used
47
Rear differential lock
48
not used
49
Servotronic
10
5
50
not used
51
Air conditioner, diagnosis, moving-off assistant
5
52
Rear wiper
30
53
Vehicle electrical system control unit, automatic dipped beam, steering column module
5
54
Headlight beam adjustment
10
55
not used
56
Fan, front air-conditioning system
40
Fan, rear air-conditioning system
40
57
RES 1
Spare fuse 1
RES 2
Spare fuse 2
322
Minor Repairs
Fuse assignment – fuse box in right side
of dashboard
No.
Designation
Rating in A
1
Trailer coupling
15
2
ParkAssist
5
3
Trailer coupling
15
4
Telephone/telematics
5
5
Trailer coupling
15
6
Porsche Stability Management (PSM)
30
7
Transfer box (centre-differential lock), telephone preparation
5
8
Vehicle electrical system control unit, left parking light, right direction indicator, right dipped beam
30
9
CD changer, DVD navigation
5
10
TV tuner, satellite receiver
5
11
Radio or Porsche Communication System (PCM)
10
12
Amplifier for sound package
30
13
not used
14
Tail light, left
15
15
Power window, rear right
25
16
not used
17
not used
18
Heated rear window relay
30
19
Trailer coupling
25
20
not used
Minor Repairs
323
No.
Designation
Rating in A
21
Spare wheel release, horn for alarm system
10
22
Electrical seat adjustment front right, front seat heating
30
23
Air conditioner
10
24
Seat memory, front right; electrical seat adjustment, front right
30
25
Air conditioner, rear
5
26
Xenon headlight, right
10
15
27
Level control
28
not used
29
Transmission control unit, Tiptronic selector lever switch
10
30
Rear lid power closing mechanism
20
31
Central locking system, filler flap
15
32
Central locking system, right doors
10
33
not used
34
Power window, front right
25
35
Electrical seat adjustment, right
30
36
Roof console, telephone, compass
5
37
Xenon headlight, left
10
38
Porsche Stability Management
10
39
Diagnosis
5
40
Transfer box (centre-differential lock)
10
41
Trailer coupling
10
42
Roof module
5
43
Reversing light
5
324
Minor Repairs
No.
Designation
Rating in A
44
Heatable washer nozzles, air suspension, seat heating
5
45
not used
46
not used
47
Telephone preparation
10
48
Level control
10
49
Telephone, anti-dazzle interior mirror
5
50
Vehicles for Japan: blind spot detection
5
51
Tiptronic transmission
15
5
52
Tiptronic selector lever switch
53
not used
54
not used
55
Reversing camera
5
56
Porsche Stability Management (PSM)
40
57
Transfer box (centre-differential lock)
40
Minor Repairs
325
Fuse assignment – fuse box in Cayenne engine compartment
No.
Designation
Rating in A
1
Fan
60
2
Fan
30
3
not used
4
not used
5
not used
6
not used
7
Ignition coils
15
8
Ignition coils
15
9
Engine control unit, high-pressure fuel injectors, throttle adjusting unit
20
10
Water run-on pump, tank leakage detection, carbon canister shut-off valve, fan, pressure sensor for air conditioner
10
11
Air-conditioning compressor, service interval sensor, crankcase vent
10
12
Camshaft adjustment, tank vent, quantity control valve
15
13
Fuel pump, right
15
14
Fuel pump, left
15
10
15
Engine control unit, main relay
16
not used
17
Oxygen sensors ahead of catalytic converter
15
18
Oxygen sensors behind catalytic converter
7,5
Note
f Use the plastic grippers from the fuse boxes in the dashboard to replace the fuses.
326
Minor Repairs
Fuse assignment – fuse box in Cayenne S engine compartment
No.
Designation
Rating in A
1
Fan
60
2
Fan
30
3
not used
4
not used
5
not used
6
not used
7
Ignition coils
15
8
Tank vent, air-conditioning compressor, intake pipe switchover, crankcase vent
15
9
15
11
Quantity control valve, camshaft adjuster, valve lift adjuster
Engine components: Cooling air output stages, carbon canister shut-off valve, pressure sensor for air conditioner,
tank leakage detection, exhaust flap control valve, Hall sensor, oil-level sensor
Engine control unit, high-pressure fuel injectors, throttle adjusting unit
12
not used
10
10
20
13
Fuel pump, right
15
14
Fuel pump, left
15
15
Engine control unit, main relay
10
16
not used
17
Oxygen sensors ahead of catalytic converter
15
18
Oxygen sensors behind catalytic converter
7,5
Note
f Use the plastic grippers from the fuse boxes in the dashboard to replace the fuses.
Minor Repairs
327
Battery
Danger!
Danger of explosion and injury and risk of
short circuit and damage to the generator
and electronic control units.
f Have the battery removed and installed only at
a specialist workshop.
The battery is located in the battery box under the
left front seat.
Warning!
Risk of short circuit and fire.
f Disconnect the battery during all work on the
electrical system.
f Ensure that tools or conductive jewellery
(rings, chains, watch straps) do not come into
contact with live parts of the vehicle.
Danger of explosion
f Do not wipe battery with a dry cloth.
f Before touching the battery, discharge any
static electricity by touching the vehicle.
328
Minor Repairs
Heed warnings on the battery
Read the operating instructions
Wear eye protection
Keep children away
Danger of explosion
While the battery is being charged, a
highly explosive gas mixture is formed,
so:
Fire, sparks, naked flames and
smoking are prohibited
Avoid causing sparks and short circuits
when handling cables and electrical
equipment.
In the case of batteries with central
venting, there is a greater concentration
of explosive gas at the hose opening. The
gas-venting hose must not be kinked or
blocked with dirt.
Danger of caustic burns
Battery acid is highly caustic, so:
Wear safety gloves and eye protection.
Do not tip the battery, or acid may spill
from the venting aperture.
First aid
If acid splashes into an eye, immediately
rinse with clean water for a few minutes.
See a doctor immediately.
If acid splashes onto skin or clothing,
neutralise immediately with soapsuds and
rinse with plenty of water.
If you accidentally drink acid, consult a
doctor immediately.
Disposal
Hand in the old battery at a battery
collection point.
Never dispose of an old battery with
domestic waste.
Charge state
A well-charged battery prevents starting problems
and has a longer service life.
Traffic density, speed limits, requirements
regarding noise, exhaust gas and fuel consumption reduce the engine speed and, hence, the
generator output.
However, the large number of electrical loads has
markedly increased the demand for electrical
power.
In order to avoid unintended battery
discharge:
f Switch off unnecessary electrical loads in city
traffic, on short trips and in queues.
f Always withdraw the ignition key when leaving
the vehicle or
switch ignition off on vehicles that have
Porsche Entry & Drive.
f Avoid using the Porsche Communication
Management system and the audio system
when the engine is not running.
Battery care
f Keep battery surface clean and dry.
f Ensure that cell plugs and terminal clamps are
firmly secured.
Checking acid level
(only on low-maintenance batteries)
Check the acid level more frequently in the
summer months and in predominantly warm
countries.
f When topping up, use only clean vessels. In no
case may alcohol (e.g. window cleaner
residues) be permitted to enter the battery.
f Unscrew all plugs.
With the vehicle horizontal, the battery acid
must fill each cell up to the filler mark. These
filler marks are visible through the plug
openings as steps or lateral lugs in the battery.
Winter driving
The ability of the battery to deliver power
decreases at low outside temperatures.
Moreover, the battery is more heavily loaded in the
winter months by the heated rear window, more
frequent use of additional lights, the blower and
the windscreen wipers, etc.
f Have the charge state of the battery checked
before winter begins.
Maintenance note
Keep the battery fully charged to prevent it from
freezing.
A discharged battery can freeze even at –10 °C,
but a fully charged one only freezes at –40 °C.
f Top up with distilled water if necessary.
Do not use acid. Do not overfill.
f For information on charging an exhausted
battery: Please observe the chapter
“CHARGING THE BATTERY” on Page 333.
Maintenance note
In the cold season in particular, it may become
necessary to recharge the battery from time to
time.
Minor Repairs
329
Laying up the vehicle
Replacing the battery
If the vehicle stands for long periods in the garage
or workshop, the doors and lids should be closed.
The battery is subject to normal wear: its service
life depends greatly on the care you give it,
climatic conditions and the conditions of use
(distances, loads).
f Withdraw the ignition key and, if necessary,
disconnect the battery.
Notes on operation
f When the battery is disconnected, the alarm
system ceases to function.
If the vehicle was locked before the battery
was disconnected, the alarm will be triggered
when the battery is reconnected.
To deactivate the alarm system:
It is not possible to use the details on the battery
case to determine a comparable battery that
meets all the specific requirements of Porsche.
f Only replace the battery with one that satisfies
the specific requirements of your vehicle.
We recommend that you use a genuine
Porsche battery.
f Lock the vehicle and unlock it again.
f Please observe the disposal instructions for
batteries.
Alarm system, central locking
Putting vehicle into operation
f The status of the central locking and alarm
system is not changed by disconnecting the
battery.
Maintenance notes
Even if you put your vehicle out of operation, the
battery still discharges.
f To preserve its operating capability, charge the
battery about every 6 weeks.
f Check the battery acid level and top up with
distilled water if necessary.
f Store a battery that has been removed in a
dark, cool place, but not subject to frost.
330
Minor Repairs
After the battery is connected or after an exhaustively discharged battery is charged, the PSM
warning light lights up on the instrument panel and
a message appears on the multi-purpose display
of the instrument panel to indicate a fault.
This fault can be remedied with a few simple
steps:
1. Start the engine.
To do this, turn the ignition key or the control
unit (on vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive) to
ignition lock position 2 twice.
2. With the vehicle stationary, perform a few
steering movements to the left and right and
then drive a short distance in a straight line
until the PSM warning light goes out and the
message is erased from the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel.
3. If the warnings do not disappear, then:
Drive carefully to the nearest qualified
specialist workshop.
Have the fault remedied.
4. After the warnings disappear:
Stop the vehicle in a suitable place.
5. Perform teaching of the power windows. To do
this:
Please observe the chapter “STORING FINAL
POSITION OF THE DOOR WINDOWS AFTER
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE BATTERY” on
Page 91.
6. Teach tyres on vehicles with Tyre Pressure
Monitoring. To do this:
Please observe the chapter “SETTING TYRE
PRESSURE MONITORING” on Page 134.
7. Store end positions on vehicles with electrically folding trailer coupling. To do this:
Please observe the chapter “STORING END
POSITIONS OF THE TRAILER COUPLING” on
Page 250.
Changing the battery
1. Lever out the lid on the back of the key housing
with a small screwdriver.
2. Replace battery (observe polarity).
3. Replace cover and press together firmly.
Parking heater remote control
The battery should be changed when the range of
the remote control becomes smaller or when the
light-emitting diode lights up orange when the
remote control is operated.
Replacing the remote control
battery
Note
f Please observe the disposal instructions for
batteries.
Vehicle key
If the battery in the remote control becomes too
weak, a warning will appear on the multi-purpose
display in the instrument panel.
The battery should be changed in this case.
Changing the battery
1. Pull battery compartment cover A off in the
direction of the arrow.
2. Remove batteries.
3. Insert new batteries. Make sure that the
polarity is correct.
The remote control contains two 12 V
batteries.
4. Close battery compartment A.
Minor Repairs
331
External power supply, jump lead
starting
If the battery is flat, the battery of another vehicle
can be used for starting or as an external power
supply with the help of jump leads.
Both batteries must be 12 V types. The capacity
(Ampere hours, Ah) of the donor battery must not
be substantially less than that of the discharged
battery.
The discharged battery must be correctly
connected to the vehicle’s electrical system.
Warning!
Risk of damage and injury due to short
circuit.
f Use only standard jump leads with sufficient
cross section and completely insulated
clamps. Follow the jump lead manufacturer’s
instructions.
f Route the jump leads so that they cannot be
caught by moving parts in the engine compartment.
The vehicles must not be in contact, otherwise
current might flow as soon as the positive
terminals are connected.
f Carefully ensure that conductive jewellery
(rings, chains, watch straps) does not come
into contact with live parts of the vehicle.
Risk of caustic burns from escaping acid.
Jump lead starting
f Do not lean over the battery.
Always observe the sequence below:
Danger of gas explosion.
1. Remove cover A.
f Keep sources of ignition away from the
battery, e.g. naked flame, burning cigarettes
or sparks due to cable contact.
2. Open the cap of the positive terminal for jump
lead starting (+).
f Before connecting jump leads, it is essential to
thaw out a frozen battery.
332
Minor Repairs
3. Attach the positive lead first to the positive
terminal for jump lead starting (+), then to the
positive terminal of the donor battery.
5. Run the engine of the donor vehicle at a higher
speed.
6. Start the engine.
An attempted start using jump leads should
not last more than 15 seconds. Then allow a
waiting period of at least one minute.
7. Disconnect the negative lead from the ground
point for jump lead starting (–) first, then from
the negative terminal of the donor battery.
8. Disconnect the positive lead from the positive
terminal of the donor battery first, then from
the positive terminal for jump lead starting (+).
9. Close the cap of the positive terminal for jumplead starting (+).
+ = Positive terminal for jump lead starting
– = Ground point for jump lead starting
4. Connect the negative lead first to the negative
terminal of the donor battery, then to the
ground point for jump lead starting (–).
Charging the battery
Your Porsche partner will be pleased to advise you
about a suitable charger.
1. Always observe the instructions of the charger
manufacturer.
2. When charging the battery, ensure adequate
ventilation.
3. Check the acid level in the case of low-maintenance batteries.
4. Connect charger to the jump lead starting
points.
Only plug into the mains and switch the
charger on when it has been correctly
connected up.
5. After charging, disconnect the charger.
6. Check the acid level in the case of low-maintenance batteries.
Minor Repairs
333
After charging the battery
After the battery is connected or after an exhaustively discharged battery is charged, the PSM
warning light lights up on the instrument panel and
a message appears on the multi-purpose display
of the instrument panel to indicate a fault.
This fault can be remedied with a few simple
steps:
1. Start the engine.
To do this, turn the ignition key or the control
unit (on vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive) to
ignition lock position 2 twice.
2. With the vehicle stationary, perform a few
steering movements to the left and right and
then drive a short distance in a straight line
until the PSM warning light goes out and the
message is erased from the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel.
3. If the warnings do not disappear, then have the
fault repaired.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop. We
recommend that you use a Porsche partner for
this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
334
Minor Repairs
4. After the warnings disappear:
Stop the vehicle in a suitable place.
5. Perform teaching of the power windows. To do
this:
Please observe the chapter “STORING FINAL
POSITION OF THE DOOR WINDOWS AFTER
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE BATTERY” on
Page 91.
6. Teach tyres on vehicles with Tyre Pressure
Monitoring:
Please observe the chapter “SETTING TYRE
PRESSURE MONITORING” on Page 134.
7. Store end positions on vehicles with electrically folding trailer coupling. To do this:
Please observe the chapter “STORING END
POSITIONS OF THE TRAILER COUPLING” on
Page 250.
Replacing bulbs
Headlights
Warning!
Danger of short circuit.
f Always switch off the relevant load when
changing bulbs.
Risk of injury. The headlights are under high
voltage when installed.
f Exercise extreme caution when working in the
area of the headlights.
Risk of damage. Bulbs of a higher wattage
can damage the housing.
f Only use the bulbs specified in the bulb chart.
f Bulbs must be clean and free from grease.
f Never touch bulbs with your bare hands.
Use a cloth or soft paper when replacing bulbs.
f Always carry spare bulbs with you.
In certain countries, carrying spare bulbs is
mandatory.
Caution!
Risk of damage to headlights due to abrasion
and excessive temperatures.
f Do not fix any coverings (e.g. “stone guards”
or films) in the area of the headlights.
Note
The headlights can mist up depending on the
temperature and humidity.
f To ensure optimum ventilation, do not cover
the gap between headlight and body.
Removing headlights
1. Switch off ignition and withdraw the ignition
key.
2. Open bonnet.
3. Press down cover A in the engine compartment in the direction of the arrow
and remove.
Minor Repairs
335
B - Headlight release
C - Socket wrench
6. Pull the headlight forward out of the wing by
approx. 10 cm.
4. Take socket wrench C out of the tool kit.
7. Press back the release tab of the plug D and
pull plug off.
5. Place socket wrench C on the release B and
turn in the direction of the arrow until you feel
and hear the headlight being released.
336
Minor Repairs
8. Pull out headlight completely.
Installing headlights
1. Insert headlight in the guide rails, connect plug
D and then push the headlight fully into the
wing.
2. Push headlight to the rear and simultaneously
turn socket wrench C in the direction of the
arrow.
The headlight locking device must perceptibly
and audibly engage.
3. Check whether the headlight is seated
securely.
4. Remove socket wrench C and replace in tool
kit.
5. Fit cover A and fold it down.
A - Cover
C - Socket wrench
D - Plug
6. Close bonnet.
Minor Repairs
337
Halogen headlights
Changing bulb for dipped beam/high beam
1. Press down both release tabs A and remove
cover.
2. Turn bulb socket B counter-clockwise and
remove.
3. Remove defective bulb and replace.
4. Insert bulb socket and turn in clockwise
direction.
Make sure that the bulb is installed in the
correct position.
5. Fit cover on headlight.
Both release tabs must be fully engaged.
6. Install headlight.
7. Check operation of bulbs.
8. Close bonnet.
338
Minor Repairs
Changing bulb for additional high beam
1. Press down both release tabs A and remove
cover.
2. Turn bulb socket B counter-clockwise and
remove.
3. Remove defective bulb and replace.
4. Insert bulb socket and turn in clockwise
direction.
Make sure that the bulb is installed in the
correct position.
5. Fit cover on headlight.
Both release tabs must be fully engaged.
6. Install headlight.
7. Check operation of bulbs.
8. Close bonnet.
Minor Repairs
339
Bi-Xenon headlights with cornering light
Changing gas discharge lamp for dipped
beam/high beam/dynamic cornering light
1. Press down both release tabs A and remove
cover.
2. Turn gas discharge lamp counter-clockwise
and remove.
3. Press the release tab on the plug and pull plug
off.
4. Connect plug to new gas discharge lamp.
5. Insert gas discharge lamp and turn in clockwise direction. Make sure that the bulb is
installed in the correct position.
6. Fit cover on headlight. Both release tabs must
be fully engaged.
7. Install headlight.
8. Check operation of bulbs.
9. Close bonnet.
340
Minor Repairs
Changing bulb for additional high beam
1. Press down both release tabs A and remove
cover.
2. Turn bulb socket B counter-clockwise and
remove.
3. Remove defective bulb and replace.
4. Insert bulb socket and turn in clockwise
direction. Make sure that the bulb is installed in
the correct position.
5. Fit cover on headlight. Both release tabs must
be fully engaged.
6. Install headlight.
7. Check operation of bulbs.
8. Close bonnet.
Minor Repairs
341
Changing lamp for static cornering light
1. Press down both release tabs A and remove
cover.
2. Turn bulb socket B counter-clockwise and
remove.
3. Pull both release tabs on the plug apart, and
pull plug out of lamp socket.
4. Replace defective bulb. Make sure that the
bulb is installed in the correct position.
5. Fit cover on headlight. Both release tabs must
be fully engaged.
6. Install headlight.
7. Check operation of bulbs.
8. Close bonnet.
342
Minor Repairs
Changing bulb for direction indicator and
parking light
f Please observe the chapter “REMOVING
HEADLIGHTS” on Page 335.
4. Press release tab A in direction of arrow again
and push forward. Using your other hand, pull
the bulb housing completely out of the front
apron.
Replacing parking light bulb
5. Pull bulb socket out of the bulb
housing.
1. Open bonnet.
2. Remove headlight.
3. Press release tab on the bulb housing in the
direction of the arrow and at the same time
push forward to the first detent A.
Minor Repairs
343
6. Remove the defective bulb from the socket
and replace.
When inserting the socket in the bulb housing,
make sure that the socket has engaged fully.
Changing direction indicator bulb
Installing bulb housing
1. Turn socket counter-clockwise and remove.
1. Insert the bulb housing in the front apron. Make
sure that the two tabs are inserted correctly in
the openings. Push light fully into the front
apron until you hear and feel it engage.
2. Replace the defective bulb (bayonet fitting).
3. Insert socket and turn in clockwise direction.
Make sure that the bulb is installed in the
correct position.
2. Check operation of lights.
3. Install headlight.
4. Close bonnet.
344
Minor Repairs
Tail light
Removing tail light
As a result of the design, a relatively large amount
of effort is required to remove the tail light.
In case of doubt, please consult a qualified
specialist workshop.
We recommend that you use a Porsche partner
for this work since these are staffed with trained
personnel and have the necessary parts and
tools.
1. Switch ignition off.
2. Open rear lid.
4. Unscrew the two fastening screws B with the
socket wrench from the tool kit.
3. Remove the two caps A with a screwdriver, for
example.
Minor Repairs
345
5. Pull out the light unit to the side in the direction of the arrow and additionally pull it out in
the area of the ball head C.
6. Disengage cable and then press on the plug
release (arrow) on the plug D and pull off the
plug.
346
Minor Repairs
Installing tail light
1. Push on plug D until the plug is felt to click into
place (arrow) and secure cable.
2. Insert ball head of tail light C into clip nut E and
fit the light unit into the body (arrow).
3. Screw in the fastening screws B.
When screwing in the fastening screws, make
sure that the tail light is flush with the body.
4. Press in caps A.
Replacing bulbs at rear
1. Unscrew fastening screws D with the crosshead screwdriver from the tool kit.
2. Remove lamp bracket C.
E - Rear fog light
F - Direction indicator
G - Tail light
3. Replace the defective bulb (bayonet fitting).
Insert lamp bracket and screw in fastening
screws.
4. Install tail light.
5. Check operation of lights.
6. Close the rear lid.
Minor Repairs
347
Number plate lights
Changing bulb for number plate light
1. Unscrew both screws A and remove the light.
2. Push the bulb holder apart and pull the bulb out
of the socket.
3. Replace defective bulb.
4. Insert light, initially tighten both screws A and
then screw in uniformly.
348
Minor Repairs
Headlight adjustment
The adjustment of the headlights should only be
done in a specialist workshop with suitable adjustment equipment.
The adjustment is made with the vehicle ready to
drive and the fuel tank completely filled.
Changing headlights from left to
right-hand traffic
If you travel to a country where traffic uses the
other side of the road, the headlights must be
repositioned when you cross the border. The
dipped beam then lights symmetrically and drivers
of oncoming vehicles are not dazzled.
On the return journey, do not forget to readjust the
headlights.
Repositioning headlights
1. Please observe the chapter “REMOVING
HEADLIGHTS” on Page 335.
Remove headlight. Press down both release
tabs A and remove cover.
Halogen headlights
2. Push lever B down to the stop.
Minor Repairs
349
Xenon headlight
3. Turn spindle C in clockwise direction to the
stop using a crosshead screwdriver.
4. Fit cover on headlight.
Both release tabs A must be fully engaged.
5. Please observe the chapter “INSTALLING
HEADLIGHTS” on Page 337.
Install headlight.
6. Reposition the other headlight.
350
Minor Repairs
Bulb chart
Exterior lights
Type, rating
Interior lights
Type, rating
Halogen dipped beam and high beam
Xenon dipped beam and high beam
Side marker light, front
Direction indicator, rear
Direction indicator, front
Number plate light
Fog light
Rear fog light
Reversing light
Side indicator light
Additional high beam
Cornering light
H7
D1S
W5W
P21W
PY21W
C5W
H11
P21W
P21W
WY5W
H7
H11
Interior light, front
Reading light
Luggage compartment light
Footwell light
Glove compartment light
Centre console
Kerb lights (doors)
Warning lights (doors)
Kerb light (rear lid)
Guard light (rear lid)
W5W
W5W
K12V10W
W3W
W3W
W3W
W3W
W3W
W5W
W5W
Minor Repairs
351
Towing and tow-starting
f Vehicles with a faulty brake must not be
towed.
Tips on driving
f Always keep the towing rope taut when towing.
Avoid jerky, sudden loads.
f Exercise great care when on tow.
Before starting off, both drivers should familiarise themselves with the special conditions
which apply to tow-starting and towing.
Towing bar
f Always observe the laws governing towing and
tow-starting.
f When the direction indicator light is set with the
ignition on and the hazard warning lights active, only the direction indicator light on the
corresponding side of the vehicle will light up.
After the direction indicator light is reset, the
hazard warning lights will be switched on
again.
Towing rope
f Please refer to the separate manual from the
accessory manufacturer for the data and
fitting instructions.
Observe the manufacturer's safety and
operating instructions.
f Always observe the permissible towing force
of the towing rope. The towing rope must be
approved for the vehicle weight. Never exceed
the manufacturer’s specifications.
352
Minor Repairs
f Please refer to the separate manual from the
accessory manufacturer for the data and
fitting instructions.
Observe the manufacturer's safety and
operating instructions.
f Always observe the permissible towing force
of the towing bar. The towing bar must be
approved for the vehicle weight. Never exceed
the manufacturer’s specifications.
f Do not attach the towing bar diagonally
between the vehicles.
f Vehicles with a faulty brake must not be
towed.
Tow-starting/push-starting
If the battery is defective or completely
discharged, the engine can be started only by
changing the battery or by using jump leads.
f For information on the battery:
Please observe the chapter “BATTERY” on
Page 328.
f For information on jump lead starting:
Please observe the chapter “EXTERNAL
POWER SUPPLY, JUMP LEAD STARTING” on
Page 332.
Vehicles with Tiptronic
f Do not tow-start or push-start vehicles with a
Tiptronic transmission.
The vehicle cannot be tow-started or pushstarted, nor should this be attempted due to
the risk of serious engine damage.
Vehicles with manual transmission
f Only tow-start or push-start vehicles fitted with
a catalytic converter when the engine is cold.
If the engine is warm, unburned fuel could damage the catalytic converter.
Towing
If you have to tow a vehicle, it should not be
heavier than your own vehicle.
Warning!
Risk of accident. No servo assistance is
available on the towed vehicle when its
engine is not running. Greater force is therefore necessary when braking and steering.
f Exercise great care when on tow.
When the engine is stationary, adequate lubrication of the transmission is not guaranteed.
Observe the following points to avoid damage to
the transmission:
f Put the gearshift lever in neutral or move the
Tiptronic selector lever to position N.
The Tiptronic selector lever can no longer be
operated in the event of an electrical fault.
Blocking of the Tiptronic selector lever in
position P can be overridden manually. To do
this:
Please observe the chapter “SELECTOR
LEVER EMERGENCY OPERATION” on
Page 179.
f The vehicle must always roll on all four wheels
when towed.
The ignition must be switched on so that the
brake lights and direction indicator lights
operate and the steering lock cannot engage.
f Do not exceed the maximum speed
of 50 km/h (30 mph).
Maximum towing distance 50 km (30 miles).
If towing distances are greater, the vehicle
must be transported with a car transporter or
on a trailer.
Towing on a single axle
When the engine is stationary, adequate lubrication of the transmission is not guaranteed.
Observe the following points to avoid damage to
the transmission:
f It is normally not permissible to raise one axle,
irrespective of whether it is the front or rear
axle.
If circumstances dictate that the vehicle must
be towed in this manner, the drive shaft
(cardan shaft) of the rolling axle must be
removed.
f Put the gearshift lever in neutral or move the
Tiptronic selector lever to position N.
f Switch ignition off.
The ignition key must remain in the ignition lock
so that the steering wheel lock does not
engage.
The control unit must be removed from the
ignition lock and the ignition key inserted on
vehicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive. To
do this:
Please observe the chapter “REMOVING THE
CONTROL UNIT FROM THE IGNITION LOCK” on
Page 161.
f Make sure that the vehicle is adequately illuminated.
f Do not exceed the maximum speed
of 50 km/h (30 mph).
Maximum towing distance 50 km (30 miles).
If towing distances are greater, the vehicle
must be transported with a car transporter or
on a trailer.
Pulling out a vehicle stuck in snow, sand,
etc.
Always pull out the stuck vehicle with the greatest
care.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the sparewheel well contains one or two towing lugs.
f When pulling out the vehicle, always use two
towing lugs if possible.
Screw in the towing lugs only at the front or
rear in each case.
f Do not pull out the vehicle abruptly or at an
angle.
f If possible, pull the vehicle out backwards in its
own tracks.
f Do not pull out the vehicle with a trailer
attached.
Minor Repairs
353
Towing lug
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the sparewheel well contains one or two towing lugs.
Screwing in rear towing lug
1. Carefully lever out the appropriate plastic
cover A in the bumper with the screwdriver.
The cover is captive and need not be removed
completely.
354
Minor Repairs
2.Screw in towing lug B as far as the stop (lefthand thread) and tighten hand-tight.
Screwing in front towing lug
1. Carefully lever out the appropriate plastic
cover A in the bumper with the screwdriver.
Place cover in the vehicle.
2.Screw in towing lug B as far as the stop (lefthand thread) and tighten hand-tight.
Fitting plastic cover at front
f First engage the upper locking tabs of the
plastic cover, and then press in the bottom
tabs and side tab uniformly until the tabs have
engaged fully.
Minor Repairs
355
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
Vehicle identification.................................... 357
Engine data ................................................ 359
Transmission.............................................. 360
Fuel consumption........................................ 360
Tyres, rims, tracks...................................... 361
Tyre pressures, cold ................................... 363
Weights...................................................... 365
Ground clearance ....................................... 366
Capacities .................................................. 368
Dimensions ................................................ 369
Driving performance ................................... 370
356
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
Vehicle identification
When ordering spare parts or making inquiries,
please always quote the vehicle identification
number.
Data bank
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle data bank can be found on the left
under the loadspace floor.
It contains all important data about your vehicle.
The vehicle identification number is under the
loadspace floor on the right in front of the tool kit
and at the bottom left behind the windscreen.
Note
The data bank cannot be reordered if it is lost or
damaged.
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
357
Identification plate
Tyre pressure plate
The identification plate is fitted on the firewall on
the right of the engine compartment.
The tyre pressure plate is fitted on the driver's
door.
358
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
Engine data
Cayenne manual
transmission
Cayenne
Tiptronic S
Cayenne S
manual transmission
Cayenne S
Tiptronic S
Type
6-cylinder V-engine
6-cylinder V-engine
8-cylinder V-engine
8-cylinder V-engine
Number of cylinders
6
6
8
8
Bore
89 mm
89 mm
96 mm
96 mm
Stroke
96.4 mm
96.4 mm
83 mm
83 mm
Displacement
3598 cm3
3598 cm3
4806 cm3
4806 cm3
Max. engine output
as per 80/1269/EEC
213 kW (290 HP)
213 kW (290 HP)
283 kW (385 HP)
283 kW (385 HP)
At engine speed
6200 rpm
6200 rpm
6200 rpm
6200 rpm
Max. torque
as per 80/1269/EEC
385 Nm (285 ftlb.)
385 Nm (285 ftlb.)
500 Nm (370 ftlb.)
500 Nm (370 ftlb.)
At engine speed
3000 rpm
3000 rpm
3500 rpm
3500 rpm
Engine oil consumption
up to 1.5 l/1000 km
up to 1.5 l/1000 km
up to 1.5 l/1000 km
up to 1.5 l/1000 km
Maximum rpm
6700 rpm
6700 rpm
6700 rpm
6700 rpm
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
359
Transmission
Transmission ratio
Cayenne manual
transmission
Cayenne
Tiptronic S
Cayenne S
manual transmission
Cayenne S
Tiptronic S
1st gear
4.68 : 1
4.15 : 1
4.68 : 1
4.15 : 1
2nd gear
2.53 : 1
2.37 : 1
2.53 : 1
2.37 : 1
3rd gear
1.69 : 1
1.56 : 1
1.69 : 1
1.56 : 1
4th gear
1.22 : 1
1.16 : 1
1.22 : 1
1.16 : 1
5th gear
1.00 : 1
0.86 : 1
1.00 : 1
0.86 : 1
6th gear
0.84 : 1
0.69 : 1
0.84 : 1
0.69 : 1
Reduction gear
2.70 : 1
2.70 : 1
2.70 : 1
2.70 : 1
Reverse gear
4.27 : 1
3.39 : 1
4.27 : 1
3.39 : 1
Final drive ratio
3.70 : 1
4.30 : 1
3.55 : 1
3.55 : 1
City
Highway
Total
Total CO2
(l/100 km)
(l/100 km)
(l/100 km)
(g/km)
Cayenne manual transmission
18.5
9.8
12.9
310
Fuel consumption
Determined according to 80/1268/EEC as amended.
Cayenne Tiptronic S
18.3
9.9
12.9
310
Cayenne S manual transmission
22.1
10.8
14.9
358
Cayenne S Tiptronic S
20.2
10.1
13.7
329
360
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
Tyres, rims, tracks
Cayenne
Summer tyres
Winter tyres
Tyres
Track
front
rear
7.5 J x 17
53 mm
1655 mm
1670 mm
255/55 R 18 109 Y XL2)
8 J x 18
57 mm
1647 mm
1662 mm
275/45 R 19 108 Y XL
9 J x 19
60 mm
1641 mm
1656 mm
275/40 R 20 106 Y XL
9 J x 20
60 mm
1641 mm
1656 mm
275/40 R 20 106 Y XL
9 J x 20/10 J x 20
60 mm/55 mm
1641 mm
1666 mm
295/35 R 21 107 Y XL
10 J x 21
50 mm
1661 mm
1676 mm
295/35 R 21 107 Y XL
10 J x 21
50 mm/45 mm
1661 mm
1686 mm
235/65 R 17 108 H XL1)
7.5 J x 17
53 mm
1655 mm
1670 mm
2)
8 J x 18
57 mm
1647 mm
1662 mm
255/50 R 19 107 V XL3)
9 J x 19
60 mm
1641 mm
1656 mm
235/65 R 17 108 V XL1)
7.5 J x 17
53 mm
1655 mm
1670 mm
255/55 R 18 109 V XL2)
8 J x 18
57 mm
1647 mm
1662 mm
9 J x 19
60 mm
1641 mm
1666 mm
6.5 J x 18
53 mm
275/45 R 19 108 V XL
Collapsible spare wheel
Rim offset
front/rear
235/65 R 17 108 V XL1)
255/55 R 18 109 V XL
All-Season
Wheel
front/rear
195/75 18
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
361
Cayenne S
Summer tyres
Winter tyres
Tyres
Rim offset
front/rear
Track
front
rear
255/55 R 18 109 Y XL2)
8 J x 18
57 mm
1647 mm
1662 mm
275/45 R 19 108 Y XL
9 J x 19
60 mm
1641 mm
1656 mm
275/40 R 20 106 Y XL
9 J x 20
60 mm
1641 mm
1656 mm
275/40 R 20 106 Y XL
9 J x 20/10 J x 20
60 mm/55 mm
1641 mm
1666 mm
295/35 R 21 107 Y XL
10 J x 21
50 mm
1661 mm
1676 mm
295/35 R 21 107 Y XL
10 J x 21
50 mm/45 mm
1661 mm
1686 mm
255/55 R 18 109 V XL2)
8 J x 18
57 mm
1647 mm
1662 mm
XL3)
9 J x 19
60 mm
1641 mm
1656 mm
255/55 R 18 109 V XL2)
8 J x 18
57 mm
1647 mm
1662 mm
275/45 R 19 108 V XL
9 J x 19
60 mm
1641 mm
1656 mm
255/50 R 19 107 V
All-Season
Wheel
front/rear
Collapsible spare wheel
195/75 18
Cayenne and Cayenne S
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “106”) and code letter (e.g. “T”) for permitted top speed are minimum requirements. When fitting
new tyres or changing tyres: Please observe the chapter “TYRES AND WHEELS” on Page 288.
Tyre and rim sizes
Approval for tyre and rim sizes is granted on the basis of extensive testing.
Your Porsche partner will be pleased to advise you about the current approval status.
If you refit your vehicle with tyres and/or wheels not authorised by Porsche, this may have a dangerous effect on driving stability.
1)2)3)
Snow chains
and clearance
362
6.5 J x 18
Clearance for tyres marked with 1) only when snow chains, part No. 955.044.600.07, are fitted.
Clearance for tyres marked with 2),3) only when snow chains, part No. 955.044.600.08, are fitted.
Tyres marked with 3): fit snow chains on rear axle only
Optimal handling characteristics can be achieved only when snow chains are fitted on all four wheels of the vehicle.
It is also possible to fit snow chains on only one axle (preferably the rear axle). Maximum speed 50 km/h (30 mph). Use only
Porsche-approved fine-link cross-type or edge chains.
Please observe the chapter “SNOW CHAINS” on Page 291.
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
Tyre pressures, cold
These tyre inflation pressures only apply to the makes and types of tyres approved by Porsche.
Please observe the chapter “TYRES AND WHEELS” on Page 288.
Partially loaded
(up to 3 people and 21 kg of luggage)
Summer tyres
Cayenne
Cayenne S
Front axle
Rear axle
Front axle
Rear axle
2.6 bar (38 psi)
2.9 bar (43 psi)
2.6 bar (38 psi)
2.9 bar (43 psi)
Front axle
Rear axle
Front axle
Rear axle
2.4 bar (35 psi)
2.7 bar (39 psi)
2.4 bar (35 psi)
2.7 bar (39 psi)
235/65 R 17 summer tyres
235/60 R 18 summer tyres
255/55 R 18 summer tyres
275/45 R 19 summer tyres
255/50 R 19 summer tyres
275/40 R 20 summer tyres
295/35 R 21 summer tyres
All-Season, All-Terrain and winter tyres
235/65 R 17 M+S
255/55 R 18 M+S
255/50 R 19 M+S
275/45 R 19 M+S
Collapsible spare wheel
195/75 - 18 collapsible wheel
Front axle
Rear axle
Front axle
Rear axle
3.5 bar (51 psi)
3.5 bar (51 psi)
3.5 bar (51 psi)
3.5 bar (51 psi)
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
363
Fully loaded
(more than 3 people and 21 kg luggage)
Cayenne
Cayenne S
Front axle
Rear axle
Front axle
Rear axle
2.7 bar (39 psi)
3.4 bar (50 psi)
2.7 bar (39 psi)
3.4 bar (50 psi)
3.5 bar (51 psi)
3.5 bar (51 psi)
3.5 bar (51 psi)
3.5 bar (51 psi)
235/65 R 17 summer tyres and M+S
255/55 R 18 summer tyres and M+S
255/50 R 19 M+S
275/45 R 19 summer tyres and M+S
275/40 R 20 summer tyres
295/35 R 21 summer tyres
195/75 - 18 collapsible wheel
f On vehicles with Tyre Pressure Monitoring, the vehicle load must be set on the multi-purpose display of the instrument panel. Please observe the chapter
“SETTING VEHICLE LOADING AND ADJUSTING TYRE PRESSURE” on Page 137.
364
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
Weights
Cayenne
Cayenne
manual transmis- Tiptronic S
sion
Cayenne S
Cayenne S
manual transmis- Tiptronic S
sion
per DIN 70020
2160 - 2520 kg
2170 - 2530 kg
2225 - 2600 kg
as per 70/156/EEC 1)
2235 - 2595 kg
2245 - 2605 kg
2300 - 2675 kg
2320 - 2695 kg
Maximum axle load, front 2)
1385 kg
1385 kg
1455 kg
1455 kg
Maximum axle load, rear 2)
1650 kg
1650 kg
1680 kg
1680 kg
Maximum gross weight 2)
2945 kg
2945 kg
3080 kg
3080 kg
Kerb weight
Kerb weight (depending on equipment)
2245 - 2620 kg
Trailer operation EU
Maximum gross weight
3045 kg
3045 kg
3180 kg
3180 kg
Maximum axle load, front/rear axle
1385/1750 kg
1385/1750 kg
1455/1775 kg
1455/1775 kg
100 kg
75 kg
100 kg
75 kg
100 kg
75 kg
100 kg
75 kg
Roof load
Maximum roof load 3)
on vehicles with roof rail
Towed weight/vehicle + trailer weight
Maximum towed weight, braked (up to max. 12 % gradient)
3500 kg
3500 kg
3500 kg
3500 kg
Maximum towed weight, unbraked
750 kg
750 kg
750 kg
750 kg
Maximum vehicle + trailer weight
6445 kg
6445 kg
6580 kg
6580 kg
Maximum drawbar load
140 kg
140 kg
140 kg
140 kg
1)
Kerb weight includes 75 kg driver and baggage share.
2) The
maximum gross weight and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.
Note: If additional accessories are installed, the maximum load will be correspondingly less.
3)
Only use Roof Transport Systems from the Porsche Tequipment product range for your car or Roof Transport Systems which have been tested and approved
by Porsche.
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
365
Ground clearance
Steel suspension
Ramp angle
Overhang angle, front
Overhang angle, rear
Ground clearance (centre of axles)
Air suspension – normal level
Ramp angle
Overhang angle, front
Overhang angle, rear
Ground clearance (centre of axles)
Air suspension – low level
Ramp angle
Overhang angle, front
Overhang angle, rear
Ground clearance (centre of axles)
Air suspension – loading level
Ramp angle
Overhang angle, front
Overhang angle, rear
Ground clearance (centre of axles)
Air suspension – off-road level
Ramp angle
Overhang angle, front
Overhang angle, rear
Ground clearance (centre of axles)
366
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
Cayenne
Cayenne S
20.4°
28.6°
22.8°
218 mm
20.4°
28.6°
22.8°
218 mm
20.0°
28.5°
22.3°
215 mm
20.0°
28.5°
22.3°
215 mm
17.6°
27.3°
20.6°
191 mm
17.6°
27.3°
20.6°
191 mm
14.8°
21°
18.5°
161 mm
14.8°
21°
18.5°
161 mm
22.1°
30.2°
23.6°
241 mm
22.1°
30.2°
23.6°
241 mm
Air suspension – special terrain level
Ramp angle
Overhang angle, front
Overhang angle, rear
Ground
clearance (centre of axles)
f
Cayenne
Cayenne S
24.7°
31.8°
25.4°
271 mm
24.7°
31.8°
25.4°
271 mm
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
367
Capacities
Use only fluids and fuels authorised by Porsche. Your Porsche partner will be pleased to advise you.
Cayenne
Engine oil change quantity without oil filter approx. 6 litres
Engine oil change quantity with oil filter
Coolant1
Cayenne S
approx. 8.0 litre
approx. 6.9 litres
approx. 8.5 litres
Reference indication is the level on the oil dipstick.
Please observe the chapter “CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL” on Page 265.
approx. 13 - 18 litres
approx. 18 - 21 litres
Manual transmission with compensation
Automatic transmission with torque
converter
Transfer box
approx. 1.8 litres
approx. 1.8 litres
approx. 9.5 litres
approx. 9 litres
approx. 0.85 litre
approx. 0.85 litre
Front-axle differential
approx. 1.0 litre
approx. 1.0 litre
Rear-axle differential
approx. 1.25 litres
approx. 1.4 litres
Locking rear differential
approx. 1.6 litres
approx. 1.6 litres
Fuel tank
approx. 100 litres, including approx. 12 litres reserve
approx. 100 litres, including approx. 12 litres reserve
Fuel octane rating
The engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel consumption if unleaded premium fuel
with 98 RON/88 MON is used.
If unleaded premium fuels with octane numbers of at least 95 RON/85 MON are used, the engine’s knock
control automatically adapts the ignition timing.
Power steering
approx. 1.5 litres hydraulic fluid Pentosin CHF 202
approx. 1.5 litres hydraulic fluid Pentosin CHF 202
Brake fluid
approx. 0.95 litre
approx. 0.95 litre
Use only genuine Porsche brake fluid or brake fluid of the same quality.
Window/
headlight washer system
1
depending on vehicle equipment
368
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
approx. 7.5 litres
approx. 7.5 litres
Dimensions
Length
Cayenne
Cayenne S
4798 mm
4798 mm
Length with external spare wheel
5029 mm
5029 mm
Width
1928 mm
1928 mm
Height at DIN kerb weight – normal level
1699 mm
1699 mm
Height at DIN kerb weight (rail) – normal level
1741 mm
1741 mm
Height at DIN kerb weight
(basic carrier of Roof Transport System) – normal level
1789 mm
1789 mm
Height at DIN kerb weight – special terrain level
1748 mm
1748 mm
Height at DIN kerb weight (rail) – special terrain level
1789 mm
1789 mm
Height at DIN kerb weight
(basic carrier of Roof Transport System) – special terrain level
1837 mm
1837 mm
Height at DIN kerb weight
with rear lid open
2218 mm
2218 mm
Max. wading depth
1)
500 mm
1)
500 mm 1)
Up to 555 mm for vehicles with air suspension at special terrain level.
Cayenne
Cayenne S
Wheelbase
2855 mm
2855 mm
Overhang, front
936 mm
936 mm
Overhang, rear
1007 mm
1007 mm
Turning circle
11.7 m
11.7 m
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
369
Driving performance
The specifications refer to a vehicle with DIN kerb weight and max. 200 kg load without performance-reducing additional equipment (e.g. special tyres)
Cayenne
manual transmission
Cayenne
Tiptronic S
Cayenne S
manual transmission
Cayenne S
Tiptronic S
Top speed
227 km/h (141 mph)
227 km/h (141 mph)
252 km/h (157 mph)
250 km/h (155 mph)
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph)
8.1 seconds
8.5 seconds
6.6 seconds
6.8 seconds
Maximum speed
when towing a trailer
370
Tyre Pressure and Technical Data
80 km/h (50 mph)
Index
2-zone air conditioning
Air-conditioning sensors ...................................... 71
Defrosting windscreen ........................................ 70
Operating overview ............................................ 67
REST mode....................................................... 71
Setting air distribution ......................................... 69
Setting air quantity ............................................. 68
Setting temperature ........................................... 68
Switching ECON mode on/off ............................... 70
Switching Mono function on/off ............................ 69
Switching on automatic circulating-air mode............ 69
Switching on circulating-air mode .......................... 70
Using engine residual heat ................................... 71
4-wheel drive
Functional description ....................................... 189
Warning message ............................................ 156
4-zone air conditioning
Air-conditioning sensors ...................................... 78
Controlling rear air-conditioned areas
with the front control panel .................................. 79
Defrosting windscreen ........................................ 77
Disabling control panel for rear air-conditioned
areas ............................................................... 79
Disabling rear control panel ................................. 79
Operating overview, front .................................... 74
Operating overview, rear ..................................... 75
REST mode....................................................... 78
Setting air distribution ......................................... 76
Setting air quantity ............................................. 76
Setting temperature ........................................... 76
Switching ECON mode on/off ............................... 78
Switching Mono function on/off ............................ 77
Switching on automatic circulating-air mode............ 77
Switching on circulating-air mode .......................... 77
Using engine residual heat ................................... 78
A
ABS (anti-lock brake system)
Functional description ....................................... 196
Off-road ABS functional description ..................... 197
Warning light on the tachometer ......................... 196
Warning message ............................................ 155
Additional door mirrors when towing a trailer ............... 242
Additional high beam
Installing headlights .......................................... 337
Removing headlights ........................................ 335
After driving off-road ................................................ 207
Air cleaner maintenance instructions .......................... 272
Air conditioner
Child lock ......................................................... 79
Operating overview ............................................ 67
Operating overview of 4-zone air conditioning,
front ................................................................ 74
Operating overview of 4-zone air conditioning,
rear ................................................................. 75
Operating overview of manual air conditioning ......... 62
Switching child protection on/off .......................... 79
Which system is in my car? .................................. 59
Air pressure
Data (bar/psi) .................................................. 363
Plate .............................................................. 358
Warning message ............................................ 152
Air suspension
Compressor connection .................................... 311
Lowering the vehicle ......................................... 202
Lowering the vehicle for loading ......................... 202
Overview ........................................................ 200
Raising the vehicle ........................................... 201
Warning message on the multi-purpose display...... 203
Air vents
Opening/closing ................................................ 80
Airbag
Airbag warning light on the tachometer ................ 216
Care instructions ............................................. 285
Disposal ......................................................... 216
Functional description ....................................... 215
Installation location ........................................... 215
Passenger airbag warning light ............................. 45
Switching passenger airbag on and off .................. 44
Unit ................................................................. 52
Air-conditioning sensors
For 2-zone air conditioning................................... 71
For 4-zone air conditioning................................... 78
Alarm system
Avoiding false alarms ........................................ 261
Switching off ................................................... 260
Switching off alarm .......................................... 260
Switching off passenger compartment
monitoring system and inclination sensor ............. 260
Switching on ................................................... 260
Alcantara care instructions ....................................... 285
All-Season tyres Overview ......................................... 361
All-Terrain tyres Overview ......................................... 361
All-wheel drive
Functional description ....................................... 189
Warning message ............................................ 156
Aluminium rims
Care instructions ............................................. 283
Inscription....................................................... 293
Antifreeze
In coolant ....................................................... 268
In washer fluid ................................................. 271
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Functional description ....................................... 196
Off-road ABS functional description ..................... 197
Warning light on the tachometer ......................... 196
Warning message ............................................ 155
Armrest................................................................. 234
Ashtray ................................................................. 238
Assembly aid for wheel changes ................................ 304
Assistance when driving downhill
(Engine Braking Support) .......................................... 199
auto (light switch)
Functional description, driving light assistant......... 106
Switching on driving light assistant ...................... 105
AUTO button
2-zone air conditioning ........................................ 68
4-zone air conditioning ........................................ 75
Automatic (Tiptronic S)
Functional description ....................................... 173
Rocker switches on the steering wheel .................. 52
Selector lever.................................................. 174
Transmission ratios .......................................... 360
Automatic anti-dazzle function for interior mirror ............. 51
Index
371
Automatic headlight beam adjustment Functional
description ............................................................ 107
Automatic rear lid ..................................................... 20
Automatically closing the rear lid ................................. 22
B
Baby seat
Installing with ISOFIX system ................................ 46
ISOFIX restraint system ...................................... 46
Prescribed installation direction
(depending on age of child) ................................. 42
Recommended child seats .................................. 43
Ball hitch (trailer coupling)
Inserting (mechanical hitch) ............................... 245
Removing (mechanical hitch).............................. 248
Retracting (electrical hitch) ................................ 249
Storage location (mechanical hitch)..................... 243
Ball hitch (trailer hitch)
Extending (electrical hitch) ................................ 249
Battery
Care ............................................................. 329
Changing in the parking heater remote control ...... 331
Changing in vehicle key .................................... 331
Charging ........................................................ 333
General information ......................................... 328
Jump lead starting ........................................... 332
Procedure after battery connection..................... 330
Removing and installing .................................... 328
Replacing ....................................................... 330
Vehicle electrical system voltage indication .......... 124
Voltage indication ............................................ 124
Warning message ............................................ 154
Winter driving.................................................. 329
Before driving off.................................................... 160
Belts
Adjusting belt height........................................... 41
Belt tensioner functional description...................... 39
Care instructions ............................................. 285
Fastening ......................................................... 40
Opening ........................................................... 40
Warning light on the tachometer ........................... 39
Bi-Xenon
Installing headlights ......................................... 337
Removing headlights ........................................ 335
Brake booster faulty warning message ....................... 155
372
Index
Brake fluid
Change quantity .............................................. 368
Changing ....................................................... 271
Checking level................................................. 270
Warning light on speedometer ........................... 271
Warning message ............................................ 155
Brake light
Changing bulb ................................................. 347
Installing tail light ............................................. 346
Removing tail light ........................................... 345
Brake pads
Warning message on the multi-purpose display ..... 155
Warning message, brakes ................................. 167
Brakes
Applying/releasing parking brake ....................... 166
Bedding in new pads ........................................ 160
Brake pad warning message.............................. 167
Footbrake ...................................................... 166
Test stand ...................................................... 199
Warning message on the multi-purpose
display Brake pads .......................................... 155
Brief overview
2-zone air conditioning........................................ 66
4-zone air conditioning (front control panel) ............ 72
4-zone air conditioning (rear control panel) ............. 73
Door mirrors ..................................................... 48
Opening and locking from outside......................... 15
Sliding/lifting roof .............................................. 92
Windscreen wipers ........................................... 113
Bulbs
Changing bulb for dipped beam, halogen ..... 338, 340
Changing bulb for high beam, halogen ......... 339, 341
Changing bulb for number plate light ................... 348
Changing bulb for side light, halogen ................... 343
Overview ........................................................ 351
Replacing brake light ........................................ 347
Replacing direction indicator .............................. 347
Replacing rear direction indicator ....................... 347
Replacing rear fog light .................................... 347
Replacing reversing light ................................... 347
Replacing tail light ........................................... 347
C
Capacities
Brake fluid ...................................................... 368
Coolant .......................................................... 368
Engine oil ....................................................... 368
Fuel ............................................................... 368
Overview ........................................................ 368
Washer fluid .................................................... 368
Car care
Airbags .......................................................... 285
Alcantara ....................................................... 285
Cleaning the engine compartment ....................... 281
Fabric linings .................................................. 285
Headlights, plastic parts ................................... 283
Laying up your Porsche .................................... 285
Leather .......................................................... 284
Light alloy wheels ............................................ 283
Paint ............................................................. 281
Seals ............................................................. 284
Seat belts ...................................................... 285
Undersealing................................................... 282
Use of high-pressure cleaning units ..................... 279
Washing ......................................................... 280
Wheel bolts..................................................... 296
Windows ........................................................ 282
Care instructions
Airbags .......................................................... 285
Alcantara ....................................................... 285
Carpet ........................................................... 284
Cleaning the engine compartment ....................... 281
Fabric linings .................................................. 285
Floor mats ...................................................... 284
Headlights, plastic parts ................................... 283
Laying up your Porsche .................................... 285
Leather .......................................................... 284
Light alloy wheels ............................................ 283
Paint ............................................................. 281
Seals ............................................................. 284
Seat belts ...................................................... 285
Undersealing................................................... 282
Use of high-pressure cleaning units ..................... 279
Washing ......................................................... 280
Wheel bolts..................................................... 296
Windows ........................................................ 282
Cargo management system
Inserting and adjusting the strap reel ................... 222
Inserting and adjusting the telescopic bar ............. 222
Inserting and adjusting tie-down rings .................. 224
Overview ........................................................ 222
Carpet (care instructions) ......................................... 284
Carpet Care instructions .......................................... 284
Central locking system
Changing settings via multi-purpose display .......... 144
Centre armrest ....................................................... 234
Centre differential lock
Engaging ........................................................ 183
Changing bulb for number plate light .......................... 348
Check engine
Functional description ....................................... 125
Warning light on the tachometer ......................... 125
Checking hydraulic fluid (power steering) ..................... 272
Child seat
Installing with ISOFIX system ................................ 46
ISOFIX restraint system ....................................... 46
Prescribed installation direction
(depending on age of child) .................................. 42
Recommended child seats ................................... 43
Cigarette lighter ...................................................... 239
Cleaning the engine compartment .............................. 281
Clock
Button for setting ............................................. 120
Setting on the multi-purpose display .................... 147
Closing
Automatically closing the rear lid .......................... 22
Closing sliding/lifting roof .................................... 93
Panorama roof system ........................................ 99
Rear lid ............................................................ 20
Rear window ..................................................... 24
Spare wheel bracket......................................... 315
Cockpit
Adjusting illumination ........................................ 107
Clock ............................................................. 120
Cooling system temperature gauge ..................... 121
Fuel level indicator ........................................... 122
Odometer ....................................................... 123
Oil temperature gauge ...................................... 120
Speedometer .................................................. 123
Tachometer .................................................... 120
Voltage indication............................................. 124
Warning and indicator lights, overview ................. 118
Collapsible spare wheel General information ................313
Collapsible spare wheel in the luggage compartment .....307
Coming Home function
Setting lighting off delay ....................................146
Switching on ...................................................111
Compass
Setting on the multi-purpose display ....................148
Compressor
Connection (on vehicles without air suspension) .....311
Storage location
(on vehicles without level control) ........................295
Control systems
Overview (PTM, PTM Plus, PSM, PASM) ................188
Coolant
Antifreeze .......................................................268
Checking level .................................................268
Coolant change quantity ...........................................368
Cooling system
Temperature gauge ..........................................121
Warning ..........................................................121
Cornering light
Installing headlights ..........................................337
Removing headlights.........................................335
Crossing obstacles..................................................213
Cruise control
Accelerating ....................................................170
Decelerating ...................................................170
Functional description .......................................169
Interrupting operation .......................................170
Storing speed..................................................169
Switching off ...................................................171
Switching on ...................................................169
Cupholder
front ..............................................................236
rear ...............................................................237
D
Data bank for vehicle data ........................................357
Defrosting windscreen
With 2-zone air conditioning .................................70
With 4-zone air conditioning .................................77
With manual air conditioning .................................64
Dimensions ............................................................369
Dimming comfort lighting..........................................111
Dimming footwell light ..............................................111
Dimming the comfort lighting.....................................111
Dipped beam
Changing bulb, halogen .....................................338
Installing headlights ..........................................337
Removing headlights .........................................335
Switching on/off ..............................................105
Direction indicator stalk ............................................108
Direction indicator, front
Installing headlights ..........................................337
Removing headlights .........................................335
Direction indicator, rear
Changing bulb .................................................347
Installing tail light .............................................346
Removing tail light ............................................345
Disabling control panel for rear air-conditioned areas .......79
Distance displays, ParkAssist ....................................254
Door
De-icing door lock ............................................279
Locking ............................................................18
Locking with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless) ..........18
Locking with the vehicle key (remote control) ..........18
Unlocking with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless) ........17
Unlocking with the vehicle key (remote control) ........17
Door mirrors
Activating synchronous adjustment ......................144
Additional door mirrors when towing a trailer .........242
Adjusting ..........................................................49
Adjusting as parking aid ......................................50
Adjusting synchronously ......................................49
Brief overview....................................................48
Driving with a trailer ..........................................242
Folding in ..........................................................49
Storing setting as parking aid ...............................34
Switching heating on/off ......................................50
Unfolding ..........................................................49
Door-surrounding lighting ..........................................126
Driving performance Technical data ............................370
Driving programmes for on-road and off-road driving .....181
Driving with a trailer .................................................242
DVD
Installation location ...........................................237
Navigation ......................................................237
Player ............................................................237
Index
373
E
F
Easy Entry function
Functional description ........................................ 35
Switching on/off ................................................ 35
Emergency unlocking
of sliding/lifting roof ........................................... 95
Of the filler flap ............................................... 278
Of the ignition key in the ignition lock .................. 164
Of the Panorama roof system ............................ 102
of the selector lever for Tiptronic S..................... 179
Of the spare wheel bracket ............................... 316
Emission control
Functional description ...................................... 125
Warning light on the tachometer ......................... 125
Engaging the rear differential lock ............................. 184
Engine
Cooling system ............................................... 121
Data .............................................................. 359
Starting (manual transmission) ........................... 164
Stopping ........................................................ 165
Engine Braking Support
(assistance when driving downhill).............................. 199
Engine drag torque control (MSR)
Functional description ...................................... 192
Engine oil
Change quantity .............................................. 368
Checking oil level with dipstick ........................... 265
Engine Oil Pressure ......................................... 154
General information ......................................... 266
Oil-level warning on the multi-purpose display ........ 265
Temperature gauge ......................................... 120
Topping up ..................................................... 267
Entry & Drive
Locking vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive ..... 18
Opening/closing Panorama roof system
with vehicle key ............................................... 100
Passenger compartment monitoring
with Porsche Entry & Drive ................................ 261
Unlocking vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive .. 17
Entry aid
Functional description ........................................ 35
Switching on/off ................................................ 35
Exit aid
Functional description ........................................ 35
Switching on/off ................................................ 35
Fabric linings (care instructions) ................................ 285
Factory settings
Resetting multi-purpose display .......................... 149
Filler flap
Emergency unlocking ....................................... 278
Filling pressure
Plate location .................................................. 358
Tyres (bar/psi) ................................................ 363
Warning light on speedometer ........................... 142
Warning message ............................................ 152
Filter
Air cleaner maintenance instructions ................... 272
Particle filter maintenance instructions ................ 272
First aid kit, storage location .................................... 287
Floor mats, care instructions .................................... 284
Fluids and fuels
Brake fluid ...................................................... 368
Coolant .......................................................... 368
Engine oil ....................................................... 368
Fuel............................................................... 368
Overview ........................................................ 368
Washer fluid.................................................... 368
Folding wedges to prevent rolling .............................. 297
Footbrake ............................................................. 166
Four-wheel drive
Functional description....................................... 189
Warning message ............................................ 156
Four-zone air conditioning
Air-conditioning sensors ...................................... 78
Controlling rear air-conditioned areas
with the front control panel .................................. 79
Defrosting windscreen ........................................ 77
Disabling control panel
for rear air-conditioned areas ............................... 79
Disabling rear control panel ................................. 79
Operating overview, front .................................... 74
Operating overview, rear ..................................... 75
REST mode ...................................................... 78
Setting air distribution ........................................ 76
Setting air quantity ............................................. 76
Setting temperature ........................................... 76
Switching ECON mode on/off .............................. 78
374
Index
Switching Mono function on/off ............................ 77
Switching on automatic circulating-air mode ........... 77
Switching on circulating-air mode.......................... 77
Using engine residual heat................................... 78
Front seat
Adjusting .......................................................... 32
Drawer under the right front seat ........................ 235
Passenger mirror as parking aid ........................... 34
Recalling settings (memory) ................................. 33
Storing driver’s seat settings (memory).................. 34
Storing passenger’s seat settings (memory) ........... 34
Front seats with memory ............................................ 34
Front windscreen wipers
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity ..................... 115
Switching on rain sensor ................................... 114
Windscreen wiping plus washer system ............... 116
Windscreen, fast wiping .................................... 115
Windscreen, slow wiping ................................... 115
Wiping windscreen once (one-touch function) ........ 115
Fuel
Consumption .................................................. 360
Fuel level indicator ........................................... 122
Fuel reserve warning ........................................ 122
Octane rating .................................................. 277
Quality ........................................................... 277
Refuelling ....................................................... 277
Tank capacity ................................................. 368
Fuel can ................................................................ 276
Fuel level indicator .................................................. 122
Fuel reserve........................................................... 278
Function keys on steering wheel .................................. 54
Functional description of off-road PSM ........................ 192
Fuse assignment .................................................... 320
G
Garage door opener
Applying ......................................................... 258
Deleting programmed signals ............................ 257
Functional description ....................................... 257
Programming signal (changeable code system) ..... 258
Programming signal (fixed code system) .............. 258
Gear display for Tiptronic S ...................................... 174
Glasses case in the roof console ............................... 232
Glove compartment
Cooling .......................................................... 233
Locking .......................................................... 233
Opening ......................................................... 233
Switching off cooling ........................................ 233
Ground clearance Technical data ............................... 366
H
Halogen
Changing bulb for dipped beam ..................338, 340
Changing bulb for high beam......................339, 341
Changing bulb for side light ............................... 343
Installing headlights .......................................... 337
Removing headlights ........................................ 335
Headlight beam adjustment (automatic)
Checking operation .......................................... 107
Functional description ....................................... 107
Headlight beam adjustment (manual) .......................... 107
Functional description ....................................... 107
Headlights
Adjusting ........................................................ 349
Care instructions ............................................. 283
Changing bulb for dipped beam, halogen......338, 340
Changing bulb for high beam, halogen .........339, 341
Changing bulb for side light, halogen ................... 343
Changing to left-hand traffic ............................... 349
Installing ......................................................... 337
Operating washer system .................................. 116
Removing ....................................................... 335
Headrests
Adjusting .......................................................... 36
Removing and installing ....................................... 36
Heated rear window
Switching off ..................................................... 81
Switching on ..................................................... 81
Height adjustment
Lowering the vehicle ......................................... 202
Overview ........................................................ 200
Raising the vehicle ........................................... 201
Warning message on the multi-purpose display...... 203
High beam ............................................................. 108
Changing bulb, halogen .............................339, 341
Installing headlights .......................................... 337
Removing headlights ........................................ 335
Stalk .............................................................. 108
High-pressure cleaning units, information on use ...........279
Hillholder (moving-off assistant for Tiptronic S) .............197
Horn .......................................................................52
I
Identification number location ....................................357
Identification plate ...................................................358
Ignition lock
Emergency operation of key ..............................164
Functional description .......................................161
Illumination
Of steering wheel keys, switching on/off ................55
Switching on when entering the vehicle ................112
Switching on when leaving the vehicle ..................111
Immobiliser ............................................................262
Inclination sensor
Function indication ...........................................261
Switching off with button in door handle
(Porsche Entry & Drive) .....................................261
Switching off with vehicle key .............................260
Inserting and adjusting tie-down rings .........................224
Instrument cluster
Adjusting illumination ........................................107
Clock .............................................................120
Cooling system temperature gauge .....................121
Fuel level indicator ...........................................122
Odometer .......................................................123
Oil temperature gauge ......................................120
Speedometer ..................................................123
Tachometer ....................................................120
Voltage indication .............................................124
Warning and indicator lights, overview .................118
Instrument panel
Adjusting illumination ........................................107
Clock .............................................................120
Cooling system temperature gauge .....................121
Fuel level indicator ...........................................122
Odometer .......................................................123
Oil temperature gauge ......................................120
Speedometer ..................................................123
Tachometer ....................................................120
Voltage indication .............................................124
Warning and indicator lights, overview .................118
Intelligent Maintenance Computer
for the Cayenne (V6) ................................................122
Interior light
Switching on/off ..............................................109
Switching on/off automatically ............................109
Interior mirror
Automatic anti-dazzle function ..............................51
ISOFIX system
Installing ...........................................................46
Installing a child seat ..........................................46
Prescribed installation direction of child seat
(depending on age of child) ..................................42
Recommended child seats ...................................43
J
Jack
Jacking points on the vehicle ..............................302
Storage location in luggage compartment ............294
Jump lead starting with exhausted battery ...................332
Jump lead starting, external power supply ...................332
K
Key
Changing battery..............................................331
Emergency operation, ignition lock ......................164
Locking the vehicle door......................................18
Opening/closing Panorama roof system ...............100
Opening/closing sliding/lifting roof ........................94
Unlocking the vehicle door ...................................17
Key (remote control) ..................................................30
L
Language
Setting on the multi-purpose display ....................149
Large roof
Emergency unlocking ........................................102
Functional description .........................................98
Opening/closing.................................................99
Opening/closing roller blind ...............................101
Opening/closing with vehicle key.........................100
Leather care instructions ..........................................284
Left-hand traffic (changing headlights) .........................349
Index
375
Level control
Displaying status on the multi-purpose display ...... 133
Lowering the vehicle ........................................ 202
Lowering the vehicle for loading ......................... 202
Overview ........................................................ 200
Raising the vehicle ........................................... 201
Warning message on the multi-purpose display ..... 203
Light
Headlight flasher ............................................. 108
Switching on Coming Home function ................... 111
Switching on lighting off delay
when leaving the vehicle ................................... 111
Switching on when entering the vehicle ................ 112
Light alloy wheels
Care instructions ............................................. 283
Inscription ...................................................... 293
Light switch
Functional description, auto function ................... 106
Overview ........................................................ 105
Switching on auto position ................................ 105
Lights
Care instructions ............................................. 283
Dimming comfort lighting .................................. 111
Dimming footwell light ...................................... 111
Switching front reading lights on/off ................... 109
Switching front reading lights on/off automatically . 109
Switching interior light on/off ............................. 109
Switching interior light on/off automatically .......... 109
Switching rear reading lights on/off .................... 110
Switching rear reading lights on/off automatically.. 110
Load
General information ......................................... 225
Installing luggage compartment cover ................. 227
Luggage compartment cover,
pulling out/retracting........................................ 226
Luggage safety net, permitted uses .................... 227
Position of tie-down rings .................................. 221
Removing luggage compartment cover ............... 226
Ski bag .......................................................... 229
Loading
General information ......................................... 225
Installing luggage compartment cover ................. 227
Lowering the vehicle for loading ......................... 202
Luggage compartment cover,
pulling out/retracting........................................ 226
Luggage safety net, permitted uses .................... 227
376
Index
Position of tie-down rings .................................. 221
Removing luggage compartment cover ............... 226
Ski bag .......................................................... 229
Loadspace
Cargo management system............................... 222
Opening floor .................................................. 221
Overview ........................................................ 221
Lock
Changing fuses ............................................... 318
Child lock ......................................................... 79
Disabling rear control panel
of air-conditioning system ................................... 79
Locking
Locking vehicle door from inside .......................... 25
Vehicle door with vehicle key (remote control) ......... 18
Locks
Displaying status on the multi-purpose display ...... 133
Low Range (reduction)
Displaying status on the multi-purpose display ...... 133
Indicator light .................................................. 182
Switching off................................................... 185
Switching on ................................................... 182
Luggage
General information .......................................... 225
Luggage compartment cover,
pulling out/retracting ........................................ 226
Luggage safety net, permitted uses .................... 227
Position of tie-down rings .................................. 221
Safety net ...................................................... 228
Ski bag .......................................................... 229
Luggage compartment
Closing luggage compartment lid ......................... 20
Closing the luggage compartment window ............. 24
Opening floor .................................................. 221
Opening luggage compartment lid ........................ 19
Opening luggage compartment window ................. 24
Overview ........................................................ 221
Luggage compartment cover
Installing ........................................................ 227
Pulling out ...................................................... 226
Removing ....................................................... 226
Retracting ...................................................... 226
Luggage safety net
Permitted uses ................................................ 227
Removing from rear seat backrest ...................... 228
Securing passenger compartment ...................... 228
M
Maintenance computer for the Cayenne (V6) ................ 122
Make-up mirror ......................................................... 57
Manual air conditioning
Defrosting windscreen ........................................ 64
Operating overview ............................................ 62
REST mode ...................................................... 65
Setting air distribution ........................................ 63
Setting air quantity ............................................. 63
Setting temperature ........................................... 63
Switching ECON mode on/off .............................. 64
Switching on circulating-air mode.......................... 64
Using engine residual heat................................... 65
Manual headlight beam adjustment
Functional description ....................................... 107
Settings ......................................................... 107
Manual transmission
Shift pattern ................................................... 172
Transmission ratios .......................................... 360
Maximum permitted engine speeds ............................ 172
Memory .................................................................. 34
Recalling seat settings ........................................ 33
Storing driver’s seat settings ............................... 34
Storing passenger’s seat settings ......................... 34
Minor repairs
In the event of a flat tyre ................................... 297
Jack in the luggage compartment ....................... 294
Securing the vehicle against rolling ..................... 297
Storage location of first aid kit ........................... 287
Storage location of warning triangles .................. 287
Tool kit in the luggage compartment ................... 294
Towing the vehicle ........................................... 353
Tow-starting the vehicle .................................... 352
Mirrors
Activating synchronous adjustment
of door mirrors ............................................... 144
Additional door mirrors when towing a trailer ........ 242
Adjusting door mirrors ........................................ 49
Adjusting door mirrors as parking aid .................... 50
Adjusting the door mirrors synchronously............... 49
Automatic anti-dazzle function for interior mirror ...... 51
Folding in door mirrors ....................................... 49
Switching door mirror heating on/off ..................... 50
Unfolding door mirrors........................................ 49
Motion sensor (passenger compartment monitoring)
Switching off with button in door handle
(Porsche Entry & Drive) ..................................... 261
Switching off with vehicle key ............................. 260
Moving-off assistant
for Tiptronic S (hillholder) .................................. 197
On vehicles with manual transmission .................. 198
Multi-functional steering wheel
Functional description ......................................... 54
Operating the function keys ................................. 54
With telephone function ....................................... 55
Without telephone function ................................... 56
Multi-purpose display
Activating synchronous mirror adjustment ............ 144
Changing settings of central locking system ......... 144
Displaying status of level control ......................... 133
Displaying status of locks/reduction .................... 133
Gear display for Tiptronic S ............................... 174
Overview of warning messages .......................... 150
Resetting to factory settings .............................. 149
Setting a speed limit ......................................... 131
Setting compass.............................................. 148
Setting language for displays ............................. 149
Setting lighting off delay .................................... 146
Setting the clock .............................................. 147
Setting Tyre Pressure Monitoring ........................ 134
Setting tyre sealant/sealing set .......................... 141
Setting units of displays .................................... 149
O
Octane rating, petrol ............................................... 277
Odometer
Display ........................................................... 123
Resetting ........................................................ 123
Off delay
Setting ........................................................... 146
Switching on ................................................... 111
Off-road
Crossing obstacles .......................................... 213
Driving downhill ............................................... 210
Rules for off-road driving ................................... 206
Sand.............................................................. 213
Track ruts....................................................... 214
Uphill driving ................................................... 209
Water crossing ................................................ 211
Off-road ABS functional description ............................197
Off-road driving
Crossing obstacles...........................................213
Driving downhill................................................210
Engaging the centre differential lock ....................183
Engaging the rear differential lock .......................184
Low Range (reduction) indicator light ...................182
Low Range indicator light ..................................182
Rules for driving ...............................................206
Sand ..............................................................213
Switching off Low Range (reduction) ....................185
Switching on Low Range (reduction) ....................182
Track ruts .......................................................214
Uphill driving ...................................................209
Water crossing ................................................211
Off-road PSM functional description ............................192
Oil
Change quantity ...............................................368
Checking oil level with dipstick............................265
Consumption ...................................................359
Engine oil pressure...........................................154
Filler opening...................................................267
General information ..........................................266
Oil-level warning on the multi-purpose display ........265
Temperature gauge ..........................................120
Topping up .....................................................267
On-board computer
Activating synchronous mirror adjustment ............144
Changing settings of central locking system .........144
Displaying status of level control .........................133
Displaying status of locks/reduction ....................133
Gear display for Tiptronic S................................174
Overview of warning messages ..........................150
Resetting to factory settings ..............................149
Setting a speed limit .........................................131
Setting compass ..............................................148
Setting language for displays .............................149
Setting lighting off delay ....................................146
Setting the clock ..............................................147
Setting Tyre Pressure Monitoring ........................134
Setting tyre sealant/sealing set ..........................141
Setting units of displays ....................................149
Opening and closing
Automatically closing the rear lid...........................22
Closing spare wheel bracket ..............................315
Closing the rear window ......................................24
Loadspace floor ...............................................221
Locking vehicle door with the vehicle key
(remote control) .................................................18
Opening and closing rear lid automatically ..............20
Opening spare wheel bracket .............................314
Opening the rear lid automatically .........................21
Panorama roof system ........................................98
Roller blind of the Panorama roof system .............101
Sliding/lifting roof ...............................................93
Unlocking and opening rear window .......................24
Unlocking vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive ...17
Unlocking vehicle door with the vehicle key
(remote control) .................................................17
Opening and closing the engine compartment lid ............27
Opening and locking
Engine compartment lid.......................................27
Locking vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive ......18
Opening and locking vehicle door from inside ..........25
Opening the rear lid automatically ................................21
P
Paint
Care instructions ..............................................281
Polishing .........................................................281
Preserving ......................................................281
Removing spots and stains ................................281
Repairing damage ............................................281
Panorama roof system
Emergency unlocking ........................................102
Functional description .........................................98
Opening/closing.................................................99
Opening/closing roller blind ...............................101
Opening/closing with vehicle key.........................100
ParkAssist
Distance display, front ......................................254
Distance display, rear .......................................254
Functional description .......................................252
Switching on/off ..............................................252
When driving with a trailer ..................................255
Parking aid
Distance display, front ......................................254
Distance display, rear .......................................254
Functional description .......................................252
Storing door mirror setting as parking aid ..............34
Switching on/off ..............................................252
Index
377
Swivelling down mirror glass ............................... 50
When driving with a trailer ................................. 255
Parking brake
Applying ........................................................ 166
Releasing ....................................................... 166
Warning message ............................................ 155
Parking heater ......................................................... 82
Activating a memory location ............................... 85
Changing the remote control battery ................... 331
Faults .............................................................. 86
Programming.................................................... 84
Remote control ................................................. 83
Switching on/off ................................................ 83
Particle filter maintenance instructions ....................... 272
PASM (Porsche Active Suspension Management)
Functional description ...................................... 204
Overview ........................................................ 188
Selecting the running-gear setup ........................ 204
Passenger airbag
Switching on and off .......................................... 44
Warning light in the centre console ....................... 45
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
Warning light in the centre console ....................... 45
Passenger compartment monitoring system ................ 261
Switching off with button in door handle
(Porsche Entry & Drive) .................................... 261
Switching off with vehicle key ............................ 260
Passenger mirror
Activating synchronous mirror adjustment ............ 144
Additional door mirrors when towing a trailer ........ 242
Adjusting.......................................................... 49
Adjusting as parking aid ...................................... 50
Adjusting synchronously ..................................... 49
Driving with a trailer ......................................... 242
Folding in ......................................................... 49
Storing setting as parking aid .............................. 34
Switching heating on/off ..................................... 50
Unfolding ......................................................... 49
Performance test on roller test stands ....................... 199
Petrol
Consumption .................................................. 360
Fuel can ......................................................... 276
Fuel level indicator ........................................... 122
Fuel reserve warning ........................................ 122
Octane rating .................................................. 277
Quality ........................................................... 277
378
Index
Refuelling ....................................................... 277
Tank capacity ................................................. 368
Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM)
Functional description....................................... 204
Overview ........................................................ 188
Selecting the running-gear setup ........................ 204
Porsche Drive-Off Assistant
Moving-off assistant on vehicles
with manual transmission .................................. 198
Porsche Dynamic Chassis Control (PDCC)
Functional description....................................... 205
Overview ........................................................ 188
Porsche Entry & Drive
Inclination sensor............................................. 261
Locking the vehicle ............................................ 18
Opening/closing Panorama roof system
with vehicle key ............................................... 100
Passenger compartment monitoring system ......... 261
Unlocking the vehicle.......................................... 17
Porsche Stability Management (PSM)
Functional description of off-road PSM ................. 192
Multi-functional light in the tachometer ................. 193
Overview ........................................................ 188
Switching off................................................... 192
Switching on ................................................... 193
Warning message on the multi-purpose display ..... 155
Porsche Traction Management (PTM)
Overview ........................................................ 188
Porsche Traction Management Plus (PTM Plus)
Overview ........................................................ 188
Power steering ....................................................... 272
Power windows
Adjusting after connecting battery ........................ 91
Closing windows with button in door handle
(Porsche Entry & Drive)....................................... 90
Disabling in the rear doors .................................. 89
Opening/closing windows with rocker switch .......... 88
Opening/closing windows with vehicle key
(without Porsche Entry & Drive) ............................ 90
Overview of driver’s door control panel .................. 88
Overview of passenger’s door control panel ........... 88
Power-transmission and running-gear control systems
Overview (PTM, PTM Plus, PSM, PASM) ............... 188
PSM (Porsche Stability Management) ......................... 192
Multi-functional light in the tachometer ................. 193
Overview ........................................................ 188
Switching off ................................................... 192
Switching on ................................................... 193
Warning message on the multi-purpose display ..... 155
PTM (Porsche Traction Management)
Overview ........................................................ 188
PTM Plus (Porsche Traction Management Plus)
Overview ........................................................ 188
R
Radiator fans ......................................................... 269
Rain sensor ........................................................... 115
Adjusting ........................................................ 115
Switching on ................................................... 114
Reading lights, front
Switching on/off .............................................. 109
Switching on/off automatically ........................... 109
Rear fog light
Changing bulb ................................................. 347
Switching on ................................................... 105
Rear lid
Automatic......................................................... 20
Locking............................................................ 20
Opening ........................................................... 19
Rear reading lights
Switching on/off .............................................. 110
Switching on/off automatically ........................... 110
Rear seats
Adjusting to vertical position .............................. 220
Folding forward ............................................... 218
Folding forward and returning to upright position ... 218
Rear shelf
Installing ........................................................ 227
Pulling out ...................................................... 226
Removing ....................................................... 226
Retracting ...................................................... 226
Rear window
Closing ............................................................ 24
Opening ........................................................... 24
Rear window wiper
Changing wiper blade ....................................... 275
Switching on intermittent operation ..................... 116
Windscreen wiping plus washer system ............... 116
Wiping rear window once (one-touch function) ....... 116
Reduction (Low Range)
Displaying status on the multi-purpose display....... 133
Indicator light .................................................. 182
Switching off ................................................... 185
Switching on ................................................... 182
Refuelling .............................................................. 278
Remote control
Changing battery ............................................. 331
Locking the vehicle door ..................................... 18
Opening/closing Panorama roof system ............... 100
Opening/closing sliding/lifting roof ........................ 94
Parking heater ................................................... 83
REST mode
With 2-zone air conditioning ................................. 71
With 4-zone air conditioning ................................. 78
With manual air conditioning ................................. 65
Reversing light
Changing bulb ................................................. 347
Rim offset .............................................................. 361
Roller blind
Cleaning position ............................................. 102
Opening/closing for Panorama roof system .......... 101
Roof console .......................................................... 109
Roof Transport System ............................................ 231
Running gear set-up
Functional description ....................................... 204
Selecting ........................................................ 204
Running in
New brake pads .............................................. 160
New tyres ....................................................... 160
Oil and fuel consumption ................................... 160
Running-gear control systems (level control)
Overview (PTM, PTM Plus, PSM, PASM) ....................... 188
S
Safety button in the armrest........................................ 79
Safety net
Permitted uses ................................................ 227
Removing from rear seat backrest ...................... 228
Securing passenger compartment ...................... 228
Screwdriver ........................................................... 294
Sealant/sealing set
For defective tyres ........................................... 299
Setting on the multi-purpose display .................... 141
Seals
Care instructions ............................................. 284
Seat belts
Adjusting belt height ...........................................41
Belt tensioner functional description ......................39
Care instructions..............................................285
Fastening..........................................................40
Opening ...........................................................40
Warning light on the tachometer ...........................39
Seat heating.............................................................37
Rear (4-zone air conditioning) ...............................38
Rear (manual/2-zone air conditioning) ....................79
Switching off .....................................................37
Switching on .....................................................37
Seats
Adjusting rear seats to vertical position ................220
Adjusting the front seat .......................................32
Folding forward at rear and returning
to upright position ............................................218
Recalling settings (memory) .................................33
Storing driver’s seat settings (memory) ..................34
Storing passenger mirror setting as a parking aid
(memory) ..........................................................34
Storing passenger’s seat settings (memory) ...........34
Securing points in the luggage compartment ...............221
Selector lever
Automatic .......................................................174
Tiptronic S ......................................................174
Selector lever (Tiptronic S)
Display on the multi-purpose display ....................174
Emergency unlocking........................................179
Sensors
Air-conditioning sensors for 2-zone air conditioning ..71
Air-conditioning sensors for 4-zone air conditioning ..78
Service indicator .....................................................154
Service indicator for the Cayenne (V6) ........................122
Setting air distribution
With 2-zone air conditioning .................................69
With 4-zone air conditioning .................................76
With manual air conditioning .................................63
Setting air quantity
With 2-zone air conditioning .................................68
With 4-zone air conditioning .................................76
With manual air conditioning .................................63
Setting temperature
With 2-zone air conditioning .................................68
With 4-zone air conditioning .................................76
With manual air conditioning .................................63
Setting units on the multi-purpose display ....................149
Settings.................................................................107
Side lights..............................................................105
Changing bulb, halogen .....................................343
Installing headlights ..........................................337
Removing headlights .........................................335
Sill covers ..............................................................303
Ski bag
Loading ..........................................................229
Securing .........................................................230
Stowing ..........................................................230
Sliding/lifting roof
Brief overview....................................................92
Emergency unlocking ..........................................95
Functional description .........................................93
Opening/closing with vehicle key...........................94
Snow chains
General information ..........................................291
Overview ........................................................362
Socket (12 V) .........................................................317
Socket for trailer
Hitch, electrical ................................................250
Mechanical hitch ..............................................247
Spacers
Fitting ............................................................306
General information ..........................................295
Removing .......................................................305
Spare wheel
Fitting on spare wheel bracket ............................313
General information ..........................................313
Removing from spare wheel bracket ....................313
Spare wheel / collapsible spare wheel
in the luggage compartment ..............................307
Spare wheel bracket
Closing ...........................................................315
Opening..........................................................314
Spare wheel in the luggage compartment ....................307
Speed code letter on tyre .........................................293
Speed limit
Setting on the multi-purpose display ....................131
Speedometer, digital ...............................................123
Sport button ...........................................................186
Sport mode ............................................................186
SportDesign package (information on risk of damage) ...207
Sports exhaust system
Switching on/off ..............................................186
Index
379
Stainless steel exhaust tailpipes ................................ 283
Starting
Engine (manual transmission)............................. 164
Starting with manual transmission ............................. 164
Steam-jet cleaners Information on use ........................ 279
Steering column
Locking with Porsche Entry & Drive .................... 163
Locking without Porsche Entry & Drive ................ 163
Steering column lock
With Porsche Entry & Drive ............................... 262
Without Porsche Entry & Drive ........................... 262
Steering wheel
Adjustment ....................................................... 53
Heating ............................................................ 52
Multi-functional steering wheel
with telephone function ....................................... 55
Multi-functional steering wheel
without telephone function................................... 56
Multi-functional steering wheel,
functional description ......................................... 54
Operating the function keys ................................. 54
Steering lock .................................................. 161
Switching key illumination on/off .......................... 55
Storage ................................................................ 232
Drawer under the right front seat ....................... 235
Glasses case in the roof console ........................ 232
Glove compartment ......................................... 233
Storage compartment at the side
of the luggage compartment ............................. 235
Storage compartment in the front armrest ........... 234
Storage compartment in the rear armrest ............ 234
Storage compartment
At the sides of the luggage compartment ............ 235
Drawer under the right front seat ....................... 235
Glasses case in the roof console ........................ 232
Glove compartment ......................................... 233
In the front armrest .......................................... 234
In the rear armrest........................................... 234
Storage ......................................................... 232
Strap reel
Inserting and adjusting ..................................... 222
Strap reel storage location ................................ 222
Summer tyres
Changing tyres................................................ 304
Overview ........................................................ 361
380
Index
Storage ......................................................... 289
Tyre pressure ................................................. 242
Sun visor................................................................. 57
Sunblind .................................................................. 57
Cleaning position ............................................. 102
Opening/closing for Panorama roof system.......... 101
Switching child lock (rear doors) on/off ........................ 26
Switching child protection on/off ................................. 89
Switching ECON mode on/off
With 2-zone air conditioning ................................. 70
With 4-zone air conditioning ................................. 78
With manual air conditioning ................................ 64
Switching hazard warning lights on/off ....................... 108
Switching Mono function on/off
With 2-zone air conditioning ................................. 69
With 4-zone air conditioning ................................. 77
Switching off protection against towing
(inclination sensor) with vehicle key ............................ 260
Switching on automatic circulating-air mode .................. 67
With 2-zone air conditioning ................................. 69
With 4-zone air conditioning ................................. 77
Switching on circulating-air mode
With 2-zone air conditioning ................................. 70
With 4-zone air conditioning ................................. 77
With manual air conditioning ................................ 64
Switching on door-surrounding lighting ....................... 112
Switching on driving light assistant ............................ 105
Switching on fog lights ............................................ 105
Switching on parking light ........................................ 108
T
Tachometer
Display .......................................................... 120
Tail light
Changing bulb ................................................. 347
Installing ........................................................ 346
Removing ....................................................... 345
Technical data
Capacities ...................................................... 368
Dimensions .................................................... 369
Driving performance......................................... 370
Engine ........................................................... 359
Fuel consumption ............................................ 360
Ground clearance ............................................ 366
Transmission ratio ........................................... 360
Tyre pressure (bar/psi) ..................................... 363
Weights ......................................................... 365
Telescopic bar
Inserting and adjusting ...................................... 222
Test stands
Brake test ...................................................... 199
Performance test ............................................. 199
Tie-down rings, securing points
in the luggage compartment ..................................... 221
Tiptronic S
Functional description ....................................... 173
Gear display on the multi-purpose display ............. 174
Rocker switches on the steering wheel .................. 52
Selector lever ................................................. 174
Transmission ratios .......................................... 360
Tool kit
Compressor (on vehicles without level control) ...... 295
Jack .............................................................. 294
Screwdriver .................................................... 294
Wedges ......................................................... 297
Tools
Compressor (on vehicles without level control) ...... 295
Jack .............................................................. 294
Screwdriver .................................................... 294
Wedges ......................................................... 297
Towing
General information .......................................... 353
Towing bar ..................................................... 352
Towing lug...................................................... 354
Towing rope ................................................... 352
Tow-starting, e.g. in case of discharged battery ........... 352
Track Data ............................................................ 361
Trailer
Definitions ...................................................... 241
Effects on Parkassist........................................ 255
Hitching ......................................................... 243
Operation ....................................................... 241
Socket (electrical hitch) .................................... 250
Socket (mechanical hitch).................................. 247
Tips on driving ................................................ 242
Trailer load data .............................................. 365
Unhitching ...................................................... 243
Vehicle-trailer combination stabilisation,
functional description ....................................... 194
Trailer coupling
Extending (electrical hitch) ................................. 249
Inserting ball hitch (mechanical hitch) ................... 245
Removing ball hitch (mechanical hitch) ................. 248
Retracting (electrical hitch) ................................ 249
Socket (mechanical hitch) .................................. 247
Storage location of ball hitch (mechanical hitch)..... 243
Transmission
Shift pattern .................................................... 172
Transmission ratios .......................................... 360
Transport
Switching off inclination sensor ........................... 260
Transport (on car trains, ferries, etc.) ......................... 203
Trip counter
Display ........................................................... 123
Resetting ........................................................ 123
Two-zone air conditioning
Air-conditioning sensors ...................................... 71
Defrosting windscreen ........................................ 70
Operating overview ............................................ 67
REST mode....................................................... 71
Setting air distribution ......................................... 69
Setting air quantity ............................................. 68
Setting temperature ........................................... 68
Switching ECON mode on/off ............................... 70
Switching Mono function on/off ............................ 69
Switching on automatic circulating-air mode............ 69
Switching on circulating-air mode .......................... 70
Using engine residual heat ................................... 71
Tyre pressure......................................................... 242
Air pressure (bar/psi)........................................ 363
Plate .............................................................. 358
Plate location .................................................. 358
Warning light on speedometer ............................ 142
Warning message ............................................ 152
Tyre Pressure Monitoring
Setting on the multi-purpose display .................... 134
Tyre sealant/sealing set
For defective tyres ........................................... 299
Setting on the multi-purpose display .................... 141
Tyres
Changing ........................................................ 304
Fitting spare wheel on spare wheel bracket .......... 313
Flat................................................................ 297
General information .......................................... 288
Inflating (with compressor on vehicles
with air suspension) .......................................... 311
Inscription on radial tyre .................................... 293
Overview ........................................................361
Removing spare wheel from spare wheel bracket ..313
Removing/fitting spacers...................................305
Rim offset .......................................................361
Size ...............................................................361
Snow chains (general information) .......................291
Spare wheel (general information) .......................313
Storage ..........................................................289
Tracks ...........................................................361
Winter tyres (general information) ........................291
U
Ultrasound sensor, ParkAssist ...................................253
Undersealing (care instructions) .................................282
Uphill driving, off-road ..............................................209
Using engine residual heat
With 2-zone air conditioning .................................71
With 4-zone air conditioning .................................78
With manual air conditioning .................................65
V
Vehicle
Charging the battery .........................................333
Data bank .......................................................357
Identification number location .............................357
Key .................................................................30
Laying up........................................................285
Lowering with level control.................................202
Raising with level control ...................................201
Raising with the jack .........................................301
Recovering .....................................................353
Securing the vehicle against rolling .....................297
Switching off inclination sensor for transport .........260
Towing ...........................................................353
Tow-starting ....................................................352
Transporting ...................................................203
Vehicle door
Locking with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless) ..........18
Locking with the vehicle key (remote control) ..........18
Unlocking with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless) ........17
Unlocking with the vehicle key (remote control)........17
Vehicle key (remote control)
Changing battery .............................................331
Emergency operation of key...............................164
Locking the vehicle door......................................18
Opening/closing Panorama roof system ...............100
Opening/closing sliding/lifting roof ........................94
Opening/closing windows
(without Porsche Entry & Drive) .............................90
Unlocking the vehicle door ...................................17
Vehicle-trailer combination stabilisation,
functional description ...............................................194
Vents, opening/closing ...............................................80
Voltage indication ....................................................124
Voltmeter ...............................................................124
W
Warning - brake proportioning ....................................155
Warning messages
Overview ........................................................150
Warning triangle (storage location) .............................287
Washer fluid
Antifreeze .......................................................271
Change quantity ...............................................368
Topping up .....................................................271
Washing ................................................................280
Water crossing .......................................................211
Wedges to prevent rolling .........................................297
Wedges to secure the vehicle against rolling ................297
Weights Data ..........................................................365
Wheels
Changing ........................................................304
Fitting spare wheel on spare wheel bracket ...........313
Flat ................................................................297
General information ..........................................288
Overview ........................................................361
Removing spare wheel from spare wheel bracket ...313
Removing/fitting spacers ...................................305
Rim offset .......................................................361
Security wheel bolt (wrench socket) .....................296
Size ...............................................................361
Snow chains (general information) .......................291
Spare wheel (general information) .......................313
Storage ..........................................................289
Tracks ...........................................................361
Wheel bolts (care instructions) ............................296
Winter tyres (general information) ........................291
Index
381
Windows
Adjusting after connecting battery ........................ 91
Care instructions ............................................. 282
Opening/closing with rocker switch ...................... 88
Opening/closing with vehicle key
(without Porsche Entry & Drive) ............................ 90
Windscreen washer system
Change quantity .............................................. 368
Windscreen wiper/washer stalk ................................. 114
Rain sensor adjustment .................................... 115
Rear window wiping plus washer system .............. 116
Switching on intermittent operation
of rear window wiper ........................................ 116
Switching on rain sensor ................................... 114
Windscreen wiping plus washer system ............... 116
Windscreen, fast wiping .................................... 115
Windscreen, slow wiping ................................... 115
Wiping rear window once (one-touch function) ....... 116
Wiping windscreen once (one-touch function) ........ 115
Windscreen wipers
Brief overview ................................................. 113
Care instructions ............................................. 282
Rain sensor adjustment .................................... 115
Rear window wiping plus washer system .............. 116
Replacing wiper blades at front .......................... 274
Stalk ............................................................. 114
Switching on intermittent operation
of rear window wiper ........................................ 116
Switching on rain sensor ................................... 114
Windscreen wiping plus washer system ............... 116
Windscreen, fast wiping .................................... 115
Windscreen, slow wiping ................................... 115
Wiping rear window once (one-touch function) ....... 116
Wiping windscreen once (one-touch function) ........ 115
Winter driving......................................................... 329
Winter tyres
Changing tyres................................................ 304
General information ......................................... 291
Overview ........................................................ 361
Storage ......................................................... 289
Tyre pressure ................................................. 242
Wiper blades
Care instructions ............................................. 282
Changing (rear) ............................................... 275
Replacing (front) .............................................. 274
382
Index
With Porsche Entry & Drive ......................................... 16
Wrench socket (security wheel bolt) ........................... 296
X
Xenon
Installing headlights .......................................... 337
Removing headlights ........................................ 335